Electric Charges and Fields

Date : TEST ID:

Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. The capacity and the energy stored in a parallel plate condenser with air between its plates are
respectively 𝐶! and 𝑊! . If the air is replaced by glass (dielectric constant = 5) between the plates, the
capacity of the plates and the energy stored in it will respectively be
𝑊
a) 5𝐶! , 5𝑊! b) 5𝐶! , !
5
𝐶! 𝐶! 𝑊!
c) , 5𝑊! d) ,
5 5 5
2. An electron initially at rest falls a distance of 1.5 cm in a uniform electric field of magnitude 2× 10" N/C.
The time taken by electron to fall this distance is
a) 1.3 × 10# s b) 2.1 × 10$%# s
c) 1.6 × 10 $%! d) 2.9 × 10$' s
s
3. Two charges each equal to 𝜂𝑞Q𝜂$% < √3T are placed at corners of an equilateral triangle of side 𝑎. The
electric field at the third corner is 𝐸( then (where 𝐸! = 𝑞/4𝜋𝜀! 𝑎# )
a) 𝐸( = 𝐸! b) 𝐸( < 𝐸!
c) 𝐸( > 𝐸! d) 𝐸( ≥ 𝐸!
4. When a slab of dielectric material is introduced between the parallel plates of a capacitor which remains
connected to a battery, then charge on plates relative to earlier charge
a) Is less b) Is same
c) Is more d) May be less or more depending on the nature of the
material introduced
5. An air filled parallel plate capacitor the capacity 𝐶. If distance between plates is doubled and it is
immersed in a liquid then capacity becomes twice. Dielectric constant of the liquid is
a) 1 b) 2
c) 3 d) 4
6. Top of the stratosphere has an electric field 𝐸 (in units of 𝑉/𝑚) nearly equal to
a) 0 b) 10
c) 100 d) 1000
7. Two capacitor of capacitance 2𝜇𝐹 and 3𝜇𝐹 are joined in series. Outer plate first capacitor is at 1000 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
and outer plate of second capacitor is earthed (grounded). Now the potential on inner plate of each
capacitor will be
a) 700 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡 b) 200 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡
c) 600 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡 d) 400 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡
8. An air capacitor of capacity 𝐶 = 10𝜇𝐹 is connected to a constant voltage battery of 12 𝑉. Now the space
between the plates is filled with a liquid of dielectric constant 5. The charge that flows now from battery to
the capacitor is
a) 120𝜇𝐶 b) 699𝜇𝐶
c) 480𝜇𝐶 d) 24𝜇𝐶
9. A point charge of 1.8µC is at the centre of cubical Gaussian surface 55cm on edge. What is the net electric
flux through the surface?
a) 1.0 × 10) N − m# C$% b) 3.0 × 10) N − m# C$%
c) 2.0 × 10) N − m# C$% d) 4.0 × 10) N − m# C$%
10. Two identical metal spheres charged with + 12𝜇F and -8𝜇F are kept at certain distance in air. They are
brought into contact and then kept at the same distance. The ratio of the magnitudes of electrostatic forces
between them before them and after contact is
a) 12:1 b) 8:1
c) 24:1 d) 4:1
11. The potential of the electric field produced by point charge at any point (𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) is given by 𝑉 = 3𝑥 # + 5,
where 𝑥, 𝑦 are in metres and V is in volts. The intensity of the electric field at (-2,1,0) is
a) +17 Vm$% b) −17 Vm$%
c) +12 Vm $% d) −12 Vm$%
12. Two large metal plates are placed parallel to each other. The inner surfaces of plates are charged by +𝜎
and – 𝜎(cm$# ). The outer surfaces are neutral. The electric field in the region between the plates and
outside the plates is
2𝜎 𝜎 𝜎
a) , b) , zero
𝜀! 𝜀! 𝜀!
2𝜎 2𝜎
c) , zero d) zero,
𝜀! 𝜀!
13. Three identical capacitors are given a charge 𝑄 each and they are then allowed to discharge through
resistance 𝑅% , 𝑅# and 𝑅( . Their charges, as a function of time shown in the graph below. The smallest of the
three resistance is

a) 𝑅( b) 𝑅#
c) 𝑅% d) Cannot be predicted
14. In nature, the electric charge of any system is always equal to
a) Half integral multiple of the least amount of b) Zero
charge
c) Square of the least amount of charge d) Integral multiple of the least amount of charge
15. Three equal charges are placed on the three corners of a square. If the force between 𝑞% and 𝑞# is 𝐹%# and
*
that between 𝑞% and 𝑞( is 𝐹%( , the ratio of magnitudes *!" is
!#
a) 1/2 b) 2
c) 1/√2 d) √2
16. The respective radii of the two spheres of a spherical condenser are 12 𝑐𝑚 and 9 𝑐𝑚. The dielectric
constant of the medium between them is 6. The capacity of the condenser will be
a) 240 𝑝𝐹 b) 240 𝜇𝐹
c) 240 𝐹 d) None of the above
17. All capacitors used in the diagram are identical and each is of capacitance 𝐶. Then the effective capacitance
between the points 𝐴 and 𝐵 is

a) 1.5𝐶 b) 6𝐶
c) 𝐶 d) 3𝐶
18. Two protons 𝐴 and 𝐵 are placed in space between plates of a parallel plate capacitor charged upto 𝑉 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
(see fig.)
Force on protons are 𝐹+ and 𝐹, then

a) 𝐹+ > 𝐹, b) 𝐹+ < 𝐹,
c) 𝐹+ = 𝐹, d) Nothing can be said
19. The force of interaction between two charges 𝑞% = 6𝜇 C and 𝑞# = 2𝜇C is 12 N. If charge 𝑞 = −2𝜇C is added
to each of the charges, then the new force of interaction is
a) 2 × 10$- N b) Zero
c) 30 N d) 2 × 10$( N
20. Three capacitor each of 6𝜇𝐹 are available. The minimum and maximum capacitances which may be
obtained are
a) 6𝜇𝐹, 18𝜇𝐹 b) 3𝜇𝐹, 12𝜇𝐹
c) 2𝜇𝐹, 12𝜇𝐹 d) 2𝜇𝐹, 18𝜇𝐹
21. Electric field intensity at a point in between two parallel sheets with like charges of same surface charge
densities (𝜎) is
𝜎 𝜎
a) b)
2𝜀! 𝜀!
c) Zero 2𝜎
d)
𝜀!
22. Energy associated with a moving charge is due to a
a) Electric field b) Magnetic field
c) Both electric field and magnetic field d) None of these
23. A conducting sphere of radius 𝑅 = 20 𝑐𝑚 is given a charge 𝑄 = 16𝜇𝐶. What is 𝐸†⃗ at centre
a) 3.6 × 10. 𝑁/𝐶 b) 1.8 × 10. 𝑁/𝐶
c) Zero d) 0.9 × 10. 𝑁/𝐶
24. If Ea be the electric field strength of a short dipole at a point on its axial line and Ee that on equatorial line
at the same distance, then
a) Ee = 2Ea b) Ea = 2Ee
c) Ea = Ee d) None of these
25. Four charges equal to −𝑄 are placed at the four corners of a square and a charge 𝑞 is at its centre. If the
system is in equilibrium the value of 𝑞 is
𝑄 𝑄
a) − (1 + 2√2) b) (1 + 2√2)
4 4
𝑄 𝑄
c) − (1 + 2√2) d) (1 + 2√2)
2 2
26. 4 point charges each +𝑞 is placed on the circumference of a circle of diameter 2𝑑 in such a way that they
form a square. The potential at the centre is
a) 0 4𝑞
b)
𝑑
4𝑑 𝑞
c) d)
𝑞 4𝑑
27. The electric intensity outside a charged sphere of radius 𝑅 at a distance 𝑟(𝑟 > 𝑅) is
𝜎𝑅# 𝜎𝑟 #
a) b)
𝜀! 𝑟 # 𝜀! 𝑅#
 𝜎𝑟 𝜎𝑅
c) d)
𝜀! 𝑅 𝜀! 𝑟
28. The ratio of electrostatic and gravitational forces acting between electron and proton separated by a
distance 5 × 10$%% 𝑚, will be (Charge on electron = 1.6 × 10$%' 𝐶, mass of electron = 9.1 × 10$(% 𝑘𝑔, mass
of proton = 1.6 × 10$#- 𝑘𝑔, 𝐺 = 6.7 × 10$%% 𝑁𝑚# /𝑘𝑔# )
a) 2.36 × 10(' b) 2.36 × 10"!
c) 2.34 × 10"% d) 2.34 × 10"#
29. A parallel plate condenser with a dielectric of dielectric constant 𝐾 between the plates has a capacity 𝐶 and
is charged to a potential 𝑉 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠. The dielectric stab is slowly removed from between the plates and then
reinserted. The net work done by the system in this process is
1
a) (𝐾 − 1)𝐶𝑉 # b) 𝐶𝑉 # (𝐾 − 1)/𝐾
2
c) (𝐾 − 1)𝐶𝑉 # d) Zero
30. A cube of side 𝑙 is placed in a uniform field 𝑬, where 𝑬 = 𝐸•̂. The net electric flux through the cube is
a) Zero b) 𝑙 # 𝐸
c) 4𝑙 # 𝐸 d) 6𝑙 # 𝐸
31. The displacement of a charge 𝑄 in the electric field 𝐸†⃗ = 𝑒% 𝚤̂ + 𝑒# 𝚥̂ + 𝑒( 𝑘• is 𝑟⃗ = 𝑎𝚤̂ + 𝑏𝚥̂. The work done is
a) 𝑄(𝑎𝑒% + 𝑏𝑒# ) b) 𝑄—(𝑎𝑒% )# + (𝑏𝑒# )#

c) 𝑄(𝑒% + 𝑒# )—𝑎# + 𝑏# d) 𝑄 ˜™𝑒%# + 𝑒## š (𝑎 + 𝑏)

32. In the following figure two parallel metallic plates are maintained at different potential. If an electron is
released midway between the plates, it will move

a) Right ward at constant speed b) Left ward at constant speed

c) Accelerated right ward d) Accelerated left ward
33. Electric potential is given by
𝑉 = 6𝑥 − 8𝑥𝑦 # − 8𝑦 + 6𝑦𝑧 − 4𝑧 #
Then electric force acting on 2𝐶 point charge placed on origin will be
a) 2𝑁 b) 6𝑁
c) 8𝑁 d) 20𝑁
34. In Millikan’s oil drop experiment an oil drop carrying a charge 𝑄 is held stationary by a potential
difference 2400 𝑉 between the plates. To keep a drop of half the radius stationary the potential difference
had to be made 600 𝑉. What is the charge on the second drop
𝑄 𝑄
a) b)
4 2
3𝑄
c) 𝑄 d)
2
35. The unit of electric field is not equivalent to
a) 𝑁/𝐶 b) 𝐽/𝐶
c) 𝑉/𝑚 d) 𝐽/𝐶 − 𝑚
SECTION - B
36. Two dielectric slabs of constant 𝐾% and 𝐾# have been filled in between the plates of a capacitor as shown
below. What will be the capacitance of the capacitor
 2𝜀! 𝐴 2𝜀! 𝐴 𝐾% + 𝐾#
a) (𝐾% + 𝐾# ) b) Ÿ
𝑑 𝑑 𝐾% × 𝐾#
2𝜀! 𝐴 𝐾% × 𝐾# 2𝜀! 𝐴 𝐾% × 𝐾#
c) Ÿ d) Ÿ
2 𝐾% + 𝐾# 𝑑 𝐾% + 𝐾#
37. The electric intensity due to a dipole of length 10 𝑐𝑚 and having a charge of 500𝜇𝐶, at a point on the axis
at a distance 20 𝑐𝑚 from one of the charges in air, is
a) 6.25 × 10- 𝑁/𝐶 b) 9.28 × 10- 𝑁/𝐶
c) 13.1 × 11%% 𝑁/𝐶 d) 20.5 × 10- 𝑁/𝐶
38. Two unlike charges of magnitude 𝑞 are separated by a distance 2𝑑. The potential at a point midway
between them is
a) Zero 1
b)
4𝜋𝜀!
1 𝑞 1 2𝑞
c) . d) .
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑑 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑑#
39. For the circuit shown, which of the following statements is true

a) With 𝑆% closed, 𝑉% = 15 𝑉, 𝑉# = 20 𝑉 b) With 𝑆( closed 𝑉% = 𝑉# = 25𝑉

c) With 𝑆% and 𝑆# closed 𝑉% = 𝑉# = 0 d) With 𝑆% and 𝑆( closed, 𝑉% = 30𝑉, 𝑉# = 20𝑉
40. The charge on any one of the 2𝜇 𝐹 capacitors and 1𝜇 𝐹 capacitor will be given respectively (in 𝜇 𝐶) as
2µF 2µF

1µF

2V

a) 1,2 b) 2,1
c) 1,1 d) 2,2
41. Charges +2𝑞, +𝑞 and +𝑞 are placed at the corners 𝐴, 𝐵 and 𝐶 of an equilateral triangle 𝐴𝐵𝐶. If 𝐸 is the
electric field at the circumcentre 𝑂 of the triangle, due to the charge +𝑞, then the magnitude and direction
of the resultant electric field at 𝑂 is
a) 𝐸 along 𝐴𝑂 b) 2𝐸 along 𝐴𝑂
c) 𝐸 along 𝐵𝑂 d) 𝐸 along 𝐶𝑂
42. 𝑛 identical condensers are joined in parallel and are charged to potential 𝑉. Now they are separated and
joined in series. Then the total energy and potential difference of the combination will be
a) Energy and potential difference remain same b) Energy remains same and potential difference is 𝑛𝑉
Energy increases 𝑛 times and potential Energy increases 𝑛 times and potential difference
c) d)
difference is 𝑛𝑉 remains same
43. The charge on a capacitor of capacitance 10𝜇𝐹 connected as shown in the figure is
 a) 20𝜇𝐶 b) 15𝜇𝐶
c) 10𝜇𝐶 d) Zero
44. The total electric flux through a cube when a charge 8𝑞 is placed at one corner of the cube is
𝜀!
a) 𝜀! 𝑞 b)
𝑞
𝑞
c) 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑞 d)
𝜀!
45. The electric field between the two spheres of a charged spherical condenser
a) Is zero b) Is constant
c) Increases with distance from the Centre d) Decreases with distance from the Centre
46. Two capacitors of 3𝑝𝐹 and 6𝑝𝐹 are connected in series and a potential difference of 5000 𝑉 is applied
across the combination. They are then disconnected and reconnected in parallel. The potential between
the plates is
a) 2250𝑉 b) 2222𝑉
c) 2.25 × 10. 𝑉 d) 1.1 × 10. 𝑉
47. The capacity of a parallel plate capacitor increases with the
a) Decreases of its area b) Increase of its distance
c) Increase of its area d) None of the above
48. Four metal conductors having different shapes
I. A sphere
II. Cylinder
III. Pear
IV. Lightning conductor
are mounted on insulating stands and charged. The one which is best suited to retain the charges for a
longer time is
a) 1 b) 2
c) 3 d) 4
49. Four condenser each of capacity 4𝜇𝐹 are connected as shown in figure. 𝑉/ − 𝑉0 = 15 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠. The energy
stored in the system is

a) 2400 𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑠 b) 1800 𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑠

c) 3600 𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑠 d) 5400 𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑠
50. Two electrons are separated by a distance of 1Å. What is the coulomb force between them
a) 2.3 × 10$1 𝑁 b) 4.6 × 10$1 𝑁
c) 1.5 × 10$1 𝑁 d) None of these
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) b 2) d 3) c 4) c 33) d 34) b 35) b 36) d
5) d 6) c 7) d 8) c 37) a 38) a 39) d 40) d
9) c 10) c 11) d 12) b 41) a 42) b 43) a 44) d
13) c 14) d 15) b 16) a 45) d 46) b 47) c 48) a
17) a 18) c 19) b 20) d 49) b 50) a
21) c 22) c 23) c 24) b
25) b 26) b 27) a 28) a
29) d 30) a 31) a 32) d

Page|7
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (b) remain constant. Hence according to 𝑄 =
When a dielectric 𝐾 is introduced in a 𝐶𝑉, the charge will increase
parallel plate condenser its capacity 5 (d)
becomes 𝐾 times. Hence 𝐶 2 = 5𝐶! . Energy 𝐶=
8$ +
…(i)
:
3"
stored 𝑊! = #4 𝐶2 =
8$ ;+
…(ii)
$ #:
𝑞# 𝑞# 𝑊! From equation (i) and (ii)
∴ 𝑊2 = = ⇒ 𝑊2 =
2𝐶′ 2 × 5𝐶! 5 𝐶2 𝐾 𝐾
2 (d) = ⇒2= ⇒𝐾=4
𝐶 2 2
As the electron is moving in a straight line 6 (c)
and starts from rest. Top of the stratosphere has an electric field
𝐸 is nearly equal to 100𝑉/𝑚
Thus, from 7 (d)
#×( .
1 Equivalent capacitance = = 𝜇𝐹
#=( )
𝑠 = 𝑢𝑡 + 𝑎𝑡 # .
2 Total charge by 𝑄 = 𝐶𝑉 = ) × 1000 =
We get 1200𝜇𝐶
0 %#!!
Potential (𝑉) across 2𝜇𝐹 is 𝑉 = = =
1 4 #
ℎ = (0)𝑡 + 𝑎5 𝑡 # 600𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
2
∴ Potential on internal plates = 1000 −
2ℎ 600 = 400 𝑉
𝑡=« 8 (c)
𝑎5
Initially charge on the capacitor 𝑄 =
10 × 12 = 120𝜇𝐶
2ℎ𝑚5 𝑒𝐸 Finally charge on the capacitor 𝑄2 =
=« Ÿ𝑎5 =
𝑒𝐸 𝑚5 (5 × 10) × 12 = 600𝜇𝐶
So charge supplied by the battery later =
2 × 1.5 × 10$# × 9.1 × 10$(% 𝑄2 − 𝑄 = 480𝜇𝐶
=« 9 (c)
1.6 × 10$%' × 2 × 10"
By Gauss’s law
= 2.9 × 10$' 𝑠
𝜀! ϕ = 𝑞
3 (c) 𝑞
63 63
𝐸% = "78 9" , 𝐸# = "78 9" . Therefore 𝐸 = ϕ=
$ $
ε!
𝐸†⃗% + 𝐸†⃗#
1.8 × 10$.
√3𝜂𝑞 =
= ™𝐸%# + 𝐸## + 2𝐸% 𝐸# cos 60° = 8.85 × 10$%#
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑎#
Since 𝜂$% < √3, 1 < √3𝜂, √3𝜂 > 1 = 2.0 × 10) N − m# C$%
√3𝜂𝑞 𝑞 10 (c)
⇒ #
> ⇒ 𝐸(
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑎 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑎# % %#×($1)
𝑞 𝐹>?>@>AB = "CD × G"
$
> 𝐸! Ÿ𝐸! =
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑎#
1 96
4 (c) 𝐹>?>@>AB = × #
When dielectric is introduced, the 4πε! r
capacitance will increase and as the battery
remains connected, so the voltage will

Page|8
 Where 𝑟is the distance between them.
Q
When the charges are brought in contact,
then R3
R2
%#$1 " R1
𝑞% = 𝑞# = #
= # = 2𝜇F t1 t2 t3 t

% #×# " % Now, draw a line parallel to the time axis as

∴ 𝐹H>?AB = "CD × = G" × "CD
$ G" $ shown. Suppose this line cut the graphs at
" %
points 1, 2 and 3. Corresponding times are
⟹ |𝐹|H>?AB = G" × "7I 𝑡% , 𝑡# and 𝑡( respectively. Hence from graph
$
𝑡% < 𝑡# < 𝑡(
|*|%&%'%() '.
∴ |*|*%&()
= = 24 ⇒ 𝑅% < 𝑅# < 𝑅(
"
14 (d)
11 (d) Electric charge is quantised. It is an integral
Potential (𝑉) = 3𝑥 # + 5 multiple of 𝑒 = 1.60 × 10$%' 𝐶
15 (b)
Intensity of the electric field= % 3" % 3"
𝐹%# = . and 𝐹%( = . ⇒
"78$ 9" "78$ O9√#Q"
𝑑𝑉 *!"
= 6𝑥 =2
𝑑𝑥 *!#
16 (a)
∴ 𝐸 at 𝑥 = −2 𝑎𝑏
𝐶 = 4𝜋𝜀! 𝐾 µ ¶
= 6(−2) = −12Vm$% 𝑏−𝑎
1 12 × 9 × 10$"
= . 6 · ¸
12 (b) 9 × 10' 3 × 10$#
The situation is as shown in the figure = 24 × 10$%% = 240 𝑝𝐹
18 (c)
𝐹+ = 𝐹, ; because an uniform electric field
produced between the plates
19 (b)
% (.$#)(#$#)
New force 𝐹 = "78 R"
× 10$%# = 0
$

K
Here, 𝐸+ = #8 20 (d)
$
Minimum when connected in series and
K
and 𝐸, = #8 maximum when connected in parallel
$
21 (c)
Hence, the electric field between the plates %
Electric field between sheets 𝐸 = #8 (𝜎 −
$
𝜎 𝜎 𝜎 𝜎) = 0
𝐸 = 𝐸+ + 𝐸, = + =
2𝜀! 2𝜀! 𝜀!

and electric field outside the plates will be

zero.

13 (c)
During the discharge of a capacitor through
a resistance charge at any instant 𝑄 = 23 (c)
𝑄! 𝑒 $L/4N Electric field inside a conductor is always
𝑄! 𝑄! zero
⇒ = 𝑒 L/4N ⇒ 𝑡 = 𝐶𝑅 log 5 24 (b)
𝑄 𝑄
1
If 𝑄 → constant, then 𝑡 ∝ 𝑅 𝐸5 = 𝐸9 ∴ 𝐸9 = 2𝐸5
2
Page|9
25 (b) 𝜎𝑅#
𝐸=
If all charges are in equilibrium, system is 𝜀! 𝑟 #
also in equilibrium.
Charge at centre : charge 𝑞 is in equilibrium 28 (a)
VW+ W,
because no net force acting on it corner Gravitational force 𝐹V = R"
charge : 𝐹V
If we consider the charge at corner 𝐵. This 6.7 × 10$%% × 9.1 × 10$(% × 1.6 × 10$#-
charge will experience following forces =
(5 × 10$%% )#
0" S0 " S0 " $"-
𝐹+ = 𝑘 9" , 𝐹4 = , 𝐹T = " and 𝐹U = = 3.9 × 10 𝑁
9" O9√#Q
% 5"
;03 Electrostatic force 𝐹5 = "78
" $ R"
O9√#Q
9× 10' × 1.6 × 10$%'
× 1.6 × 10$%'
FC 𝐹5 =
FD (5 × 10$%% )#
FAC = 9.22 × 10$1 𝑁
FA
A B *+ '.##×%!./
FO So, = = 2.36 × 10('
*- (.'×%!.01
+q
O 30 (a)
As there is no charge residing inside the
D C
a cube, hence net flux is zero
Force at 𝐵 away from the centre = 𝐹+4 + 𝐹T 31 (a)
𝑘𝑄# 𝑘𝑄# By using 𝑊 = 𝑄(𝐸†⃗ . ∆𝑟⃗)
= ™𝐹+# + 𝐹,# + 𝐹T = √2 # + # ⇒ 𝑊 = 𝑄½Q𝑒% 𝚤̂ + 𝑒# 𝚥̂ + 𝑒( 𝑘•T. (𝑎𝚤̂ + 𝑏𝚥̂)¾
𝑎 2𝑎
𝑘𝑄# 1 = 𝑄(𝑒% 𝑎 + 𝑒# 𝑏)
= # Ÿ√2 +
𝑎 2 32 (d)
#S03
Force at 𝐵 towards the centre = 𝐹U = 9" Electric field is directed right ward (higher
For equilibrium of charge at 𝐵, 𝐹+4 + 𝐹T = potential of −200 𝑉 to lower potential of
𝐹U −400 𝑉). When electron left free in an
𝑘𝑄# 1 2𝐾𝑄𝑞 electric it accelerates opposite to the
⇒ # Ÿ√2 + = ⇒𝑞 electric field. Hence in the given case
𝑎 2 𝑎#
𝑄 electron accelerates left ward
= Q1 + 2√2T 34 (b)
4
26 (b) In balance condition
Potential at centre due to all charges are 𝑉 4
⇒ 𝑄𝐸 = 𝑚𝑔 ⇒ 𝑄 = Ÿ 𝜋𝑟 ( 𝜌 𝑔
𝑑 3
𝑟 ( 𝑄% 𝑟% ( 𝑉#
⇒𝑄∝ ⇒ =Ÿ ×
𝑉 𝑄# 𝑟# 𝑉%
𝑄 𝑟 ( 600
⇒ =Ÿ × = 2 ⇒ 𝑄# = 𝑄/2
𝑄# 𝑟/2 2400
1 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞 36 (d)
= º + + + » The two capacitors formed by the slabs
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑
% "3 may assumed to be in series combination
= "78 in S.I. unit
$ : 37 (a)
"3
= :
in C.G.S. unit B– q +q

27 (a) 10 cm 20 cm
The electric intensity outside a charged 25 cm
sphere.
#YR
By using 𝐸 = 9 × 10' . (R " $Z")" ; where

P a g e | 10
 𝑝 = (500 × 10$. ) × (10 × 10$# )
= 5 × 10$) 𝑐 × 𝑚,
𝑟 = 25 𝑐𝑚 = 0.25 𝑚, 𝑙 = 5 𝑐𝑚 = 0.05 𝑚
9 × 10' × 2 × 5 × 10$) × 0.25
𝐸=
{(0.25)# − (0.05)# }#
= 6.25 × 10- 𝑁/𝐶
38 (a)
S3 S($3) The sine components cancel each other
Potential at mid point 𝑂, 𝑉 = :
+ :
=0
+q O –q
The cosine components add up along 𝑂𝐴 to
give 2𝐸 cos 60[
d d ∴ Resultant field along 𝐴𝑂 = 2𝐸 −
2d 2𝐸 cos 60°
39 (d) C = 2𝐸 − 𝐸 = 𝐸
Charges on capacitors are 𝑄% = 30 × 2 = ∴ Resultant field is 𝐸 along 𝐴𝑂
60𝑝𝐶 and 𝑄# = 20 × 3 = 60𝑝𝐶 or 𝑄% = 42 (b)
𝑄# = 𝑄 (say) According to energy conservation, energy
The situation is similar as the two remains the same
capacitors in series are first charged with a 1
⇒ 𝑈Y9R9ZZ5Z = 𝑈\5R]5\ ⇒ (𝑛𝐶)𝑉 #
battery of emf 50 𝑉 and then disconnected 2
Q Q 1 𝐶 2#
+ – + – = Ÿ 𝑉 ⇒ 𝑉 2 = 𝑛𝑉
Q = 60 pC
2 𝑛
Q = 60 pC
2pF 2pF + – + X [𝑉 2 = potential difference across series
Þ combination]
V1 = 30 V V2 = 20 V 43 (a)
+ – In steady state potential difference a cross
50 V
capacitor = 2𝑉
∴ when 𝑆( is closed 𝑉% = 30𝑉 and 𝑉# = 20𝑉 So charge on capacitor 𝑄 = 10 × 2 = 20 𝜇𝐶
40 (d) 44 (d)
Potential difference across both the lines is ∵ charge 8q is placed at one corner of the
same i.e. 2𝑉. Hence charge flowing in line 2 cube, it can be imagined to be placed at the
2×2
𝑄=Ÿ = 2𝜇𝐶 centre of a large cube which can be formed
2+2
2µF 2µF
using 8 similar cubes and arranging them
Line (2) Now 8q is at centre of the 8 cubes arranged
1µF to form a closed box
Line (1) Total flux through the bigger cube
13
= 8$
[Gauss’s law]
2V % 13
⇒ Flux through one small cube = 1 × 8 =
$
So charge on each capacitor in line (2) is 3
2 𝜇𝐶 Charge time 1𝑄 = 2 × 1 = 2𝜇𝐶 8$
41 (a) 45 (d)
Resolve 𝐸 along 𝐶𝑂 and 𝐵𝑂 into two The electric field between the spheres of a
perpendicular components charged capacitor is non-uniform and it
decreases with distance from the Centre as
%
𝐸∝
R"
46 (b)
1 1 1
= + ⇒ 𝐶 = 2 𝑝𝐹
𝐶 3 6
Total charge = 2 × 10$%# × 5000 = 10$1 𝐶

P a g e | 11
 The new potential when the capacitors are Total capacitance of given system 𝐶53 =
connected in parallel is 1
𝜇𝐹
)
2 × 10$1
𝑉= = 2222 𝑉
(3 + 6) × 10$%# 1 1 8
𝑈 = 𝐶53 𝑉 # = × × 10$. × 225
47 (c) 2 2 5
Capacity of parallel plate capacitor 𝐶 = = 180 × 10$. 𝐽
8$ +
⇒𝐶∝𝐴
: = 180 × 10$. × 10- 𝑒𝑟𝑔 = 1800 𝑒𝑟𝑔
48 (a)
The sphere will retain the charge for longer 50 (a)
time, because in case of spherical metal 𝑄#
𝐹 = 9 × 10' ×
conductor, the charge quickly spreads 𝑟#
uniformly over the entire surface. (1.6 × 10$%' )#
= 9 × 10' ×
(10$%! )#
49 (b) = 2.3 × 10$1 𝑁

P a g e | 12
 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. Two positive point charges of 12 µ C and 8 µC are placed 10 cm, apart in air. The work done to bring them
4 cm closer is
a) Zero b) 3.5 J
c) 4.8 J d) 5.8 J
2. Two thin wire rings each having a radius R are placed at a distance 𝑑 apart with their axes coinciding. The
charges on the two rings are +q and –q. The potential difference between the centres of two rings is
𝑞𝑅 𝑞 1 1
a) b) R − U
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑑" 2𝜋𝜀! 𝑅 √𝑅 + 𝑑""

c) Zero 𝑞 1 1
d) R − U
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑅 √𝑅 + 𝑑""

3. 4 point charges each +q is placed on the circumference of a circle of diameter 2𝑑 in such a way that they
form a square. The potential at the centre is
a) 0 4𝑞
b)
𝑑
4𝑑 𝑞
c) d)
𝑞 4𝑑
4. # $%
An infinite line charge produces a field of 9 × 10 NC at a distance of 2 cm. the linear density is
a) 2 × 10$& Cm$% b) 10$& Cm$%
#
c) 9 × 10 Cm $% d) None of these
5. (
The voltage of clouds is 4 × 10 𝑉 with respect to ground. In a lightning strike lasting 100ms, a charge of 4C
is delivered to the ground. The power of lightning strike is
a) 160 MW b) 80 MW
c) 20 MW d) 500 kW
6. Two parallel plates of area 𝐴 are separated by two different dielectric as shown in figure. The net
capacitance is

𝜀! 𝐴 𝜀 𝐴
a) b) !
2𝑑 𝑑
3𝜀! 𝐴 4𝜀! 𝐴
c) d)
𝑑 3𝑑
7. What is the potential difference across 2µF capacitor in the circuit shown?
 a) 12 V b) 4 V
c) 6 V d) 18 V
8. The maximum field intensity on the axis of a uniformly charged ring of charge 𝑞 and radius 𝑅 will be
% + % "+
a) #)*! . ,√,." b) #)* . ,."
!
% "+ % ,+
c) .
#)*! ,√,. " d) #)* .
! ,√,. "
9. The equivalent capacitance of the combination of the capacitors is

a) 3.20 µF b) 7.80 µF
c) 3.90 µF d) 2.16 µF
10. The electric potential V at any point 𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧 (all the metre) in space is given by 𝑉 = 4𝑥 " volt. The electric
field at the point (1m, 0, 2m) in Vm$% is
a) −8ı̇k b) +8ı̇k
c) −16ı̇k d) 16kl
11. ABCD is a rectangle. At corners B, C and D of the rectangle are placed charges +10 × 10$%! C,
−20 × 10$%" C, and 10 × 10$%" C, respectively. Calculate the potential at the fourth corner. (The side
AB=4cm and BC=3cm)
a) 1.65 V b) 0.165V
c) 16.5V d) 2.65V
12. The total energy stored in the condenser system shown in the figure will be

a) 2 µJ b) 4 µJ
c) 8 µJ d) 16 µJ
13. The capacitance 𝐶 of a capacitor is

Page|2
 a) Independent of the charge and potential of the b) Dependent on the charge and independent of
capacitor potential
c) Independent of the geometrical configuration ofd) Independent of the dielectric medium between the
the capacitor two conducting surface of the capacitor
14. Two plates are 20 cm apart and the potential difference between them is 10 V. The electric field between
the plates is
a) 50 Vm$% b) 500 Vm$%
c) 0.5 Vm$% d) 20 Vm$%
15. Three concentric conducting spherical shells carry charges as follows :+𝑄 on the inner shell, −2𝑄 on the
middle shell and −5 𝑄 on the outer shell. The charge in the inner surface of the outer shell is
a) Zero b) + 𝑄
c) −2 𝑄 d) −3 𝑄
16. The equivalent capacity between points A and B in figure will be, while capacitance of each capacitor is 3
µF.
d
A
B

a) 2 µF b) 4 µF
c) 7 µF d) 9 µF
17. Two parallel large thin metal sheets have equal surface charge densities (σ = 26.4 × 10$%" Cm$" )of
opposite signs. The electric field between these sheets is
a) 1.5 NC$% b) 1.5× 10$%! NC$%
c) 3 NC$% d) 3 × 10$%! NC$%
18. Two identical capacitors have the same capacitance𝐶. One of them is charged to potential 𝑉% and the other
to𝑉" . The negative ends of the capacitors are connected together. When the positive ends are also
connected, the decrease in energy of the system is
% %
a) #𝐶(𝑉%" − 𝑉"" ) b) #𝐶(𝑉%" + 𝑉"" )
% %
c) #𝐶(𝑉% − 𝑉" )" d) #𝐶(𝑉% + 𝑉" )"
19. Find the potential at the centre of a square of side √2m. Which carries at its four corners charges 𝑞% =
3 × 10$( C,𝑞" = −3 × 10$( C, 𝑞, =−4 × 10$( C, 𝑞# = 7 × 10$( 𝐶
a) 2.7 × 10# 𝑉 b) 1.5 × 10, 𝑉
c) 3 × 10" 𝑉 d) 5 × 10, 𝑉
20. A parallel plate capacitor is made by stocking 𝑛 equally spaced plates connected alternately. If the
capacitance between any two plates is 𝑥, then the total capacitance is,
a) 𝑛𝑥 b) 𝑛/𝑥
"
c) 𝑛𝑥 d) (𝑛 − 1)𝑥
21. The work done in moving an alpha particle between two points having potential difference 25 V is
a) 8 × 10$%/ J b) 8 × 10$%0 J
c) 8 × 10$"! J d) 8 × 10$%( J
22. A capacitor is charged to store an energy 𝑈. the charging battery is disconnected. An identical capacitor is
now connected to the first capacitor in parallel. The energy in each of the capacitor is
a) 3 𝑈/2 b) 𝑈
c) 𝑈/4 d) 𝑈/2
23. A capacitor of capacitance 1 µF is filled with two dielectrics of dielectric constant 4 and 6. What is the new
capacitance?

Page|3
 a) 10 µF b) 5 µF
c) 4 µF d) 7 µF
24. The potential energy of system of two equal negative point charges of 2µC each held 1m apart in air is (𝑘 =
9 × 100 SI unit)
a) 36J b) 3.6 × 10$, J
c) 3.6J d) 3.6 × 10$" J
25. A 500 µF capacitor is charged at a steady rate of 100µCs$% . The potential difference across the capacitor
will be 10 V after in interval of
a) 5 s b) 25 s
c) 20 s d) 50 s
26. An uncharged sphere of metal is placed inside a charged parallel plate capacitor. The lines of force will
look like
a) b)

c) d)

27. A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is charged such that potential at its surface is 10V. The potential at
the centre of the sphere is
a) Zero b) 10 V
c) Same as at point 5cm away from the surface d) Same as at point 10cm away from the surface
28. Potential energy of two equal negative point charges 2µC each held 1 m apart in air is
a) 2 J b) 2 eV
c) 4 J d) 0.036 J
29. Consider the charge configuration and a spherical Gaussian surface as shown in the figure. When
calculating the flux of the electric field over the spherical surface, the electric field will be due to

a) 𝑞" b) Only the positive charge

c) All the charges d) +𝑞% and −𝑞%
30. Two metal pieces having a potential difference of 800 V are 0.2 m apart horizontally. A particle of mass
1.96 × 10$%1 kg is suspended in equilibrium between the plates. If 𝑒 is an elementary charge, then charge
on the particle is
a) 8 𝑒 b) 6 𝑒
c) 3 𝑒 d) 𝑒

Page|4
31. The four capacitors, each of 25 µF are connected as shown in figure. The DC voltmeter reads 200 V. the
change on each plate of capacitor is
V

- + - +

- + - +

a) ±2 × 10$, C b) ±5 × 10$, C
c) ±2 × 10$" C d) ±5 × 10$" C
32. A parallel plate condenser with a dielectric of dielectric constant 𝐾 between the plates has a capacity 𝐶 and
is charged to a potential 𝑉 volt. The dielectric slab is slowly removed from between the plates and then
reinserted. The net work done by the system in this process is
1
a) (𝐾 − 1)𝐶𝑉 " b) 𝐶𝑉 " (𝐾 − 1)/𝐾
2
c) (𝐾 − 1)𝐶𝑉 " d) Zero
33. Six identical capacitors are joined in parallel, charged to a potential difference of 10 V, separated and then
connected in series, 𝑖𝑒, the positive plate of one is connected to negative plate of other. Then potential
difference between free plates is
a) 10 V b) 30 V
c) 60 V 10
d) 𝑉
6
34. Two identical metal plates are given positive charges 𝑄% and 𝑄" (< 𝑄% ) respectively. If they are now
brought close together to form a parallel plates capacitor with capacitance 𝐶, the potential difference
between them is
𝑄 + 𝑄" 𝑄 + 𝑄"
a) % b) %
2𝐶 𝐶
𝑄% − 𝑄" 𝑄% − 𝑄"
c) d)
𝐶 2𝐶
35. The potential at a point P which is forming a corner of a square of side 93mm with charges, 𝒬% = 33
nC,𝒬" = −51 nC, 𝒬, = 47nC located at the other three corners is nearly
a) 16kV b) 4kV
c) 400V d) 160V
SECTION - B
36. Electric potential at the centre of a charged hollow metal sphere is
a) Zero b) Twice as that on the surface
c) Half of that on the surface d) Same as that on the surface
37. The work of electric field done during the displacement of a negatively charged particle towards a fixed
positively charged particle is 9 J. As a result the distance between the charges has been decreased by half.
What work is done by the electric field over the first half of this distance?
a) 3 J b) 6 J
c) 1.5 J d) 9 J
38. In which of the states shown in figure is the potential energy of a electric dipole maximum?
a) b)

Page|5
 c) d)

39. There are 10 condensers each of capacity 5 µF. The radio between maximum and minimum capacities
obtained from these condenses will be
a) 25 : 5 b) 40 : 1
c) 60 : 3 d) 100 : 1
40. Two identical parallel plate capacitors are placed in series and connected to a constant voltage source of 𝑉
volt. If one of the capacitor is completely immersed in a liquid of dielectric constant 𝐾, then the potential
difference between the plates of the other capacitor will change to
𝐾 𝐾+1
a) 𝑉 b)
𝐾+1 𝐾
2𝐾 𝐾+1
c) 𝑉 d) 𝑉
𝐾+1 2𝐾
41. 𝑁 identical drops of mercury are charged simultaneously to 10V. When combined to form one large drop,
the potential is found to be 40V, the value of N is
a) 4 b) 6
c) 8 d) 10
42. A capacitor of capacitance value 1 µF is charged to 30 V and the battery is then disconnected. If the
remaining circuit is connected across a 2µF capacitor, the remaining circuit is connected across a 2µF
capacitor, the energy lost by the system is
a) 300 µJ b) 450 µJ
c) 225 µJ d) 150 µJ
43. Each capacitor shown in figure is 2 µF. Then the equivalent capacitance between points 𝐴 and 𝐵 is

a) 2 µF b) 4 µF
c) 6 µF d) 8 µF
44. A soap bubble is charged to a potential of 16V. Its radius is, then doubled. The potential of the bubble now
will be
a) 16V b) 8V
c) 4V d) 2V
45. Along the 𝑥-axis, three charges + , −𝑞 𝑎𝑛𝑑 + are placed at 𝑥 = 0, 𝑥 = 𝑎 and 𝑥 = 2a
" "
respectively. The resultant electric potential at a point P located at a distance 𝑟 from the charge – 𝑞(𝑎 <<
𝑟) is (𝜀! is the permittivity of free space)
𝑞𝑎 𝑞𝑎"
a) " b)
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 ,
2 "
𝑞‰#Š 𝑞
c) d)
4𝜋𝜀 𝑟 , 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟
!
46. Four plates of equal area 𝐴 are separated by equal distance 𝑑 and are arranged as shown in the figure. The
equivalent capacity is

Page|6
 2𝜀! 𝐴 3𝜀 𝐴
a) b) !
𝑑 𝑑
3𝜀! 𝐴 𝜀! 𝐴
c) d)
2𝑑 𝑑
47. Work done in carrying a charge 𝒬′ once round the circle of radius 𝑟 with a charge 𝒬 at the centre is
1 𝒬 1 𝒬𝒬′
a) b)
4𝜋𝜖! 𝑟 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟
c) Zero 𝒬𝒬′
d)
2𝑟
48. Two identical capacitors each of capacitance 5µF are charged to potentials 2kV and 1kV respectively. Their
–ve ends are connected together. When the +ve ends are also connected together, the loss of energy of the
system is
a) 160 J b) Zero
c) 5 J d) 1.25 J
49. Four capacitors are connected as shown in figure. The equivalent capacitance between 𝐴 and 𝐵 is
1 F
D C

1 F 1 F

A B
1 F

a) 4 µF b) 0.25 µF
c) 0.75 µF d) 1.33 µF
50. The plates of a parallel plate capacitor are charged up to 100 V. A 2 mm thick plate is inserted between the
plates, then to maintain the same potential difference, the distance between the capacitor plated is
increase by 1.6 mm. the dielectric constant of the plate, is
a) 5 b) 1.25
c) 4 d) 2.5

Page|7
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) d 2) b 3) b 4) b 29) c 30) c 31) b 32) d
5) a 6) d 7) c 8) c 33) c 34) d 35) b 36) d
9) a 10) a 11) a 12) c 37) a 38) a 39) d 40) a
13) c 14) a 15) a 16) d 41) c 42) a 43) a 44) b
17) c 18) c 19) a 20) d 45) b 46) a 47) c 48) d
21) a 22) c 23) b 24) d 49) d 50) a
25) d 26) a 27) b 28) d

Page|8
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (d) 6 (d)
Work done = 𝑈" − 𝑈% =
+# +" %
• − Ž
% 𝜀! 𝐴
#)*! 3" 3# 𝐶 = 4# 4"
+5
10" 10" 5 # "
= 12 × 10$( × 8 × 10$( × 9 × 100 • − • 𝜀! 𝐴 4𝜀! 𝐴
6 10 = =
4 % % 3𝑑
4 ‰ + "Š
𝑊 = 96 × 9 × 10$, × 10" × = 5.8J " %
60 7 (c)
3 (b)
Potential at centre due to all charges are

1 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞
= • + + + Ž
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑

1 4𝑞
= in SI units
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑑

Net emf in the circuit here

𝐸 = 𝐸" − 𝐸% = 16 − 6 = 10 volt
While the equivalent capacity
6# 6" "×, (
𝐶= 6# 76"
= "7,
= 1 µF
Charge on each capacitor
(
4𝑞 𝑞 = 𝐶𝑉 = × 10 = 12µC
1
= in CGS units ∴ Potential difference across 2µF capacitor
𝑑
𝑞 12
4 (b) 𝑉% = = = 6 volt
𝐶% 2
𝜆 8 (c)
𝐸=
2πε! 𝑟 % +;
For a ring 𝐸 = #9: . (; " 7." ) and 𝐸 is maximum
𝜆 = 2πε! 𝑟 𝐸 !

1 when
= × 2 × 10$" × 9 × 0# 𝑅
2 × 9 × 100 𝑥=
= 10$& Cm$% √2
5 (a) 1 2𝑞
⇒ 𝐸>?@ = .
Work done in delivering q coulomb of charge 4πε! 3√3. 𝑅"
from clouds to ground. 9 (a)
The 10µF and 6µF capacitors are connected in
𝑊 = 𝑉𝑞 parallel, hence resultant capacitance is
𝐶 A = 10 µF + 6 µF = 16 µF
= 4 × 10( × 4 = 16 × 10( J
This is connected in series with 4 µF capacitor,
The power of lightning strike is hence effective capacitance is
1 1 1 20
𝑊 = + =
𝑃= 𝐶′′ 16 4 16 × 4
𝑡 64
⇒ 𝐶 AA = = 3.20µF
20
16 × 10( 10 (a)
= = 160 × 10( 𝑊
0.1 ∵ 𝑉 = 4𝑥 "
= 160 𝑀𝑊 Hence, E œ⃗ = − 4B = −8𝑥ı̇k
43
Hence, value of œE⃗ at (1m, 0, 2m) will be
Page|9
 œE⃗ = −8 × 1ı̇k = −8ı̇k Vm$% Potential gradient relates with electric field
4B
11 (a) according to the relation,𝐸 = −
43
The situation is summarised in figure. 10
=− = 50 Vm$%
20 × 10$"
𝐵𝐶 = 𝐴𝐷 = 3cm, 𝐴𝐵 = 𝐷𝐶 = 4cm,
16 (d)
So, 𝐴𝐶 = 5cm. Positive plate of all the three condensers is
connected to one point (A) and negative plate
of all the three condensers is connected to
point (𝐵) 𝑖𝑒, they are joined in parallel.
𝐶J = 3 + 3 + 3 = 9µ F
17 (c)
The situation is shown in the figure. Plate 1 has
surface charge density 𝜎 and plate 2 has
Now, potential at 𝐴 surface charge density– 𝜎. The electric fields
1
1 𝑞D 1 𝑞E 1 𝑞F
𝑉C = + . + . +++++++++++++
4𝜋𝜀! 𝐴𝐵 4𝜋𝜀! 𝐴𝐶 4𝜋𝜀! 𝐴𝐷
E
P
1 10 × 10$%" 20 × 10$%" -- - --- - -- - - - - --
= • − 2
4𝜋𝜀! 4 × 10$" 5 × 10$"
-
10 × 10$%"
+ •
3 × 10$" at point 𝑃 due to two charged plates add up,
giving
10 20 10 𝜎 𝜎 𝜎
= 9 × 100 × 10$%! R − + U 𝐸= + =
4 5 3 2𝜀! 2𝜀! 𝜀!
Given , 𝜎 = 26.4 × 10$%" Cm$"
9 × 10$% × 11
= 𝜀! = 8.85 × 10$%" C" N$% m$"
6 "(.#×%!$#"
Hence , 𝐸 = /./1×%!$#"
≈ 3NC$%
= 16.5 × 10$% = 1.65V
Note the direction of electric field is from the
12 (c) positive to the negative plate.
6 µF and 3 µF capacitors are in series 18 (c)
1 1 1 On sharing of charges loss in electrical energy,
= + 6 6
𝐶% 6 3 Δ𝑈 = "(6#76
"
(𝑉 − 𝑉" ). In present case 𝐶% =
) %
# "
𝐶% = 2 𝐶" = 𝐶
𝐶% is parallel to 2 µF capacitor 𝐶" 1
∴ 𝐶GH = 2 + 2 = 4µF ∴ Δ𝑈 = (𝑉% − 𝑉" )" = 𝐶(𝑉% − 𝑉" )"
2(2𝐶 ) 4
%
Total energy, 𝑈 = " 𝐶𝑉 " 19 (a)
1 The potential
= × 4 × (2)" = 8µJ
2
13 (c) 1 1
𝑉= (𝑞 + 𝑞" + 𝑞, + 𝑞# )
I 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 %
Capacitance 𝐶 = B
For a dielectric media 𝐶 =
*C 1
4 𝑉 = (9 × 100 ) ¢ £ {(3 − 3 − 4 + 7) × 10$( C}
1m
∴ Capacitance 𝐶 of a capacitor is independent
of the geometrical configuration of the N−m
= 2.7 × 10#
capacitor. C
14 (a)
= 2.7 × 10# JC$%

P a g e | 10
 = 2.7 × 10# V 𝑉 = 10 volt
Then the total charge on the capacitor
20 (d) 𝑞 = 𝐶𝑉
(𝑛-1) capacitors are made by 𝑛 plates and all = 500 × 10$( × 10
are connected in parallel because plates are = 5 × 10$, C
connected alternately. NON?P QR?STG
Hence, time = QR?STG S?NG
∴ Total capacitance = (𝑛 − 1)𝑥
21 (a) 5 × 10$, C
𝐸 = s
Required work done, 100 × 10$( C
= 50s
𝑊 = 𝑄𝑉 26 (a)
When metal sphere is placed inside a charged
= (2𝑒) × 25
parallel plate capacitor, the electric lines of
= 50𝑒 = 50 × 1.6 × 10$%0 force will not enter the metallic conductor as
𝐸 = 0inside a charged conductor. Moreover,
= 8 × 10$%/ J the surface of a charged conductor is an
equipotential surface and hence, electric lines
22 (c)
of force are always perpendicular to
As battery is disconnected, total charge 𝑄 is
equipotential surface.
shared equally by two capacitors. energy of
27 (b)
each capacitor
Electric field inside a spherical charge is
(𝑄/2)" 1 𝑄" 1
= = = 𝑈 everywhere zero, hence, inside a spherical
2𝐶 4 2𝐶 4 charge the potential at all points is the same
23 (b)
and its value is equal
Initially, the capacitance of capacitor
to that on the surface.

∴ Potential at surface=10V.

𝜀! 𝐴
𝐶=
𝑑
*! C
∴ 4
= 1µF
…(i)
When it is filled with dielectric of dielectric 28 (d)
constant 𝐾% and 𝐾" as shown, then there are 0×%!& U"×%!$' V
"
+ +
# "
two capacitors connected is parallel. So, PE = #9: 3
= %
= 0.036 J
!
% %
5# *! L M 5" *! L M 29 (c)
𝐶 AA = "
+ "
4 4 Electric flux may be due to the charges present
(as area inside the Gaussian surface, but for the
becomes half) purpose of calculation of electric field 𝐸 at any
4𝜀! 𝐴 6𝜀! 𝐴 2𝜀! 𝐴 3𝜀! 𝐴
𝐶′′ = + = + point we shall have to consider contribution of
2𝑑 2𝑑 𝑑 𝑑
all the charges.
Using Eq. (i), we obtain
30 (c)
𝐶 AA = 2 × 1 + 3 × 1 = 5 µF W
25 (d) In equilibrium, 𝐹 = 𝑞𝐸 = (𝑛𝑒) 4 = 𝑚𝑔
Given that, 𝑚g𝑑 1.96 × 10$%1 × 9.8 × 0.02
𝑛= = =3
𝐶 = 500µF 𝑒𝑉 1.6 × 10$%0 × 800
𝑑𝑞 Therefore, 𝑞 = 3 𝑒
= 100 µCs$% 31 (b)
𝑑𝑡
P a g e | 11
 Charge on each plate of each capacitor 1 10$0 51
= × ¢33 − + 47£
𝑄 = ±𝐶𝑉 = ±25 × 10$( × 200 4𝜋𝜀! 93 × 10$, √2
= ±5 × 10$, C
32 (d) ≈ 4 × 1000 V = 4 kV
On introduction and removal and again on
36 (d)
introduction, the capacity and potential
Electric potential of charged spherical shell
remain same. So, net work done by the system
in this process 𝑞
𝑉= (0 ≤ 𝑟 ≤ 𝑅)
𝑊 = 𝑈X − 𝑈Y 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑅
1 1
= 𝐶𝑉 " − 𝐶𝑉 " = 0 ∴ Electric potential at centre=Electric
2 2
33 (c) potential on the surface.
If 𝐶 is capacity of each condenser, then charge 37 (a)
on each capacitor = 10 C I($+) I($+)
Here, 𝑈% = #9: 3 ; 𝑈" = #9:
(∵ 𝑉 = 10𝑉) ! ! (3/")

When connected in series, potential difference 𝑄(−𝑞) 1 2

𝑈% − 𝑈" = R − U
NON?P QR?STG
between free plates = NON?P Q?Z?Q[N\ 4πε! 𝑟 𝑟
I+
= #)* =9 …(i)
10 𝐶 !
= = 60 V When negative charge travels first half of
𝐶/6
34 (d) distance, 𝑖𝑒, 𝑟/4, potential energy of the system
For charge 𝑄% , electronic field is 𝑄(−𝑞) 𝑄𝑟 4
𝑈, = =− ×
𝑄% (
4πε! 3𝑟⁄4 ) 4πε! 𝑟 3
𝐸% = ∴ work done = 𝑈% − 𝑈,
2𝜀! 𝐴
where 𝐴 is area. 𝑄(−𝑞) 𝑄𝑟 4
= + ×
For charge 𝑄" electronic field is 4πε! 𝑟 4πε! 𝑟 3
𝑄" 𝑄𝑞 1 9
𝐸" = = × = = 3J
2𝜀! 𝐴 4πε! 𝑟 3 3
Resultant electronic field 38 (a)
(𝑄% − 𝑄" ) Potential energy of electric dipole, 𝑈 = −p œ⃗
𝐸 = 𝐸% − 𝐸" =
2𝜀! 𝐴 . œE⃗ = −𝑝𝐸 cos θ.
Potential difference between plates when they In Fig. (a), θ = π rad hence 𝑈 = −𝑝𝐸 cos π =
are brought close together to form a parallel +𝑝𝐸 = maximum.
plate capacitor is 39 (d)
(𝑄% − 𝑄" ) 1
Minimum capacity, 𝐶^ = %! = 0.5 µF
𝑉 = 𝐸𝑑 = 𝑑
2𝜀! 𝐴
*! C Maximum capacity, 𝐶J = 10 × 5 = 50 µF
Since, 𝐶 = 4
for parallel plate capacitor. 𝐶J 50
(𝑄% − 𝑄" ) = = 100
∴ 𝑉= 𝐶^ 0.5
2𝐶 40 (a)
35 (b) In series combination, charge is constant.
1 𝒬% 𝒬" 𝒬, 1
𝑉= ¢ + + £ ∴ 𝑉∝
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟% 𝑟" 𝑟, 𝐶
B" 56 5
1 33 × 10$0 51 × 10$0 Now, B
= 6 =%
#
= « −
4𝜋𝜀! 93 × 10$, √2 × 93 × 10$, But 𝑉% + 𝑉" = 𝑉
B" 5
47 × 10$0 or + 𝑉" = 𝑉 or 𝑉" = 57% 𝑉
+ ¬ 5
93 × 10$, 41 (c)

P a g e | 12
 After combining, the volume remains same Common potential
𝑖. 𝑒., 𝑞% + 𝑞"
𝑉=
𝐶% + 𝐶"
Volume of bigger drop= 𝑁 × volume of %×,!7!
= %7"
= 10 volt
smaller drop
1
𝐸" = (𝐶% + 𝐶" )𝑉 "
Or 2
1
= (1 + 2) × 10$( × (10)"
4 , 4 2
𝜋𝑅 = 𝑁 × 𝜋𝑟 ,
3 3 = 1.5 × 100 × 10$( = 150 × 10$( J
Loss of energy =𝐸" − 𝐸% = 300µJ
Or
43 (a)
𝑅 , The figure is a balanced Wheatstone bridge, so
𝑁 = ¢ £ … … … … … (i) diagonal capacitor will be ineffective.
𝑟
So, the equivalent circuit will be as shown in
As charge is conserved, hence the figure.

𝒬 = 𝑁𝑞 … … … … … … . (ii)

Capacity of bigger drop =4𝜋𝜀! 𝑅

Capacity of smaller drop=4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟

From Eq. (ii), we have

Equivalent capacitance of upper arms in series
(4𝜋𝜀! 𝑅)𝑉_Y` = 𝑁(4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟)𝑉^a2bb "×"
𝐶% = "7" = 1µF
or (4𝜋𝜀! 𝑅) × 40 = 𝑁(4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟) × 10 Similarly, for lower arm
𝐶" = 1µF
or 4𝑅 = 𝑁𝑟
∴ 𝐶CD = 𝐶% + 𝐶"
𝑅 𝑁 = 1 + 1 = 2µF
or = … … … … . (iii)
𝑟 4 44 (b)
Potential on bubble,
From Eqs. (i) and (iii), we have
1 𝑞
𝑁 , 𝑉=
𝑁=¢ £ 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟
4
𝑉% 𝑟"
or ∴ =
𝑉" 𝑟%
𝑁, 16 2
𝑁= ⟹ = ⟹ 𝑉" = 8 𝑉
64 𝑉" 1
or 45 (b)
𝐴𝑠 𝑟 ≫ 𝑎, so 𝑟 > 2𝑎
𝑁 " = 64
So, potential at point p
OR N=8

42 (a)
%
Energy 𝐸% = " 𝐶% 𝑉%"
1
= × 1 × 10$( × (30)"
2
= 450 × 10$( J

P a g e | 13
 + +
1 𝑞 Work done is zero because all the points on
𝑉= ¸ " − + " ¹ the circular path are at same potential.
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 + 𝑎 𝑟 𝑟 − 𝑎
48 (d)
1 𝑞 1 2 1 % 6 6
= R − + U Loss of energy = " (6 #76" ) (𝑉% − 𝑉" )"
4𝜋𝜀! 2 𝑟 + 𝑎 𝑟 𝑟 − 𝑎 # "

𝑞 𝑟(𝑟 − 𝑎) − 2(𝑟 " − 𝑎" ) + 𝑟(𝑟 + 𝑎) 1 5 × 10$( × 5 × 10$( (2000 − 1000)"

= • • =
8𝜋𝜀! 𝑟(𝑟 " − 𝑎" ) 2 (5 + 5) × 10$(
5×5
𝑞 2𝑎" = = 1.25J
= . 2 × 10
8𝜋𝜀! 𝑟(𝑟 " − 𝑎" ) 49 (d)
1 1 1 1
𝑞𝑎" = + + =3
= (as 𝑟 ≫ 𝑎) 𝐶^ 1 1 1
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 ,
1
𝐶^ =
46 (a) 3
The given circuit is equivalent to a parallel Capacitance between A and B
1
combination of two identical capacitors. 𝐶J = + 1
3
4
µF = 1.33µF
3
50 (a)
Here , 𝑡 = 2 mm, 𝑥 = 1.6 mm, 𝐾 =?
As potential difference remains the same,
Hence, equivalent capacitance between points capacity must remain the same
𝐴 and 𝐵 is 1
𝜀! 𝐴 𝜀! 𝐴 2𝜀! 𝐴 ∴ 𝑥 = 𝑡 ¢1 − £
𝐶= + = 𝐾
𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 %
1.6 = 2 ‰1 − 5Š, which gives 𝐾 = 5
47 (c)

P a g e | 14
p

Current Electricity
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. There are three resistance coils of equal resistance. The maximum number of resistances you can obtain
by connecting them in any manner you choose, being free to use any number of the coils in any way is
a) 3 b) 4
c) 6 d) 5
2. A wire when connected to 220𝑉 mains supply has power dissipation 𝑃! . Now the wire is cut into two equal
pieces which are connected in parallel to the same supply. Power dissipation in this case is 𝑃" . Then 𝑃" ∶ 𝑃!
is
a) 1 b) 4
c) 2 d) 3
3. In the circuit shown below, the power developed in the 6Ω resistor is 6 watt. The power in watts
developed in the 4Ω resistor is

a) 16 b) 9
c) 6 d) 4
4. A 5℃ rise in temperature is observed in a conductor by passing a current. When the current is doubled the
rise in temperature will be approximately
a) 16℃ b) 10℃
c) 20℃ d) 12℃
5. In 𝐶𝑢 − 𝐹𝑒 couple, the flow of current at the temperature of inversion is
a) From 𝐹𝑒 to 𝐶𝑢 through the hot junction b) From 𝐶𝑢 to 𝐹𝑒 through the hot junction
c) Maximum d) None of the above
6. The resistance of an ideal voltmeter is
a) Zero b) Very low
c) Very large d) Infinite
7. An electric wire of length ′𝐿′ and area of cross-section 𝑎 has resistance 𝑅 𝑜ℎ𝑚. Another wire of the same
material having same length and area of cross-section 4𝑎 has a resistance of
a) 4𝑅 b) 𝑅/4
c) 𝑅/16 d) 16𝑅
8. The potential difference in open circuit for a cell is 2.2 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡. When a 4 𝑜ℎ𝑚 resistor is connected between
its two electrodes the potential difference becomes 2 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡. The internal resistance of the cell will be
a) 1 𝑜ℎ𝑚 b) 0.2 𝑜ℎ𝑚
 c) 2.5 𝑜ℎ𝑚 d) 0.4 𝑜ℎ𝑚
9. The mass of a substance liberated when a charge ′𝑞′ flows through an electrolyte is proportional to
a) 𝑞 b) 1/𝑞
"
c) 𝑞 d) 1/𝑞"
10. Two resistance of 10 Ω and 20 Ω and an inductor of inductance 5 𝐻 are connected to a battery of 2 𝑉
through a key 𝑘 as shown in the figure. At time 𝑡 = 0, when the key 𝑘 is closed the initial current through
the battery is

2
a) 0.2 𝐴 b) 𝐴
15
1 d) 0
c) 𝐴
15
11. What is the equivalent resistance across the points 𝐴 and 𝐵 in the circuit given below?
9Ω16 Ω
1ΩA

1ΩC
1ΩE

1Ω10 Ω 3Ω12 Ω

7Ω2.5 Ω

1Ω10 Ω 3Ω10 Ω
1ΩB

a) 8 Ω b) 12 Ω
c) 16 Ω d) 32 Ω
12. A hot electric iron has a resistance of 80 Ω and is used on a 200 𝑉 source. The electrical energy spent, if it is
used for two hours, will be
a) 8000 𝑊ℎ b) 2000 𝑊ℎ
c) 1000 𝑊ℎ d) 800 𝑊ℎ
13. In the process of electrolysis, the current is carried out inside the electrolyte by
a) Electrons b) Atoms
c) Positive and negative ions d) All the above
14. For a given temperature difference which of the following pairs will generate maximum thermo-emf?
a) Lead-nickel b) Copper-iron
c) Gold-silver d) Antimony-bismuth
15. Two resistors of resistances 200 𝑘Ω and 1𝑀Ω respectively form a potential divider with outer junctions
maintained at potentials of +3𝑉 and −15𝑉. Then, the potential at the junction between the resistors is
a) +1 𝑉 b) −0.6 𝑉
c) 0 𝑉 d) −12 𝑉
16. A resistance of 2Ω is to be made from a copper wire (specific resistance=1.7 × 10#$ Ω m) using a wire of
length 50cm. The radius of the wire is
a) 0.0116 mm b) 0.367 mm
c) 0.116 mm d) 0.267 mm
17. Five conductors are meeting at a point x as shown in the figure. What is the value of current in fifth
conductor?

Page|2
 a) 3 A away from x b) 1 A away from x
c) 4 A away from x d) 1 A towards x
18. In a closed circuit, the current 𝐼(in ampere) at an instant of time 𝑡(in second) is given by 𝐼 = 4 − 0.08𝑡.
The number of electrons flowing in 50s through the cross-section of the conductor is
a) 1.25 × 10!) b) 6.25 × 10"*
c) 5.25 × 10!) d) 2.55 × 10"*
19. If voltage across a bulb rated 220 Volt-100 Watt drops by 2.5% of its rated value, the percentage of the
rated value by which the power would decrease is
a) 20% b) 2.5%
c) 5% d) 10%
20. In the following circuit a 10 𝑚 long potentiometer wire with resistance 1.2 𝑜ℎ𝑚/𝑚, a resistance 𝑅! and an
accumulator of emf 2 𝑉 are connected in series. When the emf of thermocouple is 2.4 𝑚𝑉 then the
deflection in galvanometer is zero. The current supplied by the accumulator will be

a) 4 × 10#+ 𝐴 b) 8 × 10#+ 𝐴
c) 4 × 10#, 𝐴 d) 8 × 10#, 𝐴
21. In a Wheatstone’s network 𝑃 = 2Ω, 𝒬 = 2Ω, R = 2Ω and S = 3Ω. The resistance with which S is to be
shunted in order that the bridge may be balanced is
a) 1 Ω b) 2 Ω
c) 4 Ω d) 6 Ω
22. An electron (charge = 1.6 × 10 𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏) is moving in a circle of radius 5.1 × 10#!! 𝑚 at a frequency of
#!)

6.8 × 10!- 𝑟𝑒𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠/𝑠𝑒𝑐. The equivalent current is approximately

a) 5.1 × 10#, 𝑎𝑚𝑝 b) 6.8 × 10#, 𝑎𝑚𝑝
c) 1.1 × 10#, 𝑎𝑚𝑝 d) 2.2 × 10#, 𝑎𝑚𝑝
23. A heater coil is cut into two equal parts and only one part is now used in the heater. The heat generated
will now be
a) Doubled b) Four times
c) One-fourth d) Halved
24. If two wires having resistances 𝑅 and 2𝑅 both are joined in series and in parallel, then ratio of heat
generated in this situation, applying the same voltage is
a) 2 :1 b) 1 :2
c) 2 :9 d) 9 :2
25. A 6V cell with 0.5 Ω internal resistance, a10V cell with 1 Ω internal resistance and a 12 Ω external
resistance are connected in parallel. The current (in ampere) through the 10V cell is
a) 0.60 b) 2.27
c) 2.87 d) 5.14
26. A heater of 220 V heats a volume of water in 5 min. The same heater when connected to 110 V heats the
same volume of water in (minute)

Page|3
 a) 5 b) 20
c) 10 d) 2.5
27. The deflection in a moving coil galvanometer is reduced to half when it is shunted with a 40 Ω coil. The
resistance of the galvanometer is
a) 15 Ω b) 20 Ω
c) 40 Ω d) 80 Ω
28. In a region 10 α −particales and 10 protons move to the left, while 10!) electrons move to the right
!) !)

per second. The current is

a) 3.2 A towards left b) 3.2 A towards right
c) 6.4 A towards left d) 6.4 A towards right
29. The reading of a high resistance voltmeter when a cell is connected across it is 2.2 𝑉. When the terminals
of the cell are also connected to a resistance of 5 Ω the voltmeter reading drops to 1.8 𝑉. Find the internal
resistance of the cell
a) 1.2 Ω b) 1.3 Ω
c) 1.1 Ω d) 1.4 Ω
30. When an electric heater is switched on, the current flowing through it (𝑖) is plotted against time (𝑡).
Taking into account the variation of resistance with temperature, which of the following best represents
the resulting curve
a) I b) I

t t
c) I d) I

t t
31. The current in the given circuit is
10Ω 5V

A B

2V 20 Ω

a) 0.3A b) 0.4A
c) 0.1A d) 0.2A
32. Every atom makes one free electron in copper. If 1.1 A Current is flowing in the wire of copper having 1
mm diameter, then the drift velocity(approx.) will be (density of copper=9 × 10, kg m#, and atomic
weight of copper=63)
a) 0.1 mms#! b) 0.2 mms#!
c) 0.3 mms#! d) 0.2 mms#!
33. A current of 1.5 A flows through a copper voltmeter. The thickness of copper deposited on the electrode
surface of area 50 cm" in 20 min is (density of Cu=9000 kgm#, ; ECE of Cu = 3.3 × 10#/ kgC#! )
a) 1.3 × 10#+ m b) 1.3 × 10#- m
c) 2.6 × 10#+ m d) 2.6 × 10#- m
34. Two cells of equal 𝑒. 𝑚. 𝑓. and of internal resistance 𝑟! and 𝑟" (𝑟! > 𝑟" ) are connected in series. On
connecting this combination to an external resistance 𝑅, it is observed that the potential difference across
the first cell becomes zero. The value of 𝑅 will be
a) 𝑟! + 𝑟" b) 𝑟! − 𝑟"

Page|4
 𝑟! + 𝑟" 𝑟! − 𝑟"
c) d)
2 2
35. Four resistances 40Ω, 60Ω, 90Ω and 110Ω make the arms of a quadrilateral 𝐴𝐵𝐶𝐷. Across 𝐴𝐶 is the battery
circuit, the emf of the battery being 4V and internal resistance negligible. The potential difference across
𝐵𝐷 is
B
40 Ω 60 Ω
A C

90 Ω 110 Ω
D

4V

a) 1V b) −1V
c) −0.2V d) 0.2V
SECTION - B
36. Two identical electric lamps marked 500 𝑊, 220 𝑉 are connected in series and then joined to a 110 𝑉 line.
The power consumed by each lamp is
125 25
a) 𝑊 b) 𝑊
4 4
225
c) 𝑊 d) 125 𝑊
4
37. Two resistances when connected in parallel across a cell of negligible internal resistance consume 4 times
the power they would consume when connected in series. If one resistance is 5 Ω , the other is
a) 1 Ω b) 2.5 Ω
c) 5 Ω d) 10 Ω
38. If 96500 𝑐𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏𝑠 of electricity liberates one gram equivalent of any substance, the time taken for a
current of 0.15 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑠 to deposit 20𝑚𝑔 of copper from a solution of copper sulphate is (Chemical
equivalent of copper = 32)
a) 5 𝑚𝑖𝑛 20 𝑠𝑒𝑐 b) 6 𝑚𝑖𝑛 42 𝑠𝑒𝑐
c) 4 𝑚𝑖𝑛 40 𝑠𝑒𝑐 d) 5 𝑚𝑖𝑛 50 𝑠𝑒𝑐
39. A metal wire is subjected to a constant potential difference. When the temperature of the metal wire
increases, the drift velocity of the electron in it
a) increases, thermal velocity of the electron b) Decreases, thermal velocity of the electron decreases
decreases
c) increases, thermal velocity of the electron d) Decreases, thermal velocity of the electron increases
increases
40. Two bulbs when connected in parallel to a source take 60 W each. The total power consumed when they
are connected in series with the same source is
a) 15 W b) 30 W
c) 60 W d) 120 W
41. In the adjoining circuit, the e.m.f. of the cell is 2 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 and the internal resistance is negligible. The
resistance of the voltmeter is 80 𝑜ℎ𝑚. The reading of the voltmeter will be
2V
+ –

80 W
V

20 W 80 W

a) 0.80 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 b) 1.60 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡

c) 1.33 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 d) 2.00 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
Page|5
42. An immersion heater with electrical resistance 7 Ω is immersed in 0.1 kg of water at 20℃ for 3 min. If the
flow of current is 4 A, what is the final temperature of the water in ideal conditions?
(Specific heat capacity of water = 4.2 × 10, Jkg)#! K #!
a) 28℃ b) 48℃
c) 52℃ d) 68℃
43. The accurate measurement of emf can be obtained using
a) Multimeter b) Voltmeter
c) Voltameter d) Potentiometer
44. A current of 1 𝑚𝐴 is flowing through a copper wire. How many electrons will pass a given point in one
𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑
[𝑒 = 1.6 × 10#!) 𝐶𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏]
a) 6.25 × 10!) b) 6.25 × 10!-
,!
c) 6.25 × 10 d) 6.25 × 10$
45. The current inside a copper voltameter
a) Is half the outside value b) Is the same as the outside value
c) Is twice the outside value d) Depends on the concentration of 𝐶𝑢𝑆𝑂+
46. When a current passes through the junction of two different metals, evolution or absorption of heat at the
junction is known as
a) Joule effect b) Seebeck effect
c) Peltier effect d) Thomson effect
47. It is possible that any some constant value of emf, but the potential difference between the plates is zero?
a) Not, possible b) Yes, if another identical battery is joined in series
c) Yes, if another identical battery is joined in d) Yes, possible, if another similar battery is joined in
opposition parallel
48. An electric heater of resistances 6 Ω is run for 10 min on 120 V line. The energy librated in this period of
time is?
a) 7.2 × 10- J b) 14.4 × 10- J
c) 43.2 × 10- J d) 28.8 × 10- J
49. 𝐵! , 𝐵" and 𝐵, are the three identical bulbs connected to a battery of steady emf with key 𝐾 closed. What
happens to the brightness of the bulbs, 𝐵! and 𝐵" when the key is opened?
B1

K B2

B3

Brightness of the bulb 𝐵! increases and that of

a) b) Brightness of the bulbs 𝐵! and 𝐵" increases
𝐵" decreases
Brightness of the bulb 𝐵! decreases and 𝐵"
c) d) Brightness of the bulbs 𝐵! and 𝐵" decreases
increases
50. Two uniform wires 𝐴 and 𝐵 are of the same metal and have equal masses. The radius of wire 𝐴 is twice
that of wire 𝐵. The total resistance of 𝐴 and 𝐵 when connected in parallel is
a) 4 Ω when the resistance of wire 𝐴 is 4.25 Ω b) 5 Ω when the resistance of wire 𝐴 is 4.25 Ω
c) 4 Ω when the resistance of wire 𝐵 is 4.25 Ω d) 5 Ω when the resistance of wire 𝐵 is 4.25 Ω

Page|6
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) b 2) b 3) b 4) c 29) c 30) b 31) c 32) a
5) a 6) d 7) b 8) d 33) b 34) b 35) d 36) a
9) a 10) c 11) a 12) c 37) c 38) b 39) a 40) b
13) c 14) d 15) c 16) b 41) c 42) d 43) d 44) b
17) b 18) b 19) c 20) a 45) b 46) c 47) c 48) b
21) d 22) c 23) a 24) c 49) c 50) a
25) c 26) b 27) c 28) c

Page|7
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (b) 1 1 1
= + ⇒ 𝑅, = 6Ω
Maximum number of resistances = 21#! = 𝑅, 12 12
2,#! = 4
Now 𝑅, and 6Ω are in series
2 (b)
When wire is cut into two equal parts then 𝑅+ = 10 + 6 = 16Ω
power dissipated by each part is 2𝑃!
So their parallel combination will dissipate Now, 𝑅+ and 16 Ω are in parallel
power
1 1 1
𝑃" = 2𝑃! + 2𝑃! = 4𝑃! ∴ = +
2 𝑅 16 16
Which gives 2! = 4
"
⇒ 𝑅 = 3Ω
3 (b)
𝑉 " 𝑃! 𝑅" 6 4 2 12 (c)
𝑃= ⇒ = ⇒ = = ⇒ 𝑃" = 9 𝑊
𝑅 𝑃" 𝑅! 𝑃" 6 3 𝑉" 200 × 200 × 2
4 (c) Energy = 𝑡= = 1000 𝑊ℎ
𝑅 80
Since 𝐻 ∝ 𝑖 " , so on doubling the current, the 14 (d)
heat produced and hence the rise in Thermocouples are widely used type of
temperature becomes four times temperature sensor and are used as means to
5 (a) convert thermal potential difference into
According to Seebeck effect electric potential difference, using different
6 (d) combinations of metals. If metals were
The resistance of an ideal voltmeter is arranged according to their heating contrasts a
considered as infinite series were formed antimony, iron, zinc, silver,
7 (b) gold, lead, mercury, copper, platinum and
34 34 7
𝑅= for first wire and 𝑅6 = = for bismuth. The greater the heating contrasts
5 +5 +
second wire between metals, the greater the electromotive
8 (d) force (EMF). Antimony and bismuth formed
𝐸 = 2.2 𝑉, 𝑅 = 4 Ω, 𝑉 = 2𝑉 the best junction for emf.
𝐸 2.2 15 (c)
𝑟 = • − 1ž 𝑅 = • − 1ž × 4 = 0.1 × 4 Potential difference across 1 𝑀Ω resistor is
𝑉 2
= 0.4Ω 18𝑉 × 1 × 109 Ω
𝑉2 − 𝑉8 =
10 (c) (0.2 + 1) × 109 Ω
Initially the inductance will oppose the current 18𝑉 × 1 × 109 Ω
= = 15𝑉
which tries to flow through the inductance. 1.2 × 109 Ω
But 10Ω and 20Ω can conduct. The current will 𝑉8 = −15𝑉 [Given]
be ∴ 𝑉2 − 𝑉8 = 15𝑉 or 𝑉2 = 15𝑉 + 𝑉8
2𝑉 1 = 15𝑉 − 15𝑉 = 0𝑉
= 𝐴
30Ω 15
11 (a)
1 1 1 5 1
= + = = ⇒ 𝑅! = 2Ω
𝑅! 10 2.5 10 2

Now 2Ω and 10 Ω are in series

𝑅" = 10 + 2 = 12Ω Potential difference across 200 𝑘Ω resistor is

18𝑉 × 0.2 × 109 Ω
𝑅" and 12Ω are in parallel 𝑉: − 𝑉2 =
(0.2 + 1) × 109 Ω

Page|8
 18𝑉 × 0.2 × 109 Ω
= = 3𝑉
1.2 × 109 Ω P
Q
𝑉: = +3𝑉 [Given]
∴ 𝑉: − 𝑉2 = 3𝑉 or 𝑉2 = 𝑉: − 3𝑉
= + 3𝑉 − 3 𝑉 = 0 𝑉
S
16 (b)
R
𝐴 = π𝑟 " = ρ𝑙⁄𝑅 or 𝑟 = (ρ𝑙 ⁄π𝑅)!/"
r
!/"
1.7 × 10#$
× 0.5
𝑟=£ ¤ = 0.367 mm
3.14 × 2
𝑃 𝑅
=
17 (b) 𝑄 𝑆6
2 2
According to Kirchhoff’s first law =
2 𝑆6
(5A)+(4A)+(-3A)+(-5A)+I=0
∴ 𝑆 6 = 2Ω
Or I=-1A
Now,
1 1 1
4A
= +
𝑆6 𝑆 𝑟
3A 1 1 1 1 1 3−2
X
or = 6 − = − =
5A 𝑟 𝑆 𝑆 2 3 6
l 1 1
5A =
𝑟 6
𝑟 = 6Ω
18 (b)
22 (c)
𝐼 = 4 − 0.08𝑡 A
<= 𝑖 = 𝑒𝑣 = 1.6 × 10#!) × 6.8 × 10!-
Or <>
= 4 − 0.08𝑡 A = 1.1 × 10#, 𝑎𝑚𝑝
-*
23 (a)
or 𝑞 = ¥ (4 − 0.08𝑡)𝑑𝑡 𝐶
* 𝑉"
-* 𝐻! = 𝑡
0.08𝑡 " 𝑅
or 𝑁𝑒 = §4𝑡 − ¨ = 100 𝐶
2 * 𝑉"
Where N is number of electrons. 𝐻" = 𝑡
𝑅/2
!** !**
or 𝑁 = = !.9×!*#"$
? 𝐻"
= 6.25 × 10"* ∴ =2
𝐻!
19 (c)
Resistance of bulb is constant ⇒ 𝐻" = 2𝐻!
𝑣 " ∆𝑃 2∆𝑉 ∆𝑅
𝑃= ⇒ = + 24 (c)
𝑅 𝑃 𝑉 𝑅
∆𝑃 B !> !
= 2 × 2.5 + 0 = 5% Heat 𝐻 = 7
⇒𝐻∝7 [If 𝑉, 𝑡 constant]
𝑃 7×"7
20 (a) 𝐻C 𝑅2 - ,7 ® 2
⇒ = = =
𝐸 2.4 × 10#, 𝐻2 𝑅C (𝑅 + 2𝑅) 9
𝐸 = 𝑥𝑙 = 𝑖𝜌𝑙 ⇒ 𝑖 = = 25 (c)
𝜌𝑙 1.2 × 5
= 4 × 10 𝐴#+ In closed loop ABGFEHA
21 (d) 10 − 𝑖" × 1 + 𝑖! × 0.5 − 6 = 0
Let a resistance r ohm be shunted with 0.5𝑖! − 𝑖" = −4
resistance S, so that the bridge is balanced. In closed loop BCDEB
If S’ is the resultant resistance of S and r, then (𝑖! + 𝑖" ) × 12 + 𝑖" × 1 − 10 = 0
In balanced position 12𝑖D + 13𝑖" = 10
From Eqs. (i) and (ii)

Page|9
 𝑖" = 2.87𝐴 We know that when current flow is same then
26 (b) resistors are connected in series, hence
B! resultant resistance is
Heat produced by the heater 𝐻 = ×𝑡
7
𝑅6 = 𝑅! + 𝑅" = 10Ω + 20Ω = 30Ω
For 220V heater heat produced
Also since, cell are connected in opposite
(220)"
𝐻! = ×5 directions, the resultant emf is
𝑅
𝐸 = 𝐸! − 𝐸" = 5𝑉 − 2𝑉 = 3𝑉
For 110V heater heat produced
From Ohm’s law 𝐸 = 𝑖𝑅
(110)"
𝐻" = ×𝐿 𝐸 3
𝑅 ∴ 𝑖= = = 0.1𝐴
𝑅 30
Now, 𝐻! = 𝐻"
32 (a)
110 × 110 220 × 220 × 5
𝑡= 𝑣< = 𝑖⁄𝑛 𝐴𝑒 ; where 𝑛 = 𝑁F /𝑀
𝑅 𝑅
𝑡 = 20 min
= 6.023 × 10"9 × 9 × 10, /63 = 0.860 × 10")
27 (c)
𝐼∝𝑄 = 8.6 × 10"$
𝐼E 1
= ""
𝐼 2 and 𝐴 = 𝜋𝐷" ⁄4 = × (10#, )" ⁄4m" ;
/
𝑆 1
=
𝐺+𝑆 2 11
40 1 = × 10#9 m"
= ⟹ G = 40Ω 14
𝐺 + 40 2
28 (c) 1.1
𝑣< = !!
An 𝛼 −particle has a charge equal to 2 protons. 8.6 × 10"$ × × 10#9 × 1.6 × 10#!)
!+
Motion of α particle to the left, motion of
proton towards left and motion of electrons 1 100 × 10#+
= = = 1.0 × 10#+ m/s
towards right, all will produce conventional 9.6 × 10G, 96
current towards left. The total current will be
= 0.1 mms#!
𝑖 = 10!) × (2 × 1.6 × 10#!) )
33 (b)
+10 !) #!) )
× (1.6 × 10 !)
+ 10 × (1.6 × 10 #!)
) 𝑚 = 𝑧𝑖𝑡
H ID>
If V is the volume, then V= =
3 3
= 6.4 A
ID> ,.,×!*#% ×!.-×"*×9*
Thickness = :3 = -*×!*#& ×)***
29 (c)
#-
𝐸 = 2.2𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡, 𝑉 = 1.8 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡, 𝑅 = 5𝑅 Thickness = 1.3 × 10 m
𝐸 2.2 34 (b)
𝑟 = • − 1ž 𝑅 = • − 1ž × 5 = 1.1Ω Let the voltage across any one cell is 𝑉, then
𝑉 1.8
30 (b) V
The filament of the heater reaches its steady r1 r2
resistance when the heater reaches its steady
temperature, which is much higher than the E E

room temperature. The resistance at room

R
temperature is thus much lower than the
resistance at its steady state. When the heater 2𝐸
𝑉 = 𝐸 − 𝑖𝑟 = 𝐸 − 𝑟! • ž
is switched on, it draws a larger current than 𝑟! + 𝑟" + 𝑅
its steady state current. As the filament heats But 𝑉 = 0
up, its resistance increases and current falls to 2𝐸𝑟!
⇒𝐸− =0
steady state value 𝑟! + 𝑟" + 𝑅
31 (c) ⇒ 𝑟! + 𝑟" + 𝑅 = 2𝑟!
⇒ 𝑅 = 𝑟! − 𝑟"
P a g e | 10
35 (d) $*
Total resistance of the circuit = + 20 =
"
Current through arm 𝐴𝐵𝐶,
60 Ω
" !
= 4/(40 + 60) = 0.04 A ⇒ Main current 𝑖 = 9* = ,* 𝐴
Combination of voltmeter and 80Ω resistance
Potential difference across 𝐴 and 𝐵,
is connected in series with 20Ω, so current
𝑉: − 𝑉8 = 0.04 × 40 = 1.6V through 20Ω and this combination will be
!
same = ,* 𝐴
Current through arm 𝐴𝐷𝐶,
Since the resistance of voltmeter is also 80Ω,
= 4/(90 + 110) = 4/200A so this current is equally distributed in 80Ω
!
resistance and voltmeter [𝑖. 𝑒. 9* 𝐴 through
Potential difference between 𝐴 and 𝐷,
each]
!
4 P.D. across 80Ω resistance = 9* × 80 = 1.33𝑉
𝑉: − 𝑉J = × 90 = 1.8V
200 42 (d)
∴ 𝑉8 − 𝑉J = (𝑉: − 𝑉J ) − (𝑉: − 𝑉8 ) 𝑖 " 𝑅𝑡 = 𝑚𝑠 ∆𝑡
⇒ (4)" × 7 × 3 × 60
1.8 − 1.6 = 0.2 V = 0.1 × 4.2 × 10, × [𝑇 − (20 + 273)]
∴ 𝑇 = 341 K = 68℃
36 (a)
!!*
43 (d)
Voltage across each bulb 𝑉 6 = "
= 55𝑊 so, For greater sensitivity of meter bridge the
power consumed by each bulb will be resistance (R) taken in the resistance box
500W 500W
220V
should be such that the null point is nearly in
220V
the middle of the wire. In this position all
55V 55V resistance P, Q, R and S become nearly equal.
The emf of cell depends upon the size and area
110 V of electrodes.
" 44 (b)
55
𝑃6 = • ž × 500 1 × 10#,
220
125 𝑛= = 6.25 × 10!-
1.6 × 10#!)
= 𝑊
4 45 (b)
37 (c) The current through the voltameter is same as
𝑉" 𝑉- 𝑉" 𝑅+5 4 drawn from the battery outside it
+ =4×£ ¤ or =
𝑅 5 𝑅+5 5𝑅 𝑅+5 46 (c)
On solving, we get 𝑅 = 5Ω. Production of heat at junctions due to current
38 (b) is known as Peltier effect
32 47 (c)
𝑚 = 𝑍 𝑖 𝑡 ⇒ 20 × 10#, = • ž × 0.15 × 𝑡
96500 If an identical battery is connected in
= 6.7 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 6 𝑚𝑖𝑛. 42 𝑠𝑒𝑐 opposition, net emf = 𝐸 − 𝐸 = 0 and the
39 (a) current through circuit will be zero, although
With rise in temperature the thermal velocity each one of them has constant emf.
of the electron increases. Relaxation time and 48 (b)
hence drift velocity will decrease. Energy liberated =
B!
𝑡
40 (b) 7
(!"*)!
𝑃! = 𝑃" = 60 W; when bulbs are connected in = 9
× (10 × 60) = 14.4 × 10- J
series then total power 49 (c)
2" 2! 9*×9*
𝑃K = 2 = 9*G9* =30 W When key 𝐾 is opened, bulb 𝐵" will not draw
" G2!
41 (c) any current from the source, so that terminal
voltage of source increases. Hence, power
P a g e | 11
 consumed by bulb increases, so light of the When 𝑅: and 𝑅8 are connected in parallel then
bulb becomes more. The brightness of bulb 𝐵! equivalent resistance
decreases. 𝑅: 𝑅8 16
𝑅?= = = 𝑅
50 (a) (𝑅: + 𝑅8 ) 17 :
𝑅: 𝑟8 + 𝑅: 1 + 1 If 𝑅: = 4.25Ω then 𝑅?= = 4Ω 𝑖. 𝑒. option (a) is
=• ž ⇒ =• ž = ⇒ 𝑅8 = 16𝑅:
𝑅8 𝑟: 𝑅8 2 16 correct

P a g e | 12
 Moving Charges and Magnetism
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. A wire of length 2 m carrying a current of 1 A is bent to form a circle, the magnetic moment of the coil is
1
a) 2π Am! b) Am!
π
2
c) π Am! d) Am!
π
2. A conducting loop carrying a current 𝐼 is placed in a uniform magnetic field pointing into the plane of the
paper as shown. The loop will have a tendency to

a) Contract b) Expand
c) Move towards +ve 𝑥 − axis d) Move towards −ve 𝑥 − axis
3. A coil of 100 turns and area 2 × 10"! 𝑚! , pivoted about a vertical diameter in a uniform magnetic field
carries a current of 5𝐴. When the coil is held with its plane in North-South direction, it experience a torque
of 0.3 𝑁𝑚. When the plane is in East-West direction the torque is 0.4 𝑁𝑚. The value of magnetic induction
is (Neglect earth’s magnetic field)
a) 0.2 𝑇 b) 0.3 𝑇
c) 0.4 𝑇 d) 0.05 𝑇
4. The figure shows certain wire segments joined together to form a coplanar loop. The loop is placed in a
perpendicular magnetic field in the direction going into the plane of the figure. The magnitude of the field
increases with time. 𝐼# and 𝐼! are the currents in segment ab and cd. Then,

a) 𝐼# > 𝐼! b) 𝐼# < 𝐼!
𝐼 is in the direction ba and 𝐼! is in the direction
c) # d) 𝐼# is in the direction ab and 𝐼! is in the direction dc
cd
5. Two circular coils are made of two identical wires of same length. If the number of turns of two coils are 4
and 2, then the ratio of magnetic induction at centres will be zero
a) 4 : 1 b) 2 : 1
c) 1 : 2 d) 1 : 1
6. A triangular loop of side 𝑙 carries a current 𝐼. It is placed in a magnetic field 𝐵 such that the plane of the
loop is in the direction of 𝐵. The torque on the loop is
a) Zero b) 𝐼𝐵𝑙

c) √3 𝐼𝑙 ! 𝐵! d) √3 𝐼𝐵𝑙 !
2 4
7. An electron (𝑒 = 1.6 × 10"#$ C) moves in a circular orbit of radius 1.42 cm with a speed of 10% ms"# in
presence of magnetic field of 4 × 10"! T. If the mass of electron is 9.1 × 10"&# kg the energy gained by the
electron in going one round the circular orbit is
a) zero b) 4.54 × 10"!' J
c) 9.08 × 10"!' J d) 28.55 × 10"!' J
8. An ammeter has resistance 𝑅( and range 𝐼. What resistance should be connected in parallel with it to
increase its range by 𝑛𝐼?
a) 𝑅( /(𝑛 − 1) b) 𝑅( /(𝑛 + 1)
c) 𝑅( /𝑛 d) None of these
9. A vertical wire carrying a current in the upward direction is placed in horizontal magnetic field directed
towards north. The wire will experience a force directed towards
a) North b) South
c) East d) West
10. In a square loop 𝑃𝑄𝑅𝑆 made with a wire of cross-section current 𝑖 enters from point 𝑃 and leaves from
point 𝑆. The magnitude of magnetic field induction at the centre 𝑂 of the square is

)! !√!- µ( 4√2𝑖
a) b)
*+ . 4𝜋 𝑎
µ( 2√2𝑖 d) zero
c)
4 𝑎
11. Two short bar magnets with magnetic moments 400 ab-amp cm! and 800 ab-amp cm! are placed with
their axis in the same straight line with similar poles facing each other and with their centers at 20 cm
from each other. Then the force of repulsion is
a) 12 dyne b) 6 dyne
c) 800 dyne d) 150 dyne
12. A straight wire of length 0.5 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒 and carrying a current of 1.2 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒 is placed in a uniform magnetic
field of induction 2 𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑙𝑎. The magnetic field is perpendicular to the length of the wire. The force on the
wire is
a) 2.4 𝑁 b) 1.2 𝑁
c) 3.0 𝑁 d) 2.0 𝑁
13. The resultant magnetic moment of neon atom will be
a) Infinity b) 𝜇/
c) Zero d) 𝜇/ /2
14. An equilateral triangle of side 𝑙 is formed from a piece of wire of uniform resistance. The current 𝑖 is fed as
shown in the figure. The magnitude of the magnetic field as its centre 𝑂 is

Page|2
 √3µ( 𝑖 3√2µ( 𝑖
a) b)
2𝜋𝑙 2𝜋𝑙
µ( 𝑖 d) zero
c)
2𝜋𝑙
15. Magnetic dipole moment of a rectangular loop is
a) Inversely proportional to current in loop b) Inversely proportional to area of loop
c) Parallel to plane of loop and proportional to d) Perpendicular to plane of loop and proportional to
area of loop area of loop
16. An electron (charge 𝑞 coulomb) enters a magnetic field of 𝐻 𝑤𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟/𝑚! with a velocity of 𝑣𝑚/𝑠 in the
same direction as that of the field. The force on the electron is
𝐻𝑞𝑣 newtons in the direction of the magnetic
a) b) 𝐻𝑞𝑣 dynes in the direction of the magnetic field
field
𝐻𝑞𝑣 newtons at right angles to the direction of d) Zero
c)
the magnetic field
17. Two wires of same length are shaped into a square and a circle. If they carry same current, ratio of the
magnetic moment is
a) 2 ∶ 𝜋 b) 𝜋 ∶ 2
c) 𝜋 ∶ 4 d) 4 ∶ 𝜋
18. A circular coil is in 𝑦-𝑧 plane with centre at origin. The coil is carrying a constant current. Assuming
direction of magnetic field at 𝑥 = −25 𝑐𝑚 to be positive direction of magnetic field, which of the following
graphs shows variation of magnetic field along 𝑥-axis
a) B b) B

x x
O O

c) B d) B

x x
O O

19. A charge particle of mass 𝑚 and charge 𝑞 enters a region of uniform magnetic field B perpendicular of its
velocity v. The particle initially at rest was accelerated by a potential difference 𝑉 (volts) before it entered
the region of magnetic field. What is the diameter of the circular path followed by the charged particle in
the region of magnetic field?
2 𝑚𝑉 2 2𝑚𝑉
a) … b) …
𝐵 𝑞 𝐵 𝑞

2𝑚𝑉 𝐵 2𝑚𝑉
c) 𝐵… d) …
𝑞 𝑞 𝐵
20. Which of the following gives the value of magnetic field according to Biot-Savart’ law
𝑖∆𝑙 sin 𝜃 𝜇( 𝑖∆𝑙 sin 𝜃
a) b)
𝑟! 4𝜋 𝑟
𝜇( 𝑖∆𝑙 sin 𝜃 𝜇(
c) d) 𝑖∆𝑙 sin 𝜃
4𝜋 𝑟! 4𝜋
21. The velocity of two 𝛼-particles 𝐴 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐵 in a uniform magnetic field is in the ratio of 1 : 3. They move in
different circular orbits in the magnetic field. The ratio of radius of curvatures of their paths is
a) 1 : 2 b) 1 : 3
c) 3 : 1 d) 2 : 1
22. Two very long, straight, parallel wires carry steady current 𝑖 𝑎𝑛𝑑 − 𝑖 resepectively. The distance between
the wires is d. At a certain instant of time, a point charge 𝑞 is at a point equidistant from the two wires, in

Page|3
 the plane of the wires. Its instantaneous magnitude of the force due to the magnetic field acting on the charge
at this instant is
µ 𝑖𝑞𝑣 µ 𝑖𝑞𝑣
a) ( b) (
2𝜋𝑑 𝜋𝑑
2µ( 𝑖𝑞𝑣 d) zero
c)
𝜋𝑑
23. A wire along 𝑥-axis carries a current 3.5 A. Find the force in newton on a 1 cm section of the wire exerted
by a magnetic field ‹B⃗ = (0.74 ȷ̂ + 0.36 k•) T.
a) ‘1.26 k• − 2.59 ȷ̂’10"! N b) ‘−1.26 k• + 2.59 ȷ̂’ × 10"! N
c) ‘−2.59 k• + 1.26 ȷ̂’ × 10"! N d) ‘2.59 k• − 1.26 ȷ̂’ × 10"! N
24. Current 𝑖( is passed through a solenoid of length 𝑙 having number of turns 𝑁 when it is connected to a DC
source. A charged particle with charge 𝑞 is projected along the axis of the solenoid with a speed 𝑣( . The
velocity of the particle in the solenoid
a) Increases b) Decreases
c) Remain same d) Becomes zero
25. Energy in a current carrying coil is stored in the form of
a) Electrical energy b) Magnetic field
c) Heat d) None of these
26. Current 𝑖 is carried in a wire of length 𝐿. If the wire is turned into a circular coil, the maximum magnitude
of torque in a given magnetic field 𝐵 will be
𝐿𝑖𝐵! 𝐿𝑖 ! 𝐵
a) b)
2 2
𝐿! 𝑖𝐵 𝐿𝑖 ! 𝐵
c) d)
4𝜋 4𝜋
27. The proton is energy 1 MeV describes a circular path in plane at right angles to a uniform magnetic field of
6.28 × 10"* T. The mass of the proton is 1.7 × 10"!0 kg. The cyclotron frequency of the proton is very
nearly equal to
a) 100 Hz b) 10% Hz
c) 101 Hz d) 10* Hz
28. A particle of mass 𝑚, charge 𝑄 and kinetic energy 𝑇 enters a transverse uniform magnetic field of
induction 𝐵‹⃗ . After 3 seconds the kinetic energy of the particle will be
a) 𝑇 b) 4 𝑇
c) 3 𝑇 d) 2 𝑇
29. The direction of magnetic lines of forces close to a straight conductor carrying current will be
a) Along the length of the conductor b) Radially outward
c) Circular in a plane perpendicular to the d) Helical
conductor
30. The force between two parallel current carrying wires is independent of
a) Their distance of separation b) The length of the wires
c) The magnitude of currents d) The radii of the wires
31. In order to increase the sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer, one should decrease
a) The strength of its magnet b) The torsional constant of its suspension
c) The number of turns in its coil d) The area of its coil
32. Biot-Savart’s law may be represented in vector form as
µ 𝐝𝐥 × 𝐫 µ(
a) 𝐝𝐁 = ( 𝑖 b) 𝐝𝐁 = 𝑖 𝐝𝐥 × 𝐫
4𝜋 𝑟 & 4𝜋
µ 𝐝𝐥 × 𝐫 µ 𝐝𝐥 × 𝐫
c) 𝐝𝐁 = ( 𝑖 !
d) 𝐝𝐁 = ( 𝑖
4𝜋 𝑟 4𝜋 𝑟
33. A deutron of kinetic energy 50 keV is describing a circular orbit of radius 0.5 m in a plane perpendicular to
magnetic field B ‹⃗. The kinetic energy of the proton that describes a circular orbit of radius 0.5 m in the
same plane with the same ‹B⃗ is
Page|4
 a) 200 keV b) 100 keV
c) 50 keV d) 25 keV
34. A closed loop 𝑃𝑄𝑅𝑆 carrying a current is placed in a uniform magnetic field. If the magnetic forces on
segment PS, SR and RQ are 𝐹# , 𝐹! and 𝐹& respectively and are in the plane of the paper and along the
directions shown, the force on the segment QP is

a) ž(𝐹& − 𝐹# )! − 𝐹!! b) 𝐹& + 𝐹# − 𝐹!

c) 𝐹& − 𝐹# + 𝐹! d) ž(𝐹& − 𝐹# )! + 𝐹!!

35. A positively charged particle moving due east enters a region of uniform magnetic field directed vertically
upwards. The particle will
a) Get deflected vertically upwards b) Move in a circular orbit with its speed increased
c) Move in a circular orbit with its speed d) Continue to move due east
unchanged
36. A man carrying suitable instruments for measuring electric and magnetic field passes by a stationary
electron with velocity 𝑉. Then these instruments will note
a) Electric field b) Magnetic field
c) Both 𝑎 and 𝑏 d) None of these
37. A straight wire carrying current 𝑖 is turned into a circular loop. If the magnitude of magnetic moment
associated with it in MKS unit is 𝑀, the length of wire will be
4𝜋 4𝜋𝑀
a) b) …
𝑀 𝑖

𝑟𝜋𝑖 𝑀𝜋
c) … d)
𝑀 4𝑖
38. In a mass spectrometer used to measuring the masses of ions, the ions are initially accelerated by an
electric potential 𝑉 and then made to describe semicircular paths of radius 𝑅 using a magnetic field 𝐵. If 𝑉
234567 9: ;37 <9:
and 𝐵 are kept constant, the ratio ¢ =4>> 9? ;37 <9:
£ will be proportional
a) 1/𝑅 b) 1/𝑅!
c) 𝑅! d) 𝑅
39. Which of the following graphs represent variation of magnetic field 𝐵 with distance 𝑟 for a straight long
wire carrying current?
a) b)

B
B

Distance (r)
Distance (r)

Page|5
 c) d)

B B

Distance (r) Distance (r)

40. An electron (𝑞 = 1.6 × 10"#$ C) is moving at right angle to the uniform magnetic field
3.534×10"% T. The time taken by the electron to complete a circular orbit is
a) 2µs b) 4µs
c) 3µs d) 1µs
41. Proton and α −particle are projected perpendicularly in a magnetic field, if both move in a circular path
with same speed. Then ratio of their radii is
a) 1 : 2 b) 2 : 1
c) 1 : 4 d) 1 : 1
42. A wire 𝑃𝑄𝑅 is bent as shown in figure and is placed in a region of uniform magnetic field 𝐵. The length of
𝑃𝑄 = 𝑄𝑅 = 𝑙. A current 𝐼 ampere flows through the wire as shown. The magnitude of the force on
𝑃𝑄 and 𝑄𝑅 will be
R

P I Q

a) 𝐵𝐼𝑙, 0 b) 2𝐵𝐼𝑙, 0
c) 0, 𝐵𝐼𝑙 d) 0, 0
43. A proton and a deutron both having the same kinetic energy, enter perpendicularly into a uniform
magnetic field 𝐵. For motion of proton and deuteron on circular path of radius 𝑅@ and 𝑅A respectively, the
correct statement is
a) 𝑅A = √2 𝑅B b) 𝑅A = 𝑅B /√2
c) 𝑅A = 𝑅B d) 𝑅A = 2𝑅B
44. An element 𝑑 ⃗I = 𝑑𝑥ı̂ (where 𝑑𝑥 = 1 cm) is placed at the origin and carries a large current 𝑖 = 10 A. What
is the magnetic field on the y-axis at a distance f 0.5 m?
a) 2 × 10"' k• T b) 4 × 10"' k• T
c) −2 × 10"' k• T d) −4 × 10"' k• T
45. Four charged particles are projected perpendicularly into the magnetic field with equal. Which will have
minimum frequency?
a) Proton b) Electron
C
c) Li d) HeC
46. 𝐴 and 𝐵 are two concentric circular conductors of centre 𝑂 and carrying currents 𝑖# and 𝑖! as shown in the
adjacent figure. If ratio of their radii is 1 ∶ 2 and ratio of the flux densities at 𝑂 due to 𝐴 and 𝐵 is 1 : 3, then
the value of 𝑖# /𝑖! is
B

A
r2
r1
O
i1
i2

a) 1/6 b) 1/4
c) 1/3 d) 1/2

Page|6
47. An infinitely long hollow conducting cylinder with inner radius 𝑅/2 and outer radius 𝑅 carries a uniform
‹⃗| as a function of the radial distance
current density along its length. The magnitude of the magnetic field |𝐵
𝑟 from the axis is best represented by
a) b)

c) d)

48. The ratio of magnetic field and magnetic moment at the centre of a current carrying circular loop is 𝑥.
When both the current and radius is doubled then the ratio will be
𝑥 𝑥
a) b)
8 4
𝑥
c) d) 2𝑥
2
49. Two wires 𝐴 and 𝐵 are of lengths 40 cm and 30 cm. 𝐴 is bent into a circle of radius 𝑟 and 𝐵 into an arc of
radius 𝑟. A current 𝑖# is passed through 𝐴 and 𝑖! through 𝐵. To have the same magnetic inductions at the
centre, the ratio of 𝑖# ∶ 𝑖! is
a) 3 : 4 b) 3 : 5
c) 2 : 3 d) 4 : 3
50. A wire carrying current 𝑖 is shaped as shown. Section 𝐴𝐵 is a quarter circle of radius 𝑟. The magnetic field
is directed

i A C

b) Perpendicular to the plane of the paper and directed

a) At an angle 𝜋/4 to the plane of the paper
in to the paper
c) Along the bisector of the angle 𝐴𝐶𝐵 towards 𝐴𝐵 d) Along the bisector of the angle 𝐴𝐶𝐵 away from 𝐴𝐵

Page|7
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) b 2) b 3) d 4) d 29) c 30) d 31) b 32) a
5) a 6) d 7) a 8) c 33) b 34) d 35) c 36) c
9) d 10) d 11) a 12) b 37) b 38) b 39) d 40) d
13) c 14) d 15) d 16) d 41) a 42) c 43) a 44) b
17) c 18) b 19) d 20) c 45) c 46) a 47) d 48) a
21) b 22) d 23) d 24) c 49) a 50) b
25) b 26) c 27) d 28) a

Page|8
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (b) ∴ 𝜏#! + 𝜏!! = (𝑀𝐵)!
Circumference = length of the wire ∴ (0.09 + 0.16) = 10! 𝐵!
2𝜋𝑟 = 𝐿 0.25 0.5
𝐿 𝐵! = ⇒𝐵= = 0.05 𝑇
100 10
𝑟=
2𝜋 4 (d)
1 Due to decrease in crosses (×), induced
𝑟= (∵ 𝐿
𝜋 current in outer loop is anticlockwise, 𝑖. 𝑒.,
= 2 m) from d to c and clockwise in inner loop 𝑖. 𝑒.,
Magnetic moment 𝑀 = 𝑛𝐼𝐴 from 𝑎 → 𝑏
1! 5 (a)
= 1 × 1 × πª « 𝑟#
π
1 𝐿 = 𝑛# 2𝜋𝑟# = 𝑛! 2𝜋𝑟! ⇒ 𝑛# 𝑟# = 𝑛! 𝑟! ⇒
= Am! 𝑟!
π 𝑛!
=
2 (b) 𝑛#
Net force on a current carrying loop in 𝐵=
)! E- /
⇒ /" =
)! E" -/!F"
!F )! E# -/!F#
uniform magnetic field is zero. Hence the #
!
𝑛# 𝑟! 𝑛# 1
loop can’t translate. So, options (c) and (d) = . =² ³ =
𝑛! 𝑟# 𝑛! 4
are wrong. From Fleming’s left hand rule
6 (d)
we can see that if magnetic field is
Since 𝜃 = 90°
perpendicular to paper inwards and
√&
current in the loop is clockwise (as shown) Hence 𝜏 = 𝑁𝐼𝐴𝐵 = 1 × 𝐼 × ¢ * 𝑙 ! £ 𝐵
the magnetic force 𝐅D on each element of √3 !
the loop is radially outwards, or the loops = 𝑙 𝐵𝐼
4
will have a tendency to expand. ®
B

i i

l
8 (c)
Given, 𝑖6 = 𝑖, 𝐺 = 𝑅( ;
𝑖 = 𝑛 𝑖 + 𝑖 = (𝑛 + 1) 𝑖
3 (d) 𝑖6 𝐺 𝑖𝑅( 𝑅(
𝑁 = 100 turns, area 𝜋𝑟 ! = 2 × 10"! 𝑚! , 𝑖 = ∴ 𝑆= = =
𝑖 − 𝑖6 (𝑛 + 1)𝑖 − 𝑖 𝑛
5𝐴 9 (d)
In north-south, torque = 0.3 𝑁𝑚 = 𝜏# By Fleming’s left hand rule
When plane is in east-west direction, 10 (d)
torque = 0.4 𝑁𝑚 = 𝜏! The resistance of arm 𝑃𝑄𝑅𝑆 is 3 times the
𝜇( 𝑁𝑖
𝐵= resistance of arm 𝑃𝑆. If resistance of arm
2𝑟 𝑃𝑆 = 𝑟, then resistance of arm 𝑃𝑄𝑅𝑆 = 3 𝑟.
𝑀 = 𝑁𝑖𝐴 = 100 × 5 × 2 × 10"! = 10
𝜏# = 𝑀𝐵 sin 𝜃 ; 𝜏! = 𝑀𝐵 cos 𝜃
𝜏#
∴ = tan 𝜃
𝜏!
0.3
∴ tan 𝜃 =
0.4
𝜏# = 𝑀 𝐵 sin! 𝜃 ; 𝜏!! = 𝑀! 𝐵! cos ! 𝜃
! ! !

Page|9
 )! !-
=
*+ &F
It is directed inside the paper.
∴ Resultant magnetic field at 𝑂,
𝐵 = 𝐵# − 𝐵! =0
15 (d)
𝑀 = 𝑁𝑖𝐴
16 (d)
Potential difference across 𝑃 and 𝑆 = 𝐹⃗ = 𝑞‘𝑣⃗ × 𝐵‹⃗ ’ = 0 as 𝑣⃗ and 𝐵
‹⃗ are parallel
𝑖# 𝑟 = 𝑖! × 3𝑟 17 (c)
Magnetic field induction at 𝑂 due to current Suppose length of each wire is 𝑙. 𝐴IJK.FL =
) -
through arm 𝑃𝑆 𝑖𝑠, 𝐵# = *+! ." [sin 45° + M ! M#
¢*£ = #1
sin 45°] acting perpendicular to the loop
upwards.
May field due to 𝑃𝑄 and 𝑅𝑆 are equal and
opposite. Therefore natural each other
magnetic field due to 𝑄𝑅. l/4
µ( 𝐼#
𝐵! = . [sin 45° + sin 45°]
4𝜋 𝑎 r
Perpendicular to the loop in downwards.
∴ Resultant magnetic field at centre ‹𝐁
‹⃗ =
‹‹⃗# + ‹𝐁
𝐁 ‹⃗! = 0
!
𝑙 ! 𝑙!
11 (a) 𝐴N-FNML = 𝜋𝑟 = 𝜋 ² ³ =
µ( 6𝑀# 𝑀! 6𝑀# 𝑀! 2𝜋 4𝜋
𝐹= . = ∵ Magnetic moment
4𝜋 𝑟* 𝑟*
µ( 𝑀 = 𝑖𝐴
∴ ¸ In CGS system, = 1¹ 𝑀IJK.FL 𝐴IJK.FL
4𝜋 ⇒ =
1×'((×*((
= !(×!(×!(×!( = 12 dyne. 𝑀N-FNML 𝐴N-FNML
!
𝑙 /16 𝜋
12 (b) = ! =
𝑙 /4𝜋 4
𝐹 = 𝐵𝑖𝑙 = 2 × 1.2 × 0.5 = 1.2𝑁
18 (b)
13 (c)
Direction of magnetic field at every point
Neon molecule is diatomic, so it’s net
on axis of a current carrying coil remains
magnetic moment is zero
same though magnitude varies. Hence
14 (d)
magnetic induction for whole of the 𝑥-axis
Magnetic field at 𝑂 due to 𝑃𝑅
) !-/& will remain positive
𝐵# = *+! [sin 30° + sin 30°]
F Therefore, (c) and (d) are wrong
Magnitude of magnetic field will vary will 𝑥
O! PQR #
according to the formula, 𝐵 =
!(R # CT # )$/#
O! PQ
Hence, at 𝑥 = 0, 𝐵 = !R
and when 𝑥 → ∞, 𝐵 → 0
Slope of the graph will be
µ( 2𝑖 𝑑𝐵 3𝜇( 𝑁𝐼𝑅! . 𝑥
= =−
4𝜋 3𝑟 𝑑𝑥 2(𝑅! + 𝑥 ! )%/!
It is directed outside the paper. Magnetic It means, at 𝑥 = 0, slope is equal to zero or
field at 𝑂, due to 𝑃𝑄𝑅, tangent to the graph at 𝑥 = 0, must be
µ( (𝑖/3) parallel to 𝑥-axis.
𝐵! = 2 × [sin 30° + sin 30°]
4𝜋 µ Hence (b) is correct and (a) is wrong

P a g e | 10
19 (d) 26 (c)
𝑚𝑣 ! 𝜏=4W = 𝑁𝑖𝐴𝐵 = 1 × 𝑖 × (𝜋𝑟 ! )
𝐵𝑞𝑣 = ⇒𝑟 𝐿
𝑟
𝑚𝑣 ×𝐵 ª2𝜋𝑟 = 𝐿, ⇒ 𝑟 = «
= … (i) 2𝜋
𝐵𝑞 𝐿 ! 𝐿! 𝑖𝐵
𝜏=4W = 𝜋 𝑖 ² ³ 𝐵 =
2𝜋 4𝜋
Since particle was initially at rest and gained
27 (d)
a velocity 𝑣 due to a potential difference of 𝑉
Cyclotron frequency is given by
volt. So, 𝑞𝐵
𝑣=
# 2π𝑚
KE of particle = ! 𝑚𝑣 ! = 𝑞𝑉
1.6 × 10"#$ × 6.28 × 10"*
∴𝑣=
2 × 3.14 × 1.7 × 10"!0
𝑣
= 0.94 × 10* ≈ 10* Hz
2𝑞𝑉 28 (a)
=… … (ii)
𝑚 When a charged particle having K.E. 𝑇 is
subjected to a transverse uniform magnetic
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get field, it describes a circular path in the
magnetic field without any change in its
𝑚 2𝑞𝑉 speed. Thus, the K.E. of the charged particle
𝑟= …
𝐵𝑞 𝑚 remains 𝑇 at all times
29 (c)
See the following figure
1 2𝑚𝑉
𝑟= … Magnetic lines of forces
𝐵 𝑞 i
Plane perpendicular
to conductor
∴ Diameter of the circular path

2 2𝑚𝑉
𝑑 = 2𝑟 = … 30 (d)
𝐵 𝑞
The force between two parallel current
carrying wires is independent of the radii of
21 (b)
DV F" V # the wires.
𝑟= /J
𝑖𝑒, 𝑟 ∝ 𝑣 or F#
= V" = &
#
22 (d) 31 (b)
PX/
Since, the currents are flowing in the Sensitivity = Y
opposite directions, the magnetic field at a 32 (a)
point equidistant from the two wires will Biot-Savart’s law in vector form is given as
be zero. Hence, the force acting on the µ( 𝐝𝟏 × 𝐫
𝐝𝐁 = 𝑖
charge at this instant will be zero. 4π 𝑟&
23 (d) 33 (b)
‹F⃗ = 𝑖[I⃗ × ‹B⃗] !D" Z& " !D# Z& #
𝑟= ž /J"
=ž /J#
= 3.5 [10"! ı̂ × ‘0.74 ȷ̂ − 0.36 k•’ D" J#
= ‘2.59k• − 1.25 ȷ̂’ × 10"! N. Or 𝐸[ ! = D J"
𝐸[ #
#
!D J
24 (c) = × J × 50 keV = 100 keV
D
Magnetic field due to solenoid is directed
34 (d)
along its axis. The charged particle
Since all the given forces are lying in plane,
projected along the axis of solenoid does so the given loop is in equilibrium
experience any magnetic force. So, velocity
of charged particle remains unchanged.

P a g e | 11
 𝐹*\\ = 𝐹* cos 𝜙 = 𝐹!
𝑚𝑣 !
𝐹*\\\\ = 𝐹* sin 𝜙 = 𝐹& − 𝐹# = 𝑞𝑣𝐵
𝑟
⇒ 𝐹*! = 𝐹!! + (𝐹& − 𝐹# )!
𝑚𝑣
⇒ 𝐹* = ž𝐹!! + (𝐹& − 𝐹# )! 𝑖𝑒, 𝑟= … (i)
𝑞𝐵
35 (c)
As in uniform circular motion 𝑣 = 𝑟𝜔, so
When particle enters perpendicularly in a
the angular frequency of circular motion
magnetic field, it moves along a circular
will be given by
path with constant speed
36 (c) V J/
𝜔=F= [Using Eq.
A man carrying suitable instruments will D

measure both electric and magnetic fields (i)]

when the passes by a stationary electron. If and hence the time period
can be solved by assuming the instruments
to be at rest and the electron to be moving 2π 2π𝑚
𝑇= = … (ii)
with velocity 𝑉 in opposite direction to that 𝜔 𝑞𝐵
of man, due to which there will be magnetic
Given, 𝐵 = 3.534 × 10"% T,
field as well as electric field
37 (b) 𝑞 = 1.6 × 10"#$ C, 𝑚 = 9.1 × 10"&# kg, 𝑇
𝑙 = 2𝜋 𝑟 or 𝑟 = 𝑙/2𝜋 =?
Area of circular loop, 𝐴 = 𝜋 𝑟 !
Magnetic moment 𝑀 = 𝑙𝐴 = 𝑖 𝜋 𝑟 ! From Eq. (ii), we get
! !
= 𝑖 𝜋 × 𝑙 /4𝜋 or 𝑙 = Â4 𝜋 𝑀/𝑖
2 × 3.14 × 9.1 × 10"&#
38 (b) ∴ 𝑇=
3.534 × 10"% × 1.6 × 10"#$
Radius of path = 1 × 10"1 s = 1µs
1 2𝑀𝑉 𝑞 2𝑉 𝑞 1
𝑅= … ⇒ = ! !⇒ ∝ ! 41 (a)
𝐵 𝑞 𝑚 𝐵 𝑅 𝑚 𝑅 𝑟B 𝑚B 𝑞]
39 (d) = ×
𝑟] 𝑚] 𝑞B
1 1 2 1
𝐵∝ = × = .
𝑟 4 1 2
42 (c)
Hence, graph will be a rectangular
The Lorentz force acting on the current
hyperbola.
carrying conductor in the magnetic field is
40 (d) 𝐹 = 𝐼𝐵𝑙 sin θ
For perpendicular magnetic field magnetic Since, wire 𝑃𝑄 is parallel to the direction of
force is provided by the force so, magnetic field, then θ = 0,
∴ 𝐹@^ = 𝐼𝐵𝑙 sin 0° = 0
Also, wire 𝑄𝑅 is perpendicular to the
direction of magnetic field, then θ = 90°.
∴ 𝐹^R = 𝐼𝐵𝑙 sin 90° = 𝐼𝐵𝑙
P a g e | 12
43 (a) Case-III 𝑥 ≥ 𝑅
DV # DV _!D' Z
= 𝑞𝑣𝐵. For proton 𝑅B = = É𝐵 ‹⃗ = 𝜇( 𝑙
‹⃗ . 𝑑ℓ
R J/ J/

and for deuteron 𝑅A =

_!D( Z 𝑅 !
J/ ‹⃗ Ç2𝜋𝑥 = 𝜇( Ë𝜋𝑅! − 𝜋 ² ³ Ì 𝐽
Ç𝐵
2
𝑅A 𝑚A 𝜇 𝐽3
⇒ =… = √2 ⇒ 𝑅A = √2𝑅B ‹⃗ Ç = ( 𝑅!
Ç𝐵
𝑅B 𝑚B 2𝑥 2
44 (b) 3𝜇( 𝐽𝑅!
‹⃗ Ç =
Ç𝐵
Here, 𝑑𝑙 = 𝑑𝑥 = 1 cm = 10"! m; 8𝑥
So
𝑖 = 10Am, 𝑟 = 0.5 m
a⃗
𝑑B‹⃗ = )! (A ` $×5a⃗)
*+ F
µ( 𝑖 𝑑𝑙 µ 𝑖 𝑑𝑙
= !
(ı̂ × ȷ̂) = ( ! k•
4𝜋 𝑟 4𝜋 𝑟
10"0 × 10 × 10"! sin 90°
= k•
(0.5)! 48 (a)
= 4 × 10"' k• T. Magnetic field at the centre of a circular
45 (c) loop of radius 𝑅 carrying current 𝐼 is 𝐵 =
/J O! !+Q O! Q
Frequency 𝑓 = !cD =
*+R !F
As proton, electron, LiC , HeC have same Its magnetic moment is 𝑀 = 𝐼𝐴 = 𝐼(𝜋𝑅! )
charge in magnitude and since magnetic 𝐵 𝜇( 𝐼 1 𝜇(
∴ = × !
= = 𝑥 [Given]
field is also constant. 𝑀 2𝑅 𝐼𝜋𝑅 2𝜋𝑅!
So, 𝑓 ∝ D
# When both the current and radius is
/) O!
Among the given charged particles, Li has C doubled, the ratio becomes = =
d\ !+(!R)$
highest mass, therefore it will have #
¢
O!
£='
T
' !+R $
minimum frequency.
49 (a)
46 (a)
For wire 𝐴,
𝑟# : 𝑟! = 1: 2 and 𝐵# : 𝐵! = 1: 3. We know
that µ( 𝑖#
𝜇( 2𝜋𝑛𝑖 𝑖# 𝐵# 𝑟# 1 × 1 1 𝐵# =
𝐵= . ⇒ = = = 2𝑟
4𝜋 𝑟 𝑖! 𝐵! 𝑟! 3 × 2 6
*(
47 (d) Where 𝑟 = !c
R
Case-I 𝑥 < ! For wire 𝐵,

Circumference = length

𝑛π𝑟 = 30
&( &( &
or 𝑛π = F
= *(/!c = ! π
‹⃗ Ç = 0
Ç𝐵 &
R or θ = 𝑛π = ! π
Case-II ! ≤ 𝑥 < 𝑅
‹⃗ = 𝜇( 𝑙
‹⃗ . 𝑑ℓ µ( 𝑖!
É𝐵 ∴ 𝐵! = ² ³θ
4π 𝑟
𝑅 !
‹⃗ Ç2𝜋𝑥 = 𝜇( Ë𝜋𝑥 ! − 𝜋 ² ³ Ì 𝐽
Ç𝐵 But 𝐵# = 𝐵!
2
𝜇 𝐽 𝑅 ! ) ! -" )! -
‹⃗ Ç = ( Î𝑥 ! − Ï
Ç𝐵 or !F
= *c
¢ F# £ θ
2𝑥 4

P a g e | 13
 -" & Use Right hand palm rule or Maxwell’s Cork
or =
-# *
screw rule
50 (b)

P a g e | 14
 Magnetism and Matter
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. If a magnet of pole strength 𝑚 is divided into four parts such that the length and width of each part is half
that of initial one, then the pole strength of each part will be
a) 𝑚/4 b) 𝑚/2
c) 𝑚/8 d) 4𝑚
2. !"
A short bar magnet of magnetic moment 0.4 𝐽 𝑇 is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.16 𝑇. The
magnet is in stable equilibrium when the potential energy is
a) −0.082 𝐽 b) 0.064 𝐽
c) −0.064 𝐽 d) Zero
3. The magnetic needle of a tangent galvanometer is deflected at angle of 30° due to a current in its coil. The
horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field is 0.34 × 10!# T, then magnetic field at the center of the
coil due to current
a) 1.96 × 10!$ T b) 1.96 × 10!# T
c) 1.96 × 10 T# d) 1.96 × 10$ T
4. The given figure represents a material which is

a) Paramagnetic b) Diamagnetic
c) Ferromagnetic d) None of these
5. The resultant magnetic moment of neon atom will be
a) Infinity b) 𝜇%
c) Zero 𝜇%
d)
2
6. A permanent magnet
a) Attracts all substances b) Attracts only magnetic substances
c) Attracts magnetic substances and repels all d) Attracts non-magnetic substances and repels
non-magnetic substances magnetic substances
7. If a magnet is hanged with its magnetic axis then it stops in
a) Magnetic meridian b) Geometric meridian
c) Angle of dip d) None of these
8. The ultimate individual unit of magnetism is any magnet is called
a) North pole b) South pole
c) Dipole d) Quadrupole
9. A frog can be levitated in magnetic field produced by a current in a vertical solenoid placed below the frog.
This is possible because the body of the frog behaves as
a) Paramagnetic b) Diamagnetic
c) Ferromagnetic d) Anti-ferromagnetic
10. A small bar magnet of moment 𝑀 is placed in a uniform field 𝐻. If magnet makes an angle of 30° with field,
the torque acting on the magnet is
𝑀𝐻
a) 𝑀𝐻 b)
2
𝑀𝐻 𝑀𝐻
c) d)
3 4
11. A magnetic dipole is placed in a uniform magnetic field. The net magnetic force on the dipole
a) Is always zero b) Depends on the orientation of the dipole
c) Can never be zero d) Depends on the strength of the dipole
12. The magnetic susceptibility does not depend upon the temperature in
a) Ferrite substances b) Ferromagnetic substances
c) Diamagnetic substances d) Paramagnetic substances
13. A bar magnet is equivalent to
a) Torroid carrying current b) Straight conductor carrying current
c) Solenoid carrying current d) Circular coil carrying current
14. The material of permanent magnet has
a) High retentivity, low coercivity b) Low retentivity, high coercivity
c) Low retentivity, low coercivity d) High retentivity, high coercivity
& !"
15. A bar magnet has coercivity 4 × 10 𝐴𝑚 . It is desired to demagnetise it by inserting it inside a solenoid
12 𝑐𝑚 long and having 60 turns. The current that should be sent through the solenoid is
a) 2 𝐴 b) 4 𝐴
c) 6 𝐴 d) 8 𝐴
16. A magnetic dipole is placed in two perpendicular magnetic fields Bc⃗ and H
cc⃗ and is in equilibrium taking
c⃗. Then
angle θ with B
a) 𝐵 = 𝐻 b) 𝐵 cosθ = 𝐻 sin θ
c) 𝐵 sin θ = 𝐻 cos θ d) 𝐵 = 𝐻 tan θ
17. If the angular momentum of an electron is 𝐽⃗ then the magnitude of the magnetic moment will be
𝑒𝐽 𝑒𝐽
a) b)
𝑚 2𝑚
2𝑚
c) 𝑒𝐽 2𝑚 d)
𝑒𝐽
18. A rigid circular loop of radius r and mass m lies in the 𝑥 − 𝑦 plane of a flat table and has a current 𝑖 flowing
q The value of 𝑖 so that the loop
in it. At this particular place the earth’s magnetic field is 𝑩 = 𝐵' m̂ + 𝐵( 𝒌.
start tilting is
𝑚g 𝑚g
a) ) b)
𝜋𝑟t𝐵' + 𝐵() 𝜋𝑟𝐵'
𝑚g 𝑚g
c) d)
𝜋𝑟𝐵( 𝜋𝑟t𝐵' 𝐵(
19. Two identical bar magnets with a length 10 𝑐𝑚 and weight 50 𝑔-𝑤𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 are arranged freely with their
poles facing in a inverted vertical glass tube. The upper magnet hangs in the air above the lower one so
that the distance between the nearest pole of the magnet is 3𝑚𝑚. Pole strength of the poles of each
magnet will be
S
N

N
S

a) 6.64 𝑎𝑚𝑝 × 𝑚 b) 2 𝑎𝑚𝑝 × 𝑚

c) 10.25 𝑎𝑚𝑝 × 𝑚 d) None of these

Page|2
20. At a certain place, horizontal component is√3 times the vertical component. The angle of dip at this place
is
a) Zero b) 𝜋/3
c) 𝜋/6 d) None of these
21. Two identical short bar magnets, each having magnetic moment 𝑀, are placed a distance of 2𝑑 apart with
axes perpendicular to each other in a horizontal plane. The magnetic induction at a point midway between
them is
𝜇 𝑀 𝜇 𝑀
a) * ~√2• & b) * ~√3• &
4𝜋 𝑑 4𝜋 𝑑
2𝜇* 𝑀 𝜇* 𝑀
c) € • & d) ~√5• &
𝜋 𝑑 4𝜋 𝑑
22. A copper rod is suspended a non homogenous magnetic field region. The rod when in equilibrium will
align itself
a) In the region where magnetic field is strongest b) In the region where magnetic field is weakest and
parallel to direction of magnetic field there
c) In the direction in which it was originally d) In the region where magnetic field is weakest and
suspended perpendicular to the direction of magnetic field there
23. A magnet of length 14 cm and magnetic moment M is broken into two parts of length 6 cm and 8 cm. They
are put at a right angle to each other with opposite poles together. The magnetic moment of the
combination is
a) M/10 b) M
c) M/1.4 d) 2.8 M
24. A uniform magnetic field parallel to the plane of paper, existed in space initially directed from left to right.
When a bar of soft iron is placed I the field parallel to it, the lines of force passing through it will be
represented by figure.
a) b)

c) d)

25. Two magnets of equal mass are joined at 90° each other as shown in figure. Magnet 𝑁" 𝑆" has a magnetic
moment √3 times that of 𝑁) 𝑆) . The arrangement is pivoted so that it is free to rotate in horizontal plane.
When in equilibrium, what angle should 𝑁" 𝑆" make with magnetic meridian?

a) 75° b) 60°
c) 30° d) 45°
26. The deflection magnetometer is most sensitive when deflection θ is
a) Nearly zero b) Nearly 30°
c) Nearly 45° d) Nearly 90°
27. Isogonic lines on magnetic map will have
a) Zero angle of dip b) Zero angle of declination
c) Same angle of declination d) Same angle of dip
28. A magnet makes 5 oscillations per min in 𝐵 = 0.3 × 10!# T. By what amount should the field be increased
so that number of oscillations is 10 in the same time?

Page|3
 a) 0.3 × 10!# T b) 0.6 × 10!# T
!#
c) 0.9 × 10 T d) 1.2 × 10!# T
29. When a ferromagnetic material is heated to temperature above its curie point, the material
a) Is permanently magnetized b) Remains ferromagnetic
c) Behaves like a diamagnetic material d) Behaves like a paramagnetic material
30. When a magnetic substance is heated, then it
a) Becomes a strong magnet b) Losses its magnetism
c) Does not effect the magnetism d) Either (a) or (c)
31. At a point on the right bisector of a magnetic dipole magnetic
" b) Potential is zero at all points on the right bisector
a) Potential varies as ,!
) d) Field is perpendicular to the axis of dipole
c) Field varies as 𝑟
32. The magnetized wire of moment M and length l is bent in the form of semicircle of radius r. Then its
magnetic moment is
2𝑀 b) 2 M
a)
𝜋
𝑀 d) Zero
c)
𝜋
33. Due to a small magnet, intensity at a distance 𝑥 in the end on position is 9 𝑔𝑎𝑢𝑠𝑠. What will be the intensity
'
at a distance ) on broad side on position
a) 9 𝑔𝑎𝑢𝑠𝑠 b) 4 𝑔𝑎𝑢𝑠𝑠
c) 36 𝑔𝑎𝑢𝑠𝑠 d) 4.5 𝑔𝑎𝑢𝑠𝑠
34. A short bar magnet has a length 2𝑙 and a magnetic moment 10 Am) . Find the magnetic field at a distance
of z = 0.1 m from its centre on the axial line. Here, 𝑙 is negligible as compared to 𝑧.
a) 2 × 10!& T b) 3 × 10!& T
c) 1 × 10!& T d) 4 × 10!& T
35. A small bar magnet has a magnetic moment 1.2 𝐴-𝑚) . The magnetic field at a distance 0.1 𝑚 on it axis will
be: (𝜇* = 4𝜋 × 10!- -𝑚/𝐴)
a) 1.2 × 10!# 𝑇 b) 2.4 × 10!# 𝑇
c) 2.4 × 10# 𝑇 d) 1.2 × 10# 𝑇
SECTION -B
36. The direction of the null points is on the equatorial line of a bar magnet, when the north pole of the magnet
is pointing
a) North b) South
c) East d) West
37. A magnetic needle is made to vibrate in uniform field 𝐻, then it time period is 𝑇. If it vibrates in the field of
intensity 4𝐻, its time period will be
a) 2𝑇 b) 𝑇/2
c) 2/𝑇 d) 𝑇
38. On applying an external magnetic field, to a ferromagnetic substance domains
a) Align in the direction of magnetic field b) Align in the direction opposite to magnetic field
c) Remain unaffected d) None of the above
39. The angle of dip at the magnetic equator is
a) 0° b) 45°
c) 30° d) 90°
40. The magnetic susceptibility is negative for
a) Paramagnetic materials b) Diamagnetic materials
c) Ferromagnetic materials d) Paramagnetic and ferromagnetic materials
41. There are four light-weight-rod samples, 𝐴, 𝐵, 𝐶, 𝐷 separately suspended by threads. A bar magnet is
slowly brought near each sample and the following observations are noted
(i) 𝐴 is feebly repelled

Page|4
 (ii) 𝐵 is feebly attracted
(iii) 𝐶 is strongly attracted
(iv) 𝐷 remains unaffected
Which one of the following is true
a) 𝐴 is of a non-magnetic material b) 𝐵 is of a paramagnetic material
c) 𝐶 is of a diamagnetic material d) 𝐷 is of a ferromagnetic material
42. In which direction, the magnetic field on the axis at a distance z from the centre of the bar magnet would
be?
a) In the perpendicular direction of the magnetic b) In the direction of the magnetic dipole moment (M)
moment (M) of the magnet of the magnet
c) Its direction depends on the magnitude of the d) In the opposite direction of the magnetic dipole
magnetic moment (M) of the magnet moment(M) of the magnet
43. If the magnetic is cut into four equal parts such that their lengths and breadths are equal. Pole strength of
each part is
a) 𝑚 b) m/2
c) m/4 d) m/8
44. The relative permeability (𝜇, ) of a ferromagnetic substance varies with temperature (𝑇) according to the
curve
µr
C
100
A
10
B
1.0

0.1 D

Tc T

a) 𝐴 b) 𝐵
c) 𝐶 d) 𝐷
45. If a diamagnetic solution is poured into a U-tube and one arm of this U-tube is placed between the poles of
a strong magnet, with the meniscus in line with the field, then the level of solution will
a) Rise b) Fall
c) Oscillate slowly d) Remain as such
46. If magnetic lines of force are drawn by keeping magnet vertical, then number of neutral points will be
a) One b) Two
c) Four d) Five
47. What happens to the force between magnetic poles when their pole strength and the distance between
them are both doubled
a) Force increases to two times the previous value b) No change
c) Force decreases to half the previous value d) Force increases to four times the previous value
48. A paramagnetic substance of susceptibility 3 × 10 is placed in a magnetic field of 4 × 10!# Am!" . Then
!#

the intensity of magnetization in the units of Am!" is

a) 1.33 × 10. b) 0.75 × 10!.
c) 12 × 10!. d) 14 × 10!.
49. The relative magnetic permeability of ferromagnetic materials is of the order of
a) 10 b) 100
c) 1000 d) 10000
50. Choose the correct statement
a) A paramagnetic material tends to move from a b) A magnetic material is in the paramagnetic phase
strong magnetic field to weak magnetic field below its Curie temperature
c) The resultant magnetic moment in an atom of a d) Typical domain size of a ferromagnetic material is 1
diamagnetic substance is zero nm

Page|5
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) b 2) c 3) a 4) b 29) d 30) b 31) a 32) a
5) c 6) b 7) a 8) c 33) c 34) a 35) b 36) a
9) b 10) b 11) a 12) c 37) b 38) a 39) a 40) b
13) c 14) d 15) d 16) c 41) b 42) a 43) b 44) c
17) b 18) b 19) a 20) c 45) b 46) a 47) b 48) c
21) d 22) d 23) c 24) b 49) d 50) c
25) c 26) a 27) c 28) c

Page|6
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (b) magnetic field of strength B making an
0
For each part 𝑚/ = ) angle θ with the direction of the magnetic
field. Force on N-pole of the magnet=mB
S N S N A/2
S N
S N S N A/2 (along the direction of magnetic field B.)
L
L/2 L/2
Force on S-pole of the magnet = 𝑚𝐵 (along
2
2 (c) the direction of magnetic field B.)
For stable equilibrium
𝑈 = −𝑀𝐵 Force on S-pole of the magnet = 𝑚𝐵
= −(0.4)(0.16) = −0.064 𝐽 (opposite to the direction of magnetic field
3 (a) B).
Given that, the horizontal component of
earth’s magnetic field 𝐵1 = 0.34 × 10!# T Therefore, net magnetic force on the dipole
is zero.
θ = 30°
13 (c)
We know that, for tangent galvanometer A bar magnet is equivalent to a current
carrying solenoid due to the following facts:
𝐵 = 𝐵1 tan θ
(i) Both rest in north-south direction when
⇒ 𝐵 = 0.34 × 10!# × tan 30° suspended freely
= 1.96 × 10!$ T (ii) Both have two poles: north pole and the
south pole.
5 (c)
Neon is diamagnetic, hence its magnetic (iii) The like poles of both repel each other
moment is zero. while the unlike poles attract each other.
7 (a) 14 (d)
W
Magnetic Axis N
From the characteristic of 𝐵-𝐻 curve
N S 15 (d)
S E
Magnetic The bar magnet has coercivity 4 ×
Meridian 10& 𝐴𝑚!" , 𝑖. 𝑒., it requires a magnetic
8 (c) intensity 𝐻 = 4 × 10& 𝐴𝑚!" to get
Dipole is the ultimate individual unit of demagnetised. Let 𝑖 be the current carried
magnetism in any magnet. by solenoid having 𝑛 number of turns per
metre length, then by definition 𝐻 = 𝑛𝑖.
9 (b)
Here 𝐻 = 4 × 10& 𝑎𝑚𝑝 𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑛 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒 !"
Frog is leveited in magnetic field produced 𝑁 60
by the current in vertical solenoid below 𝑛= = = 500 𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑛 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒 !"
𝑙 0.12
the frog due to repulsion, so body of frog 𝐻 4 × 10&
behaves as diamagnetic substance. ⇒𝑖= = = 8.0 𝐴
𝑛 500
16 (c)
10 (b)
As θ is with 𝐵, therefore according to
𝑀𝐻
𝜏 = 𝑀𝐻 sin 𝜃 = 𝑀𝐻 sin 30° = tangent law,
2
𝐵sinθ
11 (a) 𝐻 = 𝐵 tan θ = or 𝐵 sinθ = 𝐻cosθ
A bar magnet having N-S pole, strength m cosθ
17 (b)
and length 2I be placed in a uniform

Page|7
 As we know for circulating electron Copper is a diamagnetic material, therefore
magnetic moment its rod aligh itself where magnetic field is
1 weaker and perpendicular to the direction
𝑀 = 𝑒𝑣𝑟 … (i)
2 of magnetic field there.
And angular momentum 𝐽 = 𝑚𝑣𝑟 …(ii) 23 (c)
23 ;
From equation (i) and (ii), 𝑀 = )0 Pole strength of original magnet, 𝑚 = "#
18 (b)
Torque(𝜏) is given by Effective distance between the poles =AB

𝜏 = |𝐌 × 𝐁|

Where M is magnetic dipole moment of

loop given by,

𝑴 = 𝑖𝑨

q
∴ 𝑴 = (𝑖𝜋𝑟 ) )𝒌

𝜏 = |𝐌 × 𝐁| = (πr ) 𝑖𝐵' )

Now, torque of weight will be mgr.

𝑚𝑔𝑟 = 𝜋𝑟 ) 𝑖𝐵'
𝑀 𝑀
𝑚𝑔 𝑀// = 𝑚. 2𝑙 = × 10 =
⇒ 𝑖= 14 1.4
𝜋𝑟𝐵'
24 (b)
19 (a) Because of large permeability of soft iron,
The weight of upper magnet should be magnetic lines of force prefer to pass
balanced by the repulsion between the two through it. Concentration of lines in soft
magnets iron bar increases as shown in Fig. (b).
𝜇* 𝑚) 25 (c)
∴ . = 50 𝑔𝑤𝑡
4𝜋 𝑟 ) In equilibrium, the resultant magnetic
𝑚) moment will be along magnetic meridian.
⇒ 10!- × = 50 × 10!& × 9.8
(9 × 10!4 ) Let 𝑁" 𝑆" make ∠θ with resultant
⇒ 𝑚 = −6.64 𝑎𝑚𝑝 × 𝑚 𝑀) 𝑀 1
20 (c) tanθ = = = ∴ θ = 30°
𝑀" √3𝑀 √3
5 5 "
tan𝛿 = 1 = = 26 (a)
√&5 √&
∴ 𝛿 = 30° = 𝜋/ 6 rad The deflection magnetometer is most
21 (d) sensitive in the null method 𝑖𝑒, when θ =
At point 𝑃 net magnetic field 𝐵728 = 0°.
28 (c)
t𝐵") + 𝐵))
9 ); 9 ; 𝐵) 𝑛)) 10)
Where 𝐵" = #:" . <# and 𝐵) = #:" . <# = = ) =4
𝐵" 𝑛") 5
𝜇* √5𝑀 𝐵) = 4𝐵" = 4 × 0.3 × 10!# T = 1.2 × 10!# T
⇒ 𝐵728 = .
4𝜋 𝑑& Increase in field = 𝐵) − 𝐵" = 0.9 × 10!# T
2
29 (d)
1 d d N
Ferromagnetic substance are strongly
P B1
S N attracted by a magnet, show all properties
B2 S of a paramagnetic substance to a much
22 (d) higher degree. While paramagnetic

Page|8
 substances are feebly attracted by a µ* 2𝑀𝑟
𝐵= = ; if 𝑙 < < 𝑟, then 𝐵=
magnet. When ferromagnetic substance is 4𝜋 (𝑟 ) − 𝑙 ) ))
heated, then at a definite temperature the µ* 2𝑀
=
ferromagnetic property of the substance 4𝜋 𝑟 &
suddenly disappears and the substance "*$% × ) × "*
becomes paramagnetic. The temperature 𝐵= = (*.")#
= 2 × 10!& T [∵
above which a ferromagnetic substance 𝑧 = 𝑟]
becomes paramagnetic is called the curie
temperature (point) of the substance. 35 (b)
𝜇* 2𝑀 2 × 1.2
𝐵= . & ⇒ 𝐵 = 10!- ×
31 (a) 4𝜋 𝑑 (0.1)&
The magnetic potential due to a magnetic = 2.4 × 10!# 𝑇
dipole at distance r is 36 (a)
N BH BH
µ* 𝑀 cos θ N
𝑉= W E N1 N2
4𝜋 𝑟 )
S
B B
On the right bisector(𝑖𝑒, on axial line), θ = S

0° 𝑁" and 𝑁) are two null points. And 𝐵1 =

Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic
µ* 𝑀
∴ v= field
4𝜋 𝑟 )
𝐵 = Magnetic field due to bar magnets
"
or 𝑉 ∝ , ! 37 (b)
𝐼 𝑇" (𝐵1 ))
32 (a) 𝑇 = 2𝜋° ⇒ =°
𝑀𝐵1 𝑇) (𝐵1 )"
On bending a wire its pole strength remains
unchanged whereas its magnetic moment (𝐵𝐻)" 𝑇
changes ⇒ 𝑇) = 𝑇° = [∵ (𝐵1 )) = 4(𝐵1 )" ]
(𝐵𝐻 )) 2
38 (a)
On applying magnetic field, domains of
ferromagnetic substance align themselves
in the direction of magnetic field.

41 (b)
New magnetic moment, Diamagnetic will be feebly repelled.
2𝑙 2𝑀 Paramagnetic will be feebly attracted.
𝑀// = 𝑚(2𝑟) = 𝑚 € • = Ferromagnetic will be strongly attracted
𝜋 𝜋
43 (b)
33 (c)
);
In C.G.S. 𝐵='>=? = 9 = ' # …(i)
𝑀 8𝑀
𝐵@ABCDEFGCH = & = & … (ii)
' 𝑥
© )ª
From equation (i) and (ii), 𝐵@ABCDEFGCH = 0
For each part 𝑚// =
36 𝑔𝑎𝑢𝑠𝑠 )

34 (a)
45 (b)
On axial position
A dia-magnetic liquid moves from stronger
parts of magnetic field to weaker parts.

Page|9
 Therefore the meniscus of the level of 50 (c)
solution will fall. Diamagnetic substances are those
47 (b) substances in which resultant magnetic
𝑚" 𝑚) moment in an atom is zero.
𝐹∝
𝑟) A paramagnetic material tends to move
48 (c) from a weak magnetic field to strong
Susceptibility (𝑋) = magnetic field.
GMD@MNGDO EP QCRM@DGNCDGEM (S)
QCRM@DGT PG@HU(%) A magnetic material is in the paramagnetic
phase above its Curie temperature.
Or 𝐼 = 𝑥𝐵 Typical domain size of a ferromagnetic
material is 1 mm.
∴ 𝐼 = 3 × 10!# × 4 × 10!#
The susceptibility of a ferromagnetic
Or 𝐼 = 12 × 10!. Am!" material is 𝜒 >> 1

P a g e | 10
 Electromagnetic Induction
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. An inductor (𝐿 = 100 mH), a resistor (R = 100Ω) and a battery (𝐸 = 100𝑉) are initially connected in
series as shown in the figure. After a long time the battery is disconnected after short circuiting the points
A and B. The current in the circuit 1 𝑚𝑠 after the short circuit is

a) 𝑒 𝐴 b) 0.1 𝐴
c) 1 𝐴 d) 1/𝑒 𝐴
2. Whenever a magnet is moved either towards or away from a conducting coil, an emf is induced, the
magnitude of which is independent of
a) The strength of the magnetic field b) The speed with which the magnet is moved
c) The number of turns is the coil d) The resistance of the coil
3. A physicist works in a laboratory where the magnetic field is 2𝑇. She wears a necklace enclosing area
0.01𝑚! in such a way that the plane of the necklace is normal to the field and is having a resistance 𝑅 =
0.01 Ω. Because of power failure, the field decays to 1𝑇 in time 10"# 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑𝑠. Then what is the total heat
produced in her necklace? (𝑇 = 𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑙𝑎)
a) 10 𝐽 b) 20 𝐽
c) 30 𝐽 d) 40 𝐽
4. A coil of area 80 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑐𝑚 and 50 turns is rotating with 2000 𝑟𝑒𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒 about an axis
perpendicular to a magnetic filed of 0.05 𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑙𝑎. The maximum value of the e.m.f. developed in it is
10𝜋
a) 200 𝜋 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 b) 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
3
4𝜋 2
c) 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 d) 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
3 3
5. When a magnet is pushed in and out of a circular coil 𝐶 connected to a very senstitive galvanometer 𝐺 as
shown in the adjoining diagram with a frequency 𝑣, then

N S

G
a) Constant deflection is observed in the Visible small oscillations will be observed in the
b)
galvanometer galvanometer if 𝑣 is about 50 𝐻𝑧
 Oscillations in the deflection will be observed No variation in the deflection will be seen if 𝑣 = 1 or
c) d)
clearly if 𝑣 = 1 or 2 𝐻𝑧 2 𝐻𝑧
6. In the circuit shown below, the key 𝐾 is closed at 𝑡 = 0. The current through the battery is

$(&! '&" ) $
a)
$(&! '&" ) $
at 𝑡 = 0 and & at 𝑡 = ∞ b) at 𝑡 = 0 and & at 𝑡 = ∞
&! &" " )&!" &"" "

$ $(&! '&" )
d) &" at 𝑡 = 0 and at 𝑡 = ∞
$ $(&! '&" )
c) &"
at 𝑡 = 0 and &! &"
at 𝑡 = ∞ )&!" &""

7. Induced potential in a coil is developed by change of magnetic flux from 1 𝑤𝑏 to 0.1 𝑤𝑏 in 0.1 second is
a) 1/9 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 b) 0.09 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
c) 1 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 d) 9 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
8. A square coil of 10 𝑚 area is placed perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field of intensity 10# 𝑊𝑏/𝑚! .
"! !

The magnetic flux through the coil is

a) 10 𝑤𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟 b) 10"* 𝑤𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟
c) 10* 𝑤𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟 d) 100 𝑤𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟
9. An AC generator of 220 𝑉 having internal resistance 𝑟 = 10 Ω and external resistance 𝑅 = 100 Ω. What is
the power developed in the external circuit
a) 484 𝑊 b) 400 𝑊
c) 441 𝑊 d) 369 𝑊
10. The current carrying wire and the rod 𝐴𝐵 are in the same plane. The rod moves parallel to the wire with a
velocity 𝑣. Which one of the following statements is true about induced emf in the rod
A i

End 𝐴 will be at lower potential with respect to

a) b) 𝐴 and 𝐵 will be at the same potential
𝐵
c) There will be no induced e.m.f. in the rod d) Potential at 𝐴 will be higher than that at 𝐵
11. Two conducting circular loops of radii 𝑅+ and 𝑅! are placed in the same plane with their centres
coinciding. If 𝑅+ ≫ 𝑅! , the mutual inductance 𝑀 between them will be directly proportional to
a) 𝑅+ /𝑅! b) 𝑅! /𝑅+
c) 𝑅+! /𝑅! d) 𝑅!! /𝑅+
12. A circular coil of radius 5 𝑐𝑚 has 500 turns of a wire. The approximate value of the coefficient of self
induction of the coil will be
a) 25 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑙𝑖ℎ𝑒𝑛𝑟𝑦 b) 25 × 10"# 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑙𝑖ℎ𝑒𝑛𝑟𝑦
"#
c) 50 × 10 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑙𝑖ℎ𝑒𝑛𝑟𝑦 d) 50 × 10"# 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑙𝑖ℎ𝑒𝑛𝑟𝑦
13. A conducting circular loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction B tesla with its plane normal
,-
to the field. Now, the radius of the loop starts shrinking at the rate • ‚. Then, the induced emf at the
,.
instant when the radius is 𝑟,is
𝑑𝑟 𝑑𝑟
a) 𝜋𝑟𝐵 ƒ „ b) 2𝜋𝑟𝐵 ƒ „
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝑑𝐵 𝜋𝑟 ! 𝑑𝑟
c) 𝜋𝑟 ! ƒ „ d) … †𝐵ƒ „
𝑑𝑡 2 𝑑𝑡

Page|2
14. Which of the following figure correctly depicts the Lenz’s law. The arrows show the movement of the
labelled pole of a bar magnet into a closed circular loop and the arrows on the circle show the direction of
the induced current
a) b)

c) d)

15. The variation of induced emf(ε) with time (t ) in a coil if a short bar magnet is moved along its axis with a
constant velocity is best represented as

a) b)

c) d)

16. A copper disc of radius 0.1 m is rotated about its centre with 20 rev − s"+ in a uniform magnetic field of 0.1
T with its plane perpendicular to the field. The emf induced across the radius of the disc is
π π
a) V b) V
20 10
c) 20π mV d) 10π mV
17. What is increased in step-down transformer
a) Voltage b) Current
c) Power d) Current density
18. When a low flying aircraft passes over head, we sometimes notice a slight shaking of the picture on our TV
screen. This is due to
a) Diffraction of the signal received from the b) Interference of the direct signal received by the
antenna. antenna with the weak signal reflected by the
passing aircraft.
c) Change of magnetic flux occuring due to the d) Vibration created by the passage of aircraft
passage of aircraft
19. A long horizontal metallic rod with length along the east-west direction is falling under gravity. The
potential difference between its two ends will
a) Be zero b) Be constant
c) Increase with time d) Decrease with time
20. According to Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction

Page|3
 a) The direction of induced current is such that it b) The magnitude of induced e.m.f. produced in a coil is
opposes the cause producing it directly proportional to the rate of change of
magnate flux
c) The direction of induced e.m.f. is such that it d) None of the above
opposes the cause producing it
21. Which of the following is not an application of eddy currents
a) Induction furnace b) Galvanometer damping
c) Speedometer of automobiles d) X-ray crystallography
22. A coil of 𝐶𝑢 wire (radius-𝑟, self inductance-𝐿) is bent in two concentric turns each having radius - . The self
!
inductance now
a) 2𝐿 b) 𝐿
c) 4𝐿 d) 𝐿/2
23. A 10 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒 wire kept in east-west direction is falling with velocity 5𝑚/𝑠𝑒𝑐 perpendicular to the field
0.3 × 10"/ 𝑊𝑏/𝑚! . The induced e.m.f. across the terminal will be
a) 0.15 𝑉 b) 1.5 𝑚𝑉
c) 1.5 𝑉 d) 15.0 𝑉
24. The coil of dynamo is rotating in a magnetic field. The developed induced e.m.f. changes and the number of
magnetic lines of force also changes. Which of the following conditions is correct
a) Lines of force minimum but induced e.m.f. is b) Lines of force maximum but induced e.m.f. is zero
zero
c) Lines of force maximum but induced e.m.f. is d) Lines of force maximum but induced e.m.f. is also
not zero maximum
25. According to Lenz’s law of electromagnetic induction
a) The induced emf is not in the direction b) The relative motion between the coil and magnet
opposing the change in magnetic flux. produces change in magnetic flux
c) Only the magnet should be moved towards coil d) Only the coil should be moved towards magnet
26. The formula for induced e.m.f. in a coil due to change in magnetic flux through the coil is (here 𝐴 = area of
the coil, 𝐵 = magnetic field)
𝑑𝐵 𝑑𝐴
a) 𝑒 = −𝐴. b) 𝑒 = −𝐵.
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝑑 𝑑
c) 𝑒 = − (𝐴. 𝐵) d) 𝑒 = − (𝐴 × 𝐵)
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
27. Eddy currents are produced when
a) A metal is kept in varying magnetic field b) A metal is kept in the steady magnetic field
c) A circular coil is placed in a magnetic field d) Through a circular coil, current is passed
28. If a coil made of conducting wires is rotated between poles pieces of the permanent magnet. The motion
will generate a current and this device is called
a) An electric motor b) An electric generator
c) An electromagnet d) All of the above
29. A conducting rod of length l is moving in a transverse magnetic field of strength B with velocity v. The
resistance of the rod is R. the current in the rod is
𝐵𝑙𝑣
a) b) 𝐵𝑙𝑣
𝑅
c) Zero 𝐵! 𝑣 ! 𝑙!
d)
𝑅
30. A simple pendulum with bob of mass 𝑚 and conducting wire of length 𝐿 swings under gravity through an
angle 2 θ. The earth’s magnetic field component in the direction perpendicular to swing is B. Maximum
potential difference induced across the pendulum is

Page|4
 θ θ
a) 2 𝐵𝐿 sin ƒ „ (g𝐿)+/! b) 𝐵𝐿 sin ƒ „ (g𝐿)
2 2
θ θ
c) 𝐵𝐿 sin ƒ „ (g𝐿)#/! d) 𝐵𝐿 sin ƒ „ (g𝐿)!
2 2
31. The self inductance of a solenoid of length 𝐿, area of cross-section 𝐴 and having 𝑁 turns is
𝜇 𝑁!𝐴 𝜇 𝑁𝐴
a) 1 b) 1
𝐿 𝐿
c) 𝜇1 𝑁 ! 𝐿𝐴 d) 𝜇1 𝑁𝐴𝐿
32. Plane figures made of thin wires of resistance 𝑅 + 50 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑙𝑖 𝑜ℎ𝑚/𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒 are located in a uniform magnetic
field perpendicular into the plane of the figures and which decrease at the rate 𝑑𝐵/𝑑𝑡 = 0.1 𝑚 𝑇/𝑠. The
current in the inner and outer boundary are inner radius 𝑎 = 10 𝑐𝑚 and outer radius 𝑏 = 20 𝑐𝑚)
´ ´ ´ ´ ´ ´ ´
´ ´ ´ b´ ´ ´ ´
´ ´ ´ a ´ ´ ´
´ ´ ´ ´ ´ ´
´ ´D ´ ´ ´C ´ ´

a) 10 𝐴 (Clockwise), 2 × 10"/ 𝐴 (Clockwise)

"/
b) 10"/ 𝐴 (Anticlockwise), 2 × 10"/ 𝐴 (Clockwise)
c) 2 × 10"/ 𝐴 (Clockwise), 10"/ 𝐴 (Anticlockwise) d) 2 × 10"/ 𝐴 (Anticlockwise), 10"/ 𝐴 (Anticlockwise)
33. In a dc motor, induced e.m.f. will be maximum
a) When motor takes maximum speed b) When motor starts rotating
c) When speed of motor increases d) When motor is switched off
34. If a coil of metal wire is kept stationary in a non-uniform magnetic field, then
a) An e.m.f. is induced in the coil b) A current is induced in the coil
c) Neither e.m.f. nor current is induced d) Both e.m.f. and current is induced
35. The magnitude of magnetic induction for a current carrying toroid of uniform cross-section is
a) Uniform over the whole cross-section b) Maximum on the outer edge
c) Maximum on the inner edge d) Maximum at the center of cross-section
SECTION - B
36. An air core solenoid has 1000 turns and is one 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒 long. Its cross-sectional area is 10 𝑐𝑚! . Its self
inductance is
a) 0.1256 𝑚𝐻 b) 12.56 𝑚𝐻
c) 1.256 𝑚𝐻 d) 125.6 𝑚𝐻
37. The horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field at a place is 3 × 10"/ 𝑇 and the dip is tan"+ •/‚. A
#
metal rod of length 0.25 𝑚 placed in the north-south position and is moved at a constant speed of 10 𝑐𝑚/𝑠
towards the east. The emf induced in the rod will be
a) Zero b) 1 𝜇𝑉
c) 5 𝜇𝑉 d) 10 𝜇𝑉
38. In a uniform magnetic field of induction𝐵, a wire in the form of semicircle of radius 𝑟 rotates about the
diameter of the circle with angular frequency 𝜔. If the total resistance of the circuit is 𝑅, the mean power
generated per period of rotation is
𝐵𝜋𝑟 ! 𝜔 (𝐵𝜋𝑟 ! 𝜔)!
a) b)
2𝑅 5 𝑅𝑡
(𝐵𝜋𝑟𝜔)! (𝐵𝜋𝑟𝜔! )!
c) d)
2𝑅 8𝑅

Page|5
39. A current passing through a coil of self inductance of 2mH changes at the rate of 20mAs"+ . The emf induced
in the coil is
a) 10 µV b) 40 µV
c) 10 mV d) 40 mV
40. A magnet is made to oscillate with a particular frequency, passing through a coil as shown in figure. The
time variation of the magnitude of e.m.f. generated across the coil during one cycle is
S
N

V
a) b)
e.m.f.

e.m.f.
t t

c) d)
e.m.f.

e.m.f.
t t

41. A circular coil of 500 turns of wire has an enclosed area of 0.1 𝑚! per turn. It kept perpendicular to a
magnetic field of induction 0.2 𝑇 and rotated by 180° about a diameter perpendicular to the field in
0.1 𝑠𝑒𝑐. How much charge will pass when the coil is connected to a galvanometer with a combined
resistance of 50 𝑜ℎ𝑚𝑠
a) 0.2 𝐶 b) 0.4 𝐶
c) 2 𝐶 d) 4 𝐶
42. A coil having an inductance of 0.5 𝐻 carries a current which is uniformly varying from zero to 10 ampere
in 2 second. The e.m.f. (in volts) generated in the coil is
a) 10 b) 5
c) 2.5 d) 1.25
43. A solenoid is placed inside another solenoid, the length of both being equal carrying same magnitude of
current. The parameters like radius and number of turns are in the ratio 1 : 2 for the two solenoids. The
mutual inductance on each other would be
a) 𝑀+! = 𝑀!+ b) 𝑀+! = 2𝑀!+
c) 2𝑀+! = 𝑀!+ d) 𝑀+! = 4𝑀!+
44. Turn ratio is 1.25. The step up transformer operates at 230 V and current through secondary is 2 A. Then
current in primary is
a) 25 A b) 100 A
c) 50 A d) 20 A
45. Two identical coaxial circular loops carry current 𝑖 each circulating in the clockwise direction. If the loops
are approaching each other, then
a) Current in each loop increases b) Current in each loop remains the same
c) Current in each loop decreases d) Current in one-loop increases and in the other it
decreases
46. In which of the following circuit is the current maximum just after the switch 𝑆 is closed
R R R

E E E
L R L R L

S S S

(i) (ii) (iii)

Page|6
 a) (i) b) (ii)
c) (iii) d) Both (ii) and (iii)
47. The magnetic field in a coil of 100 turns and 40 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑐𝑚 area is increased from 1 𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑙𝑎 to 6 𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑙𝑎 in
2 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑. The magnetic field is perpendicular to the coil. The e.m.f. generated in it is
a) 10/ 𝑉 b) 1.2 𝑉
c) 1.0 𝑉 d) 10"! 𝑉
48. A metallic ring is dropped down, keeping its plane perpendicular to a constant and horizontal magnetic
field. The ring enters the region of magnetic field at 𝑡 = 0 and completely emerges out at 𝑡 = 𝑇𝑠𝑒𝑐. The
current in the ring varies as
a) b)

c) d)

49. A small piece of metal wire is dragged across the gap between the poles of a magnet in 0.4 s. If change in
magnetic flux in the wire is 8 × 10"/ Wb, then emf induced in the wire is
a) 8 × 10"# V b) 6 × 10"# V
c) 4 × 10"# V d) 2 × 10"# V
50. The efficiency of transformer is very high because
a) There is no moving part in a transformer b) It produces very high voltage
c) It produces very low voltage d) None of the above

Page|7
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) d 2) d 3) a 4) c 29) c 30) a 31) a 32) a
5) c 6) c 7) d 8) a 33) a 34) c 35) a 36) c
9) b 10) d 11) d 12) a 37) d 38) b 39) d 40) a
13) b 14) a 15) b 16) c 41) b 42) c 43) a 44) c
17) b 18) c 19) c 20) b 45) c 46) b 47) c 48) b
21) d 22) a 23) b 24) b 49) d 50) a
25) b 26) c 27) a 28) b

Page|8
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (d) 𝜙 = 𝐵𝐴 = 10 𝑤𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟
During decay of current 9 (b)
#$ 𝐸 #$ 100 "!&&×!&() 1 𝑉 = 200𝑉; 𝑟 = 10Ω
𝑖 = 𝑖1 𝑒 " % = 𝑒 " % = 𝑒 !&&×!&() = 𝐴
𝑅 100 𝑒 𝑅; = 10 + 100Ω = 110Ω
2 (d) 𝑉 220
𝐼= ;= = 2𝐴
Whenever a magnet is moved either 𝑅 110
towards or away from a conducting coil, 𝑃 = 𝐼 ! 𝑅 = 4 × 100 = 400𝑊
the magnetic flux linked with the coil 10 (d)
changes and therefore, an emf is induced By Fleming’s right hand rule
in the coil. The magnitude of induced emf 11 (d)
𝑑ϕ Mutual inductance between two coil in the
𝑒 = −𝑁
𝑑𝑡 same plane with their centers coinciding is
𝑑(𝐵𝐴) given by
𝑒 = −𝑁
𝑑𝑡 𝜇1 2𝜋 ! 𝑅!! 𝑁+ 𝑁!
Time interval 𝑑𝑡, depends on the speed 𝑀= … † ℎ𝑒𝑛𝑟𝑦
4𝜋 𝑅+
with which the magnet is moved.
12 (a)
Therefore, the induced emf is independent
𝜙 = 𝐿𝑖 ⇒ 𝑁𝐵𝐴 = 𝐿𝑖
of the resistance of the coil.
Since magnetic field at the centre of
3 (a)
circular coil carrying current is given by
$ ". 2(3" "3! )4 567 8
𝐻= and 𝑉 = <& !=2>
& . 𝐵= .
/= -
1 × (1 − 2) × 0.01 × cos 0°
𝑉= = 10 𝑉 𝜇1 2𝜋𝑁𝑖 𝜇1 𝑁 ! 𝜋𝑟
10"# ∴ 𝑁. . . 𝜋𝑟 ! = 𝐿𝑖 ⇒ 𝐿 =
(+1)" ×+1() 4𝜋 𝑟 2
So, 𝐻 = 1.1+
= 10 𝐽 Hence self inductance of a coil
4 (c) 4𝜋 × 10"? × 500 × 500 × 𝜋 × 0.05
2000 =
2
𝑒 = 𝑁𝐵𝐴𝜔; 𝜔 = 2𝜋𝑓 = 2𝜋 ×
60 = 25 𝑚𝐻
2000 13 (b)
∴ 𝑒 = 50 × 0.05 × 80 × 10"/ × 2𝜋 ×
60 Induced emf is given by
4𝜋 𝑑ϕ
= 𝑒=−
3 𝑑𝑡
5 (c) If the radius of loop is 𝑟 at a time 𝑡, then
When frequency is high, the galvanometer the instantaneous magnetic flux is given
will not show deflection by
6 (c) ϕ = πr ! 𝐵
At 𝑡 = 0 inductor behaves as broken wire 𝑑
$ ∴ 𝑒 = − (𝜋𝑟 ! 𝐵)
then 𝑖 = & 𝑑𝑡
"
2𝑟 𝑑𝑟
𝑒 = −𝜋𝐵 ƒ „
𝑑𝑡
𝑑𝑟
𝑒 = −2𝜋 𝐵𝑟
𝑑𝑡
,-
Numerically, 𝑒 = 2𝜋𝐵𝑟 • ,. ‚
At 𝑡 = ∞ Inductor behaves as conducting
wire 14 (a)
𝑉 𝑉(𝑅+ + 𝑅! ) When a north pole of a bar magnet moves
𝑖= = towards the coil, the induced current in
𝑅! 𝑅! /(𝑅+ + 𝑅! ) 𝑅+ 𝑅!
8 (a) the coil flows in a direction such that the
coil presents its north pole to the bar
Page|9
 magnet as shown in figure (a). Therefore, According to Lenz’s law of electromagnetic
the induced current flows in the coil in the induction, the relative motion between the
anticlockwise direction. When a north pole coil and magnet produces change in
of a bar magnet moves away from the coil, magnetic flux.
the induced current in the coil flows in a 29 (c)
direction such that the coil presents its Since the rod is moving in transverse
such pole to the bar magnet as shown in magnetic field, so it will cut no flux passing
figure (b) through the field and hence no induced
emf is produced. So, no current will flow
through the rod.
30 (a)
ℎ = 𝐿 − 𝐿 cos θ
Therefore induced current flows in the coil
in the clockwise direction
15 (b)
Polarity of emf will be opposite in the two
cases while entering and while leaving the
coil. Only in option (b) polarity is
changing. ⇒ ℎ = 𝐿(1 − cos θ) ….(i)
!
16 (c) ∴ 𝑣 = 2gℎ − 2g 𝐿(1 − cos θ)
From Faraday’s law of electromagnetic θ
= 2g 𝐿 ƒ2 sin! „
induction 2
𝑑ϕ θ
𝑒=− = −𝐵𝐴𝑁 ⇒ 𝑣 = 2¬g𝐿 sin
𝑑𝑡 2
Given, 𝐵 = 0.1 T, 𝑁 = 20, 𝐴 = 𝜋𝑟 ! = Thus, maximum potential difference
𝜋(0.1)! 𝑉CDE = 𝐵𝑣𝐿
θ
∴ 𝑒 = −0.1 × 20 × π(0.1)! = 20π mV = 𝐵 × 2¬g𝐿 sin 𝐿
17 (b) 2
F
We know that for step down transformer = 2𝐵𝐿 sin (𝑔𝐿)+/!
!
$* >+ 32 (a)
𝑉@ > 𝑉A but $ = > ⇒ 𝑖A > 𝑖@
+ * G 4 ,3
Current in the inner coil 𝑖 = & = &! ,.
Current in the secondary coil is greater !

than the primary Length of the inner coil = 2𝜋𝑎

19 (c) So it’s resistance 𝑅+ = 50 × 10"# × 2𝜋(𝑎)
𝑒 = 𝐵𝑣𝑙 ⇒ 𝑒 ∝ 𝑣 ∝ 𝑔𝑡 𝜋𝑎!
∴ 𝑖+ = × 0.1 × 10"#
22 (a) 50 × 10"# × 2𝜋(𝑎)
𝐿+ 𝑁+ ! 𝑟+ = 10"/ 𝐴
!
∵ 𝐿 ∝ 𝑁 𝑟; = ƒ „ × According to lenz’s law direction of 𝑖+ is
𝐿! 𝑁! 𝑟!
𝐿 1 !
𝑟 1 clockwise
⇒ =ƒ „ ׃ „ = ; 𝐿! = 2𝐿 G
Induced current in outer coil 𝑖! = &" =
𝐿! 2 𝑟/2 2 "
23 (b) 4" ,3
&" ,.
Induced e.m.f. = 𝐵𝑙𝑣 = 0.3 × 10"/ × 10 ×
𝜋𝑏!
5 ⇒ 𝑖! = × 0.1 × 10"#
= 1.5 × 10"# 𝑉 = 1.5 𝑚𝑉 50 × 10"# × (2𝜋𝑏)
24 (b) = 2 × 10"/ 𝐴(𝐶𝑊)
,B 33 (a)
𝑒∝ ; if 𝜙 → maximum then 𝑒 →
,. Back emf ∝ speed of motor
minimum 34 (c)
25 (b)

P a g e | 10
 E.m.f. or current induces only when flux clockwise to repel the south pole. This
linked with the coil changes means the current is anticlockwise at the
36 (c) LHS a before. The break occurs when the
𝜇1 𝑁 ! 𝐴 pendulum is at the extreme and
𝐿=
𝑙 momentarily stationary
4𝜋 × 10"? × (1000)! × 10 × 10"/ 41 (b)
=
1 𝑁𝐵𝐴
Δ𝑄 = (cos 𝜃+ − cos 𝜃! )
= 1.256 𝑚𝐻 𝑅
37 (d) 500 × 0.2 × 0.1(cos 0 − cos 180)
=
Rod is moving towards east, so induced 50
emf across it’s end will be 𝑒 = 𝐵$ 𝑣𝑙 = = 0.4 𝐶
(𝐵H tan 𝜙)𝑣𝑙 42 (c)
4 𝑑𝑖 10
∴ 𝑒 = 3 × 10"/ × × (10 × 10"! ) × 0.25 |𝑒| = 𝐿 ´ ´ = 0.5 × = 2.5𝑉
3 𝑑𝑡 2
= 10"* 𝑉 = 10𝜇𝑉 43 (a)
38 (b) 𝑀 = 𝐾¬𝐿+ 𝐿!
The flux associated with coil of area 𝐴 and For perfect coupling 𝐾 = 1
magnetic induction 𝐵 is 𝑀+! = 𝑀!+
ϕ = 𝐵𝐴 cos θ 44 (c)
1 1 Given;
2,
=
+
, 𝑉P = 230V, 𝐼A = 2 A
= 𝐵𝜋𝑟 ! cos 𝜔𝑡 -∵ 𝐴 = 𝜋𝑟 ! ® 2- !*
2 2
𝑑ϕ For an ideal transformer
∴ 𝑒IJKL5MK = − 𝑁P 𝑉P 𝐼Q 𝑁P 𝐼Q
𝑑𝑡 = = or =
𝑑 1 𝑁Q 𝑉Q 𝐼P 𝑁Q 𝐼P
= − ƒ 𝐵𝜋𝑟 ! cos 𝜔𝑡„ 2 !*
𝑑𝑡 2 Or 𝐼P = 𝐼Q × 2, = 2A × = 50A
+
1 -
= 𝐵𝜋𝑟 ! 𝜔 sin 𝜔𝑡 45 (c)
2
𝑒! According to Lenz’s Law
∴ power 𝑝 = IJKL5MK 46 (b)
𝑅
𝐵! 𝜋 ! 𝑟 / 𝜔! sin! 𝜔𝑡 At 𝑡 = 0 current through 𝐿 is zero so it acts
= as open circuit. The given figures can be
4𝑅
Hence,𝑃NMOJ =< 𝑝 > redrawn as follow
R
𝐵 ! 𝜋 ! 𝑟 / 𝜔! 1 R R
= . ƒ∵< sin 𝜔𝑡 >
4𝑅 2 E E E
1 R R
= „
2 S
S S
(𝐵𝜋𝑟 ! 𝜔)!
= (i) (ii) (iii)
8𝑅
39 (d) 𝐸 𝐸
By Faraday’s second law, induced emf 𝑖+ = 0 𝑖! = 𝑖# =
𝑅 2𝑅
𝑁𝑑ϕ 𝑑𝐼 Hence 𝑖! > 𝑖# > 𝑖+
𝑒=− which gives 𝑒 = −𝐿
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 47 (c)
∴ |𝑒|=2 × 10"# × 20 × 10"# V = 40µV Δ𝐵
𝑒 = −𝑁 ƒ „ . 𝐴 cos 𝜃
40 (a) Δ𝑡
As the north pole approaches, a north pole (6 − 1)
= −100 ×
is developed at the face, 𝑖. 𝑒., the current 2
flows anticlockwise. Finally when it × (40 × 10"/ ) cos 0
completes the oscillation, no emf is ⇒ |𝑒| = 1 𝑉
present. Now south pole approaches the 48 (b)
other side, 𝑖. 𝑒., RHS, the current flows

P a g e | 11
 When ring enters and leaves the field 𝑑ϕ
|𝑒| =
polarity of induced emf is opposite. Also 𝑑𝑡
during the stay of ring completely in the 8 × 10"/
= = 2 × 10"# V
field there is no induction 0.4
49 (d)

P a g e | 12
 Alternating Current
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. Choke coil works on the principle of

a) Transient current b) Self induction
c) Mutual induction d) Wattless current
2. The impedance of a R-C circuit is 𝑍! for frequency f and 𝑍" for frequency 2f. Then,
#!
#"
is
a) Between 1 and 2 b) 2
! 1
c) Between " and 1 d)
2
3. The voltage of domestic ac is 220 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡. What does the represent
a) Mean voltage b) Peak voltage
c) Root mean voltage d) Root mean square voltage
4. The resistance of a coil for dc is in ohms. In ac, the resistance
a) Will remain same b) Will increase
c) Will decrease d) Will be zero
5. The phase difference between the current and voltage of 𝐿𝐶𝑅 circuit in series combination at resonance is
a) 0 b) 𝜋/2
c) 𝜋 d) −𝜋
6. What is the 𝑟. 𝑚. 𝑠. value of an alternating current which when passed through a resistor produces heat
which is thrice of that produced by a direct current of 2 amperes in the same resistor
a) 6 𝑎𝑚𝑝 b) 2 𝑎𝑚𝑝
c) 3.46 𝑎𝑚𝑝 d) 0.66 𝑎𝑚𝑝
7. In an AC circuit the emf(e) and the current (i) at any instant are given respectively by
𝑒 = 𝐸$ sin 𝜔𝑡
𝑖 = 𝐼$ sin(𝜔𝑡 − ϕ)
The average power in the circuit over one cycle of AC is
𝐸 𝐼 𝐸 𝐼
a) $ $ b) $ $ sin 𝜙
2 2
𝐸$ 𝐼$
c) cos 𝜙 d) 𝐸$ 𝐼$
2
8. In an AC series circuit, the instantaneous current is maximum when the instantaneous voltage is
maximum. The circuit element connected to the source will be
a) Pure inductor b) Pure capacitor
c) Pure resistor d) Combination of capacitor and an inductor
9. If a current of 3 A flowing in the primary coil is reduced to zero in 0.001 s, the induced emf in between the
two coils is 15000 V, the coefficient of mutual induction is
a) 0.5 H b) 5 H
c) 1.5 H d) 10 H
10. The 𝑟. 𝑚. 𝑠. voltage of the wave form shown is
 Y
+ 10

0 t

– 10

a) 10 𝑉 b) 7 𝑉
c) 6.37 𝑉 d) None of these
11. In the non-resonant circuit, what will be the nature of the circuit for frequencies higher than the resonant
frequency
a) Resistive b) Capacitive
c) Inductive d) None of the above
12. An AC voltage source of variable angular frequency 𝜔 and fixed amplitude 𝑉$ is connected in series with a
capacitance C and an electric bulb of resistance R (inductance zero). When 𝜔 is increased
a) The bulb glows dimmer b) The bulb glows brighter
c) Total impedance of the circuit is unchanged d) Total impedance of the circuit increases
%
13. If a current 𝐼 given by 𝐼$ sin n𝜔𝑡 − o flows in an ac circuit across, which an ac potential of 𝐸 = 𝐸$ sin 𝜔𝑡
"
has been applied, then the power consumption 𝑃 in the circuit will be
𝐸$ 𝐼$
a) 𝑃 = b) 𝑃 = √2𝐸$ 𝐼$
√2
𝐸 𝐼
c) 𝑃 = $ $ d) 𝑃 = 0
2
14. An inductor 𝐿 and a capacitor 𝐶 are connected in the circuit as shown in the figure. The frequency of the
power supply is equal to the resonant frequency of the circuit. Which ammeter will read zero ampere
L
A1
C
A2

A3
E = E0 sinwt
a) 𝐴! b) 𝐴"
c) 𝐴& d) None of these
15. An inductor of 2 H and a resistance of 10 Ω are connected in series with a battery of 5 V. the initial rate of
change of current is
a) 0.5 As'! b) 2.0 As'!
c) 2.5 As'! d) 0.25 As'!
16. '"
In a region of uniform magnetic induction 𝐵 = 10 𝑡𝑒𝑠𝑙𝑎, a circular coil of radius 30 𝑐𝑚 and resistance
𝜋 " 𝑜ℎ𝑚 is rotated about an axis which is perpendicular to the direction of 𝐵 and which forms a diameter of
the coil. If the rotates at 200 𝑟𝑝𝑚 the amplitude of the alternating current induced in the coil is
a) 4𝜋 " 𝑚𝐴 b) 30 𝑚𝐴
c) 6 𝑚𝐴 d) 200 𝑚𝐴
17. An alternating current source of frequency 100 𝐻𝑧 is joined to a combination of a resistance, a capacitance
and a coil in series. The potential difference across the coil, the resistance and the capacitor is 46, 8 and
40 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 respectively. The electromotive force of alternating current source in 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 is
a) 94 b) 14
c) 10 d) 76
18. A circuit consists of an inductance of 0.5 mH and a capacitor of 20𝜇F. The frequency of the L – C
oscillations is approximately
a) 400 Hz b) 88 Hz
c) 1600 Hz d) 2400 Hz

Page|2
19. A resistance 𝑅, inductance 𝐿 and capacitor 𝐶 are connected in series to an oscillator of frequency 𝑓. If
resonant frequency is 𝑓, then current will lag the voltage when
a) 𝑓 = 0 b) 𝑓 < 𝑓(
c) 𝑓 = 𝑓( d) 𝑓 > 𝑓(
20. The maximum value of AC voltage in a circuit is 707 V. Its rms value is
a) 70.7 V b) 100 V
c) 500 V d) 707 V
21. Voltage and current in an ac circuit are given by
% %
𝑉 = 5 sin n100𝜋𝑡 − ) o and 𝐼 = 4 sin n100 𝜋𝑡 + ) o
a) Voltage leads the current by 30° b) Current leads the voltage by 30°
c) Current leads the voltage by 60° d) Voltage leads the current by 60°
22. An alternating 𝑒.m.f. is applied to purely capacitive circuit. The phase relation between 𝑒.m.f. and current
flowing in the circuit is or
In a circuit containing capacitance only
a) 𝑒.m.f. is ahead of current by 𝜋/2 b) Current is ahead of 𝑒.m.f. by 𝜋/2
c) Current lags behind 𝑒.m.f. by 𝜋 d) Current is ahead of 𝑒.m.f. by 𝜋
23. In an 𝐿 − 𝑅 circuit shown in above figure switch S is closed at time 𝑡 = 0. If 𝑒 denotes the induced emf
across inductor and 𝑖, the current in the circuit at any time 𝑡, then which of the following graphs, figure
shows the variation of 𝑒 with 𝑖?
a) b)

c) d)

24. Which of the following statement is incorrect?

a) In a L – C – R series AC circuit, as the frequency If the net reactance of an L – C – R series AC circuit is
of the source increases, the impedance of the b) same as its resistance, then the current lags behind
circuit first decreases and then increases the voltage by 45°
c) At resonance, the impedance of an AC circuit d) Below resonance, voltage leads the current while
becomes purely resistive. above it, current leads the voltage
25. In a L – R circuit of 3 mH inductance and 4 Ω resistance, emf 𝐸 = 4 cos 1000𝑡 V is applied. The amplitude
of emf is
a) 0.8 A 4
b) A
7
c) 1.0 A 4
d) A
√7
26. A conducting wire frame is placed in a magnetic field, which is directed into the paper, figure. The
magnetic field is increasing at a constant rate. The directions of induced current in wires 𝐴𝐵 and 𝐶𝐷 are

a) 𝐴 to B and 𝐶 to 𝐷 b) 𝐵 to 𝐴 and 𝐶 to 𝐷
c) 𝐴 to 𝐵 and 𝐷 to 𝐶 d) 𝐵 to 𝐴 and 𝐷 to 𝐶

Page|3
27. If the total charge stored in the 𝐿𝐶 circuit is 𝑄$ , then for 𝑡 ≥ 0
%
The charge on the capacitor is 𝑄 = 𝑄$ cos n " + % *
a) *
b) The charge on the capacitor is 𝑄 = 𝑄$ cos n " − √,- o
o
√,-
."/ ! ."/
c) The charge on the capacitor is 𝑄 = −𝐿𝐶 " d) The charge on the capacitor is 𝑄 =
.* √,- .* "
28. An inductor of inductance 𝐿 = 400 mH and resistors of resistances 𝑅! = 4Ω and 𝑅" = 2Ω are connected to
battery of emf 12 V as shown in the figure. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. The switch S
is closed at t = 0. The potential drop across L as a function of time is

12 '&*
a) 6𝑒 '0* V b) 𝑒 V
𝑡
c) 6(1 − 𝑒 '*/$." ) V d) 12 𝑒 '0* V
29. At high frequency, the capacitor offer
a) More reactance b) Less reactance
c) Zero reactance d) Infinite reactance
30. For a series L-C-R circuit at resonance, the statement which is not true is
a) Peak energy stored by a capacitor = peak b) Average power = apparent power
energy stored by an inductor
c) Wattles current is zero d) Power factor is zero
31. What is the approximate peak value of an alternating current producing four times the heat produced per
second by a steady current of 2.0 𝐴 in a resistor
a) 2.8 𝐴 b) 4.0 𝐴
c) 5.6 𝐴 d) 8.0 𝐴
32. Two coils are at fixed locations. When coil 1 has no current and the current in the coil 2 increases at the
rate 15.0 As'! , the emf in coil 1 is 25.0 mV. When coil 2 has no current of 3.6 A. The flux linkage in coil 2
a) 4 mWb b) 6 mWb
c) 10 mWb d) 16 mWb
33. An L – C – R circuit of 𝑅 = 100 Ω is connected to an AC source 100 V, 50 Hz. The magnitude of phase
difference between current and voltage is 30°. The power dissipated in the L – C – R circuit is
a) 50 W b) 86.6 W
c) 100 W d) 200 W
34. The current passing through a choke coil of 5 H is decreasing at the rate of 2 As'! . The emf developed across
the coil is
a) −10 V b) + 10 V
c) 2.5 V d) −2.5 V
35. The voltage across a pure inductor is represented by the following diagram. Which of the following
diagrams will represent the current
V

a) i b) i

t t

Page|4
 c) i d) i

t t

36. A resistor of 𝑅 = 6Ω, an inductor of L = 1 H and a capacitor of 𝐶 = 17.36 µF are connected in series with
an AC source. Find the Q - factor.
a) 3.72 b) 40
c) 2.37 d) 80
37. An ideal choke draws a current of 8 A when connected to an AC supply of 100 V, 50 Hz. A pure resistor
draws a current of 10 A when connected to the same source. The ideal choke and the resister are
connected in series and then connected to the AC source of 150 V, 40 Hz. The current in the circuit
becomes
15 b) 8 A
a) A
√2
c) 18 A d) 10 A
38. A step-up transformer is used on a 120 V line to provide a potential difference of 2400 V. If the primary
coil has 75 turns, the number of turns in the secondary coil is
a) 150 b) 1200
c) 1500 d) 1575
39. For a series L – C – R circuit, the phase difference between current and voltage at the condition of
resonance will be
𝜋 𝜋
a) b)
2 4
c) Zero d) Nothing can be said
40. In the inductive circuit given in the figure, the current rises after the switch is closed. At instant when the
current is 15 𝑚𝐴, then potential difference across the inductor will be

a) Zero b) 240𝑉
c) 180𝑉 d) 60𝑉
41. In an 𝐿𝐶𝑅 circuit 𝑅 = 100 𝑜ℎ𝑚. When capacitance 𝐶 is removed, the current lags behind the voltage by
𝜋/3. When inductance 𝐿 is removed, the current leads the voltage by 𝜋/3. The impedance of the circuit is
a) 50 𝑜ℎ𝑚 b) 100 𝑜ℎ𝑚
c) 200 𝑜ℎ𝑚 d) 400 𝑜ℎ𝑚
42. A circuit area is 0.01 m" is kept inside a magnetic field which is normal to its plane. The magnetic field
changes from 2 T to 1 T in 1 millisecond. If the resistance of the circuit is 2Ω. The amount of heat evolved is
a) 0.05 J b) 50 J
c) 0.50 J d) 500 J
43. The instantaneous values of current and voltage in an ac circuit are 𝑖 = 100 sin 314 𝑡 𝑎𝑚𝑝 and 𝑒 =
200 𝑖𝑛 (314 𝑡 + 𝜋/3)𝑉 respectively. If the resistance is 1Ω, then the reactance of the circuit will be
a) −200√3 Ω b) √3 Ω
c) −200√3 Ω d) 100√3 Ω
44. A choke is preferred to a resistance for limiting current in AC circuit because
a) Choke is cheap b) There is no wastage of power
c) Choke is compact in size d) Choke is a good absorber of heat
45. A magnet is suspended lengthwise from a spring and while it oscillates, the magnet moves in and out of the
coil C connected to a galvanometer G. Then as the magnet oscillates.

Page|5
 a) G shows no deflection b) G shows deflection on one side
c) Deflection of G to the left and right has constant d) Deflection of G to the left and right has decreasing
amplitude amplitude
46. In a series L – C – R circuit, resistance 𝑅 = 10 Ω and the impedance 𝑍 = 10 Ω. The phase difference
between the current and the voltage is
a) 0° b) 30°
c) 45° d) 60°
47. Reactance of a capacitor of capacitance 𝐶𝜇𝐹 for ac frequency 3$$ 𝐻𝑧 is 25Ω. The value 𝐶 is
%
a) 50𝜇𝐹 b) 25𝜇𝐹
c) 100𝜇𝐹 d) 75𝜇𝐹
48. If instantaneous current is given by 𝑖 = 4 cos(𝜔𝑡 + 𝜙) 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑠, then the 𝑟. 𝑚. 𝑠 value of current is
a) 4 amperes b) 2√2 amperes
c) 4√2 amperes d) Zero amperes
49. The natural frequency of a 𝐿 − 𝐶 circuit is equal to
1 1
a) √𝐿𝐶 b)
2𝜋 2𝜋√𝐿𝐶
1 𝐿 1 𝐶
c) ‘ d) ‘
2𝜋 𝐶 2𝜋 𝐿
50. An 𝐿𝐶𝑅 series ac circuit is at resonance with 10 𝑉 each across 𝐿, 𝐶 and 𝑅. If the resistance is halved, the
respective voltage across 𝐿, 𝐶 and 𝑅 are
a) 10 V, 10 V and 5 V b) 10 V, 10 V and 10 V
c) 20 V, 20 V and 5 V d) 20 V, 20 V and 10 V

Page|6
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) b 2) b 3) d 4) b 29) b 30) d 31) c 32) b
5) a 6) c 7) c 8) c 33) b 34) b 35) d 36) b
9) b 10) a 11) b 12) b 37) a 38) c 39) c 40) c
13) d 14) c 15) c 16) c 41) b 42) a 43) b 44) d
17) c 18) c 19) d 20) c 45) d 46) a 47) a 48) b
21) c 22) b 23) c 24) d 49) b 50) d
25) a 26) d 27) c 28) d

Page|7
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
2 (b) 9 (b)
The impedance of R – C circuit for frequency As 𝑒 = 𝑀𝑑𝐼/𝑑𝑡,
𝑓! is E.* !0$$$×$.$$!
∴ 𝑀= =− = 5H
.@ &
!
𝑍! = ’𝑅" + 3%" 4" - " 10 (a)

The impedance of R – C circuit for frequency 1 >

𝑉(9: = ‘ • 10" 𝑑𝑡 = 10 𝑉
2𝑓 is 𝑇 $

𝑍" = ’𝑅" + 3%" ("4" )- "

! 11 (b)
In non resonant circuits
! !
or 𝑍" = ’𝑅" + !)%" 4" - " Impedance 𝑍 = "
, with rise in
G !" 8HI-' ! J
! ( *+
#!" 7"8
#$" %" &" frequency 𝑍 decreases, 𝑖. 𝑒., current increases
Then, #""
= !
7"8
!'$" %" &" so circuit behaves as capacitive circuit
!
#!" !8 " " " "
#$ % & ( 12 (b)
Or = !
#"" !8
!'$" %" (" &"
𝑉(9:
𝑍 = ’𝑅" + 𝑋-" ∶ 𝐼(9: = "
: 𝑃 = 𝐼(9: 𝑅
Values are greater than 1 then #! = lies
# 𝑍
!
"
Where 𝑋- =
between 1 and 2. I-

4 (b) As 𝜔 is increased, 𝑋- will decrease or 𝑍 will

The coil has inductance 𝐿 besides the decrease. Hence 𝐼(9: 𝑜𝑟 𝑃 will increase.
resistance 𝑅. Hence for ac it’s effective Therefore, bulb glows brighter.
Hence the correct option is (b).
resistance •𝑅" + 𝑋," will be larger than it’s
13 (d)
resistance 𝑅 for dc
Phase angle 𝜙 = 90°, so power 𝑃 = 𝑉𝑖 cos 𝜙 =
5 (a)
0
At resonance 𝐿𝐶𝑅 series circuit behaves as
15 (c)
pure resistive circuit. For resistive circuit 𝜙 = (,
0° 𝑖 = 𝑖$ 1 − 𝑒 ' + ¡
6 (c) 𝑑𝑖 𝑑 𝑑 (, 𝑖$ 𝑅 '(,
Heat produced by ac = 3 × Heat produced by ⇒ = 𝑖$ − 𝑖$ 𝑒 ' + ¡ = 0 + 𝑒 +
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝐿
dc Initially, t = 0
"
∴ 𝑖(9: 𝑅𝑡 = 3 × 𝑖 " 𝑅𝑡 ⇒ 𝑖(9:
"
= 3 × 2" 𝑑𝑖 𝑖$ × 𝑅 𝐸 5
⇒ = = = = 2.5 A𝑠 '!
⇒ 𝑖(9: = 2√3 = 3.46 𝐴 𝑑𝑡 𝐿 𝐿 2
7 (c) 16 (c)
L) IMNO
Power = Rate of work done in one complete Amplitude of 𝑎𝑐 = 𝑖$ = 7
= 7
=
cycle. ("%<)MN(%( " )
= 7
or 𝑃;< = "$$
> 2𝜋 × )$
× 1 × 10'" × 𝜋 × (0.3)"
(?) @) ABC D)>/"
or 𝑃;< = ⇒ 𝑖$ =
> 𝜋"
?) @) ABC D = 6 𝑚𝐴
or 𝑃;< = "
17 (c)
Where cos 𝜙 is called the power factor of an AC
𝑉, = 46 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠, 𝑉- = 40 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠, 𝑉7 = 8 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
circuit.
8 (c) E.M.F. of source 𝑉 = •8" + (46 − 40)" =
The circuit element connected to the AC source 10 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
will be pure resistor. In pure resistive AC 18 (c)
!
circuit, voltage and current are in the same 𝑓 = "%√,-
phase

Page|8
 1 field directed out of the paper. Thus current in
∴ 𝑓=
2 × 3.14√0.5 × 10'&
× 20 × 10') both the loops must be anti-clock-wise.
1
= ≈ 1600 Hz
2 × 3.14 × 10'3
19 (d)
!
Current lags the voltage if 𝜔𝐿 > I-
1 As area of loop on right side is more,
𝑓> ⇒ 𝑓 > 𝑓(
2𝜋√𝐿𝐶 therefore, induced emf o right side of loop will
20 (c) be more compared to the emf induced on the
𝑉$ 770√2 left-side of the loop
𝑉(9: = = ≈ 500 V .D .N
√2 2 ¦∴ 𝑒 = − .* = −𝐴 .* §
21 (c) 28 (d)
% '%
Phase difference ∆𝜙 = 𝜙" − 𝜙! = ) − n ) o = 𝐹 12
𝑙! = = =6𝐴
% 𝑅! 2
& .R"
22 (b) 𝐸=𝐿 + 𝑅" × 𝑙"
.*
For purely capacitive circuit 𝑒 = 𝑒$ sin 𝜔𝑡 𝐼" = 𝐼$ (1 − 𝑒 '*/*/ )
% 𝐸 12
𝑖 = 𝑖$ sin n𝜔𝑡 + " o , 𝑖. 𝑒., current is ahead of emf ⇒ 𝐼$ = = = 6A
% 𝑅" 2
by 𝐿 400 × 10'&
"
23 (c) 𝑡S = = = 0.2
𝑅 2
In 𝐿 − 𝑅 circuit, current at any time 𝑡 is given 𝐼" = 6(1 − 𝑒 '*/$." )
by Potential drop across
𝐸 ( 𝐸 𝐸 ( 𝐿 = 𝐸 − 𝑅" 𝐿" = 12 − 2 × 6¨1 − 𝑒 'T* ©
𝑖= 1 − 𝑒 '+* ¡ = − 𝑒 '+*
𝑅 𝑅 𝑅 = 12𝑒 '0*
𝑑𝑖 𝐸 ' (* 𝑅 𝐸 (
= 𝑒 + ¡ = 𝑒 '+* 29 (b)
𝑑𝑡 𝑅 𝐿 𝐿
.P ( Capacitive reactance is given by
Induced emf = 𝐿 .* = 𝐸𝑒 ' + * 𝑋- = I -
!
(
From Eq. (i), 𝑖𝑅 = 𝐸 − 𝐸𝑒 ' + * Where C is capacitance and 𝜔 the angular
Using Eq. (ii), 𝑖𝑅 = 𝐸 − 𝑒 𝑜𝑟 𝑒 = 𝐸 − 𝑖𝑅 frequency (𝜔 = 2𝜋𝑓).
Therefore, graph between 𝑒 and 𝑖 is a straight 1
∴ 𝑋- =
line with negative slope and positive intercept. 2𝜋𝑓𝐶
!
The choice (c) is correct. ⇒ 𝑋- ∝ 4
24 (d)
Hence, when frequency 𝑓 increases capacitive
When resonance occurs emf E and current i
reactance decreases.
are in phase. In this case, the impedance is
30 (d)
minimum and current is maximum. At
For a series L – C – R
resonance inductive reactance is equal to
circuit at resonance
capacitive reactance
Phase difference, 𝜙 = 0°
𝑋, = 𝑋-
Power factor= cos 𝜙 = 1
25 (a)
?)
32 (b)
The current is 𝐼 = .P
√7 " 8I " ," As 𝑒 = 𝑀 .*
3
= = 0.8 A E "0×!$-.
Q3 " 8(!$$$×&×!$-. )" ∴ 𝑀 = .P/.* = !0.$
= 1.67 × 10'& H
26 (d)
As 𝜙 = 𝑀𝑖
As the magnetic field directed into the paper is
∴ 𝜙 = 1.67 × 10'& × 3.6 = 6 × 10'& Wb
increasing at a constant rate, therefore,
= 6 m Wb
induced current should produce a magnetic
33 (b)
Page|9
 Average power dissipated in an AC circuit 40 (c)
𝑃;< = 𝑉UVC 𝐼UVC cos 𝜙 Here: Current in the circuit
…(i) (𝑖) = 15 𝑚𝐴 = 15 × 10'& 𝐴
Where the term cos 𝜙 is known as power Resistance 𝑅 = 4000 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡
factor. Applied voltage in the circuit = 240 𝑉
Given, 𝑉UVC = 100 V, 𝑅 = 100 Ω, ϕ = 30° At any instant, the 𝑒𝑚𝑓 of the battery is equal
L012 !$$
∴ 𝐼UVC = = !$$ = 1 A to the sum of potential drop on the resistor
7
and the 𝑒𝑚𝑓 developed in the induction coil
Putting the values in Eq. (i), we get
.P
𝑃;< = 100 × 1 × cos 30° Hence, 𝐸 = 𝑖𝑅 + 𝐿 .*
= 100
√& 𝑑𝑖
" 240 = 15 × 10'& × 4000 + 𝐿
𝑑𝑡
= 50√3 = 86.6 W .P
Hence, 𝐿 .* = 240 − 60 = 180 𝑉
34 (b)
𝑒 = −𝐿𝑑𝐼/𝑑𝑡 = −5 × (−2) = +10 V 41 (b)
35 (d) When 𝐶 is removed circuit becomes 𝑅𝐿 circuit
In purely inductive circuit voltage leads the hence
𝜋 𝑋,
current by 90° tan = … (i)
3 𝑅
36 (b)
When 𝐿 is removed circuit becomes 𝑅𝐶 circuit
! , ! !
Q – factor = 7 ’- = ) ’!W.&)×!$-' = 40 hence
𝜋 𝑋-
37 (a) tan = … (ii)
!$$
3 𝑅
Resistance , 𝑅 = !$
= 10 Ω From equation (i) and (ii) we obtain 𝑋, = 𝑋- .
Inductive reactance , 𝑋, = 2𝜋𝑓𝐿 This is the condition of resonance and in
100 resonance 𝑍 = 𝑅 = 100Ω
= 2𝜋 × 50 × 𝐿
8 42 (a)
1 Induced emf produced in coil
⇒ 𝐿= H
8𝜋 𝑒=
'.D
= (𝐵𝐴)
'.
!
𝑋,X = 2𝜋𝑓 X 𝐿 = 2𝜋 × 40 × = 10 Ω .*
.*
Y% 𝑑𝐵 1
∴ |𝑒| = 𝐴 = 0.01 ×
Impedance of the circuit is 𝑍 = ’𝑅" + 𝑋,X
" 𝑑𝑡 1 × 10'&
|𝑒| = 10 V
= •(10)" + (10)" Current produced in coil,
|E| !$
= 10√2 Ω 𝑖= = =5A
7 "
L !0$ !0
Current in the circuit is 𝑖 = # = !$√" = A Heat evolved = 𝑖 " 𝑅𝑡
√"
38 (c) = (5)" × (2) × 1 × 10'& = 0.05 J
𝑛: 𝐸: 2400 43 (b)
= = = 20
𝑛Z 𝐸Z 120 𝑉$ = 𝑖$ 𝑍 ⇒ 200 = 100 𝑍 ⇒ 𝑍 = 2Ω
𝑛: = 20 𝑛Z = 20 × 75 = 1500. Also 𝑍 " = 𝑅" + 𝑋," ⇒ (2)" = (1)" + 𝑋," ⇒
39 (c) 𝑋, = √3Ω
In a series L – C – R circuit, potential difference 44 (d)
leads the current by an angle ϕ(let). In an AC circuit, the coil of high inductance and
[+ '[&
ϕ = tan'! n o negligible resistance used to control current, is
7
I+ '
! called the choke coil. The power factor of such
or ϕ = tan'! ¬ *&
7
- a coil is given by
7
! Cos 𝜙 =
At resonance, 𝑋, = 𝑋- , 𝑖𝑒, 𝜔𝐿 = √7 " 8I " ,"
I- 7
Hence, ϕ = tan'! (0) = 0 ≈ I, (as 𝑅 << 𝜔𝐿)
Therefore, phase difference between current As 𝑅 << 𝜔𝐿, cos 𝜙 is very small. Thus, the
and voltage at resonance is zero. power absorbed by the coil is very small. The
P a g e | 10
 only loss of energy is due to hysteresis in the ⇒ 100 = 100 + (𝑋, − 𝑋- )"
iron core, which is much less than the loss of ⇒ 𝑋, − 𝑋- = 0
energy in the resistance that can also reduce …(i)
the current if placed instead of the choke coil. Let 𝜙 is the phase difference between current
45 (d) and voltage
As a given pole (𝑁 or 𝑆) of suspended magnet [+ '[&
tan 𝜙 =
7
goes into the coil and comes out of its, current 0
is induced in the coil in two opposite ∴ tan 𝜙 =
𝑅
directions. Therefore, galvanometer deflection ⇒ 𝜙=0 [From Eq.(i)]
goes to left and right both. As amplitude of 47 (a)
oscillation of magnet goes on decreasing, so 1 1 1
does the amplitude of deflection. 𝑋- = ⇒𝐶= =
2𝜋𝑣𝐶 2𝜋𝑣𝑋- 2 × 𝜋 × 3$$ × 25
%
46 (a)
= 50 𝜇𝐹
Impedance,
48 (b)
𝑍 = •𝑅" + (𝑋, − 𝑋- )" 𝑖$ 4
∴ 10 = •(10" + (𝑋, − 𝑋- )" 𝑖(.9.:. = = = 2√2 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒
√2 √2

P a g e | 11
 Electromagnetic Waves
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. In an electromagnetic wave, the electric and magnetizing fields are 100 Vm!" and 0.265 Am!" . The
maximum energy flow is
a) 26.5 Wm!# b) 36.5 Wm!#
c) 46.7 Wm!# d) 765 Wm!#
2. An electromagnetic radiation has an energy of 13.2 keV. Then the radiation belongs to the region of
a) Visible light b) Ultraviolet
c) Infrared d) X-ray
3. A cube of edge a has its edges parallel to 𝑥, 𝑦 and 𝑧-axis of rectangular coordinate system. A uniform
R⃗ is parallel to 𝑦-axis and a uniform magnetic field is RE⃗ parallel to 𝑥-axis. The rate at which
electric field E
flows through each face of the cube is
$ ! .&' $ ! &'
a) #("
parallel to 𝑥 − 𝑦 plane and zero in others b) ("
parallel to 𝑥 − 𝑦 plane and zero in others
$ ! &' $ ! &'
c) #("
from all faces d) #("
parallel; to 𝑦 − 𝓏 faces and zero in others
4. The relation between electric field vector E, the displacement vector D and the polarization vector P for a
dielectric placed in electric field E is given by
a) 𝐏 = ε) 𝐄 + 𝐃 b) 𝐏 = 𝐃 + 𝐄
c) 𝐃 = ε) 𝐄 + 𝐏 d) 𝐄 = 𝐃 + 𝐏
5. Maxwell in his famous equation of electromagnetism introduced the concept of
a) AC current b) DC current
c) Displacement current d) Impedance
6. Which of the following is absorbed by the ozone layer?
a) Only gamma rays b) Visible light
c) Radio Waves d) Ultraviolet rays
7. The frequency 1057 MHz of radiation arising from two close energy levels in hydrogen belongs to
a) Radio waves b) Infrared waves
c) Micro waves d) 𝛾 − rays
8. A radiowave has a maximum magnetic field induction of 10!* T on arrival at a receiving antenna. The
maximum electric field intensity of such a wave is
a) Zero b) 3 × 10* Vm!"
c) 5.8 × 10!* T d) 3.0 × 10!+ T
9. A lasser beam is sent to the moon and reflected back to earth by ay mirror placed on the moon by an
astronaut. If the moon is 384000 km from earth, how long does it take the light to make the round trip?
a) 5 min b) 2.5 min
c) 2.5 s d) 500 s
10. The magnetic field of an Electromagnetic Wave is given by
𝐵, = 3 × 10!- sin (10. 𝑥 + 6.29 × 10"# 𝑡).
The wavelength of the Electromagnetic Wave is
 a) 6.28 cm b) 3.14 cm
c) 0.63 cm d) 0.32 cm
11. An earth orbiting satellite has solar energy collecting panel with total area 5 m# . If solar radiations are
perpendicular and completely absorbed, the average force associated with the radiation pressure is
(Solar constant= 1.4 kWm!# )
a) 2.33 × 10!. N b) 2.33 × 10!* N
c) 2.33 × 10!+ N d) 2.33 × 10!/ N
12. The waves which have revolutionized telecommunication in more recent time, are
a) Micro wave b) Radio waves
c) Light waves d) TV waves
13. The electric field for a plane electromagnetic wave travelling in the positive 𝓏-direction is represented by
which one of the following?
a) 𝐤q " 𝐸) 𝑒 0 (𝑘𝓏 − 𝜔𝑡 + ϕ) b) ŵ" 𝐸) 𝑒 0 (𝑘𝑥 − 𝜔𝑡 + ϕ)
c) ŵ" 𝐸) 𝑒 0 (𝑘𝓏 + 𝜔𝑡 + ϕ) q " 𝐸) 𝑒 0 (𝑘𝓏 + 𝜔𝑡 + ϕ)
d) 𝐤
14. If the earth did not have atmosphere, its surface temperature on a day time would be
a) Higher b) Lower
c) Same as now d) Not sure
15. The correct sequence of the increasing wavelength of the given radiation sources is
a) Radioactive sources, X-ray tube, crystal b) Radioactive source, X-ray tube, sodium vapour lamp,
oscillator, sodium vapour lamp crystal oscillator
c) X-ray tube, radioactive source, crystal d) X-ray tube, crystal oscillator, radioactive source,
oscillator, sodium vapour lamp sodium vapour lamp
16. Which of the following electromagnetic waves have the longest wavelength?
a) Heat waves b) Light waves
c) Radio waves d) Ultraviolet waves
17. Which of the following rays is emitted by a human body?
a) X-rays b) UV rays
c) Visible rays d) IR rays
18. The unit of expression µ) ε) are
a) ms!" b) m# s!#
c) s# m!# d) sm!"
19. If 𝑐 is the speed of Electromagnetic Waves in vacuum, its speed in a medium of dielectric constant 𝐾 and
relative permeability µ, is
1
a) 𝑣 = b) 𝑣 = 𝑐 ~𝜇1# 𝐾
}µ1 , 𝐾
𝑐 𝐾
c) 𝑣 = d) 𝑣 =
}µ1 , 𝐾 √𝜇1 , 𝑐
20. A charged particle with charge 𝑞 enters a region of constant, uniform and mutually orthogonal fields E and
B with a velocity v perpendicular to both E and B, and comes out without any change in magnitude or
direction of v. Then
a) 𝐯 = 𝐄 × 𝐁/B# b) 𝐯 = 𝐁 × 𝐄/B#
c) 𝐯 = 𝐄 × 𝐁/E # d) 𝐯 = 𝐁 × 𝐄/E#
21. The energy of X-ray photon is 2200 eV. Its frequency would be
a) 5.3 × 10"/ Hz b) 5.3 × 10"- Hz
c) 5 × 10"- Hz d) 5 × 10"/ Hz
22. A charged particles oscillates about its mean equilibrium position with a frequency of 109 Hz. Frequency of
the Electromagnetic Waves produced by the oscillator is
a) 10 Hz b) 105 Hz
c) 109 Hz d) 1010 Hz
23. All components of the Electromagnetic Spectrum in vacuum have the same

Page|2
 a) Energy b) Velocity
c) Wavelength d) Frequency
24. If a source is transmitting electromagnetic wave of frequency 8.2 × 10/ Hz, then wavelength of the
electromagnetic waves transmitted from the source will be
a) 36.6 m b) 40.5 m
c) 42.3 m d) 50.9 m
25. Given the wavefunction (in SI units) for a wave to be ψ(4,6) = 10. sin 𝜋(3 × 10/ 𝑥 − 9 × 10"* 𝑡) The speed
of the wave is
a) 9 × 10"* ms!" b) 3 × 108 ms!"
c) 3 × 10/ ms!" d) 3 × 10- ms!"
26. The electric field of plane electromagnetic wave in vacuum is represented by 𝐄R⃗4 = 0; 𝐄
R⃗9 =
0.5 cos[2𝜋 × 108 (𝑡 − 𝑥/𝑐)]: 𝐄R⃗𝓏 = 0
What is the direction of propagation of electromagnetic waves?
a) Along 𝑥 − 𝓏 direction b) Along 𝑦-direction
c) Along 𝑥-direction d) A long 𝑦 − 𝓏 direction
27. Which of the following has zero average value in a plane electromagnetic wave?
a) Kinetic energy b) Magnetic field
c) Electric field d) Both (b) and (c)
28. The charge of a parallel plate capacitor is varying as 𝑞 = 𝑞) sin 2𝜋𝑓𝑡. The plates are very large and close
together (area= 𝐴, separation= 𝑑). Neglecting edge effects, the displacement current through the
capacitor is
𝑑 𝑑
a) b) sin 2𝜋𝑓𝑡
𝐴𝜀) 𝜀)
2𝜋𝑓𝑞)
c) 2𝜋𝑓𝑞) cos 2𝜋𝑓𝑡 d) cos 2𝜋 𝑓𝑡
𝜀)
29. Radio wave diffract around building although light waves do not. The reason is that radio waves
a) Travel with speed target than 𝑐 b) Have much larger wavelength than light
c) Carry news d) Are not electromagnetic waves
30. If 𝜀) and 𝜇) represent the permittivity and permeability of vacuum and 𝜀 and 𝜇 represent the permittivity
and permeability of medium, then refractive index of the medium is given by
µ) ε) µε
a) ’ b) ’
µε µ) ε)

µ µ) ε)
c) ’ d) ’
µ) ε) µ
31. The magnetic field between the plate of a capacitor where 𝑟 > 𝑅 is given by (where 𝑟 is the distance from
the axis of plates and 𝑅 is the radius of each plate of capacitor)
µ 𝑖 𝑟 µ 𝑖
a) ) ; # b) ) ;
2π𝑅 2π𝑅
µ) 𝑖; d) Zero
c)
2π𝑟
32. A TV tower has a height of 100 m. How much population is covered by the TV broadcast if the average
population density around the tower is 100 km!# (radius of the earth= 6.37 × 10/ m)
a) 4 lakh b) 4 billion
c) 40,000 d) 40 lakh
33. A radiation of energy 𝐸 falls normally on a perfectly reflecting surface. The momentum transferred to the
surface is
𝐸 2𝐸
a) b)
𝑐 𝑐

Page|3
 𝐸
c) 𝐸𝑐 d)
𝑐#
34. A. The wavelength of microwaves is greater than that of UV-rays.
B. The wavelength of IR rays is lesser than that of UV-rays.
C. The wavelength of microwaves is lesser than that of IR-rays.
D. Gamma rays have shortest wavelength in the Electromagnetic Spectrum.
Of the above statements
a) A and B are true b) B and C are true
c) C and D are true d) A and D are true
35. Molybdenum is used as a target element for the production of X-rays because it is
a) Light and can easily defect electrons b) Light and can absorb electrons
c) A heavy element with a high melting point d) An element having high thermal conductivity
SECTION - B
36. The ozone layer absorbs
a) Infrared radiations b) Ultraviolet radiations
c) X-rays d) γ-rays
37. In a phase electromagnetic wave, the electric filed oscillates sinusoidally at a frequency of 2.0 × 10") Hz
and amplitude 48 Vm!" . The wavelength of the wave is
a) 24 × 10!") m b) 1.5 × 10!# m
8
c) 4.16 × 10 m d) 3 × 108 m
38. A point source of Electromagnetic radiation has an average power output of 1500 W. The maximum value
of electric field at a distance of 3 m from this source in Vm-1- is
a) 500 b) 100
500 250
c) d)
3 3
39. The refractive index and the permeability of a medium are respectively 1.5 and 5 × 10!- Hm!" . The
relative permittivity of the medium is nearly
a) 25 b) 15
c) 81 d) 6
40. The wavelength of X-rays lies between
a) Maximum to finite limits b) Minimum to certain limits
c) Minimum to infinite limits d) Infinite to finite limits
41. For EM wave prorogating along 𝑥-axis, 𝐸<=> = 30 Vm!" . what is maximum value of magnetic field?
a) 10-7 T b) 10-8 T
c) 10-9 T d) 10-6 T
42. An electromagnetic wave, going through vacuum is described by 𝐸 = 𝐸) sin(𝑘𝑥 − ω𝑡)
Which of the following is independent of wavelength?
a) 𝑘 b) ω
c) 𝑘/ω d) 𝑘ω
43. A radio wave of frequency 90 MHz enters a ferrite rod. If 𝜀1 = 10. and 𝜇1 = 10, then the velocity and
wavelength of the wave in ferrite are
a) 3 × 108 ms!" ; 3.33 × 10!# m b) 3 × 10/ ms!" ; 3.33 × 10!# m
8 !" !"
c) 3 × 10 ms ; 3.33 × 10 m d) 3 × 10- ms!" ; 3.33 × 10!. m
44. A plane Electromagnetic Wave of frequency 30 MHz travels in free space along the 𝑥-direction. The electric
field component of the wave at a particular point of space and time E=6 Vm-1 along 𝑦-direction. Its
magnetic field component 𝐵 at this point would be
a) 2 × 10!8 T along 𝑧-direction b) 6 × 10!8 T along 𝑥-direction
c) 2 × 10!8 T along 𝑦-direction d) 6 × 10!8 T along 𝑧-direction
45. The electric field (in NC!" ) in an electromagnetic wave is given by 𝐸 = 50 sin 𝜔 (𝑡 − 𝑥/𝑐).
The energy stored in a cylinder of cross-section 10 cm# and length 100 cm, along the 𝑥-axis will be

Page|4
 a) 5.5 × 60!"# J b) 1.1 × 10!"" J
c) 2.2 × 10 !"" d) 1.65 × 10!"" J
J
46. Height ℎ of transmitter antenna when 𝑅 is radius of earth to have range 𝑑 is
a) 𝑑# /2𝑅 b) √2𝑑𝑅
#
c) 2𝑑 /𝑅 d) 2𝑅# /𝑑
47. In a plane electromagnetic wave propagating in space has an electric field of amplitude 9 × 10. Vm!" , then
the amplitude of the magnetic field is
a) 2.7 × 10"# T b) 9.0 × 10!. T
c) 3.0 × 10!* T d) 3.0 × 10!+ T
48. The shortest wavelength of X-rays emitted from an X-rays tube depends upon
a) Nature of the gas in the tube b) Voltage applied to tube
c) Current in the tube d) Nature of target of the tube
49. A large parallel plate capacitor, whose plates have an area of 1 m# and are separated from each other by 1
mm, is being charged at a rate of 25 Vs!" . If the dielectric between the plates has the dielectric constant
10, then the displacement current at this instant is
a) 25 µA b) 11 µA
c) 2.2 µA d) 1.1 µA
50. The Maxwell’s four equations are written as
RRRR⃗ = q/ε)
R⃗ ∙ 𝐝𝐬
(i)∮ 𝐄
(ii)∮ R𝐁 RRRR⃗ = 0
R⃗ ∙ 𝐝𝐬
?
(iii)∮ 𝐄 ∙ RRR⃗
𝐝𝐥 = − ∮𝐁 RR⃗ RRRR⃗
∙ 𝐝𝐬
?@ A
RRR⃗ = 𝜇) 𝐼 + µ) ε) B ∮ 𝐄
RR⃗ ∙ 𝐝𝐥
(iv)∮ 𝐁 RRRR⃗
R⃗. 𝐝𝐬
B6 A
R⃗ and R𝐁
The equation which have sources of 𝐄 R⃗ are
a) (i), (ii), (iii) b) (i), (ii)
c) (i)and (iii) only d) (i)and (iv) only

Page|5
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) a 2) d 3) b 4) c 29) b 30) b 31) c 32) d
5) c 6) d 7) b 8) b 33) b 34) d 35) c 36) b
9) c 10) c 11) c 12) a 37) b 38) a 39) d 40) b
13) b 14) a 15) b 16) c 41) a 42) c 43) b 44) a
17) d 18) c 19) c 20) a 45) b 46) a 47) d 48) b
21) b 22) c 23) b 24) a 49) c 50) d
25) b 26) c 27) d 28) c

Page|6
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (a) #G
or = 103
E
Here, amplitude of electric filed, 𝐸) = 2𝜋
100 Vm!" ; amplitude of magnetic field, 𝐵) = ⇒ 𝜆= .
10
0.265 Am!" . We know that the maximum rate = 6.28 × 10!. m
of energy flow = 0.63 cm
𝑆 = 𝐸) × 𝐵) = 100 × 0.265 = 26.5 Wm!# 11 (c)
2 (d) Power = 𝐼 × area = (1.4 × 10. ) × 5
CD
Energy of a photon 𝐸 = HIJKL ".*×")$ ×+
E Force 𝐹 = =
D .×")%
CD
∴ Wavelength 𝜆 = = 2.33 × 10 N !+
&
6.6 × 10!.* × 3 × 108 15 (b)
= Radioactive source, X-ray tube, sodium vapour
13.2 × 10 × 1.6 × 10!"F
.

= 0.9375 × 10!") m lamp, crystal oscillator

= 1Å 17 (d)
Wavelength range of X-rays is from 10-11 m to Generally, temperature of human body is 37℃,
10-8 m (0.1 Å to 100 Å). corresponding to which IR and microwave
Therefore, the given electromagnetic radiation radiations are emitted from the human body
belongs to the X-ray region of electromagnetic 18 (c)
"
spectrum. Velocity of light, 𝑐 =
N ( " O"
3 (b) " "
or 𝜇) 𝜀) = D ! = (<A&')! = s# m!#
Energy flowing per sec per unit area from a
"
face is = [𝐄 R⃗ × R𝐁
R⃗]. It will be in the negative 𝓏- 20 (a)
("
As v of charged particle is remaining constant,
direction. It shows that the energy will be
it means force acting on charged particle is
flowing infaces parallel to 𝑥 − 𝑦 plane and is
zero.
zero in all other faces. Total energy flowing per
So, 𝑞(𝐯 × 𝐁) = 𝑞𝐄
second from a face in 𝑥 − 𝑦 plane=
⇒ 𝐯×𝐁=𝐄
" &'$ !
(𝐸𝐵 sin 90°)𝑎# = 𝑬 × 𝑩
(" (" ⇒ 𝐯 =
4 (c) 𝐵#
22 (c)
The relation between electric field vector E,
The frequency of Electromagnetic Waves
the displacement vector D and the polarization
produced by the oscillator is equal to the
vector P for a dielectric placed in electric field
frequency of the oscillating particle 𝑖𝑒, 10F Hz.
E is given by𝐃 = ε) 𝐄 + 𝐏.
23 (b)
6 (d)
All the component of electromagnetic
Ultraviolet is absorbed by the ozone layer.
spectrum have same velocity, 𝑖𝑒, 3 ×
8 (b)
108 ms!" .
𝐸) = 𝑐𝐵) = 3 × 108 × 10!* = 3 × 10* Vm!"
24 (a)
9 (c)
D .×")%
2𝑠 2 × 38400 × 1000 Here, 𝜆 = = = 36.6 m
𝑡= = = 2.5 s P 8.#×")(
𝑐 3 × 108 25 (b)
10 (c) ψ(4,6) = 10. sin 𝜋(3 × 10/ 𝑥 − 9 × 10"* 𝑡)
Given, 𝐵9 = 3 × 10!- sin(10. 𝑥 + 6.28 ×
= 10. sin 3 × 10/ 𝜋(𝑥 − 3 × 108 𝑡)
10"# 𝑡). Comparing it with the relation
Comparing with the general equation #G
ψ(4,6) = 𝑎 sin (𝑥 − 𝑐𝑡); We note that
𝐵9 = 𝐵) sin(𝑘𝑥 + 𝜔𝑡) E
𝑐 = 3 × 108 ms!"
we get 𝑘 = 10.
26 (c)

Page|7
 Equation second shows that the 34 (d)
electromagnetic wave travels along the The wavelength order of the given types of
positive 𝑥-axis waves are given below
27 (d) Waves Wavelength Range (in meter)
In electromagnetic wave, the average value of Gamma rays 10!"* − 10!")
electric filed or magnetic field is zero IR-rays 7 × 10!- = 10!.
28 (c) UV-rays 10!F − 4 × 10!-
𝑑𝑞 𝑑 Microwave 10!* − 10)
𝑖= = (𝑞) sin 2𝜋𝑓𝑡) = 𝑞) 2𝜋𝑓 cos 2𝜋𝑓𝑡
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 Hence, statements (A) and (D) are correct.
29 (b) 36 (b)
Diffraction takes places when the wavelength The ozone layer absorbs ultraviolet radiations
of wave is comparable with the size of the 37 (b)
obstacle in path. The wavelength of radio Wavelength, 𝜆 = 𝑐/𝑣 = 3 × 108 /2 × 10") =
waves is greater than the wavelength of light 1.5 × 10!# m
waves. Therefore, radio waves are diffracted 39 (d)
around building Given refractive index
30 (b) 𝑛 = 1.5
D" "/NR" S"
Refractive index= = Permeability 𝜇) = 5 × 10!-
D "/√RS
𝑛 = √µL εL
µε 𝑛#
=’ 𝜀1 =
µ) ε) 𝜇1
31 (c) W ! R" R
or 𝜌 = ¹∵ µL = »
R R"
Using Ampere circuit law,
(".+)! × *G × ")&)
∮𝐁RR⃗ ∙ RRR⃗
𝐝𝐥 = µ) 𝑖; or 𝜀1 =
+ × ")&)
or 𝐵2𝜋𝑟 = 𝜇𝑖; or 𝜀1 = 6
or 𝐵 = µ) 𝑖; /2𝜋𝑟 40 (b)
32 (d) According to Daun-Hunt law, the wavelength
𝑑 = √2ℎ𝑅 of X-rays lies between minimum to certain
Population covered limit
= 𝜋𝑑# ×population density 41 (a)
= 3.114 × (2 × 0.1 × 6.37 × 10. ) × 1000 ≈ 40 The amplitude of the electric and magnetic
&"
lakh fields in free space are related by '"
=𝑐
33 (b) Here, 𝐸) = 30 Vm!" , 𝑐 = 3 × 108 ms !"
Initial momentum of surface 𝐸) 30
𝐸 ∴ 𝐵) = = = 10!- T
𝑃0 = 𝑐 3 × 108
𝐶 42 (c)
Where, 𝑐 = velocity of light (constant). Here, 𝑘𝑥 = θ or 𝑘 = θ/𝑥
Since, the surface is perfectly, reflecting, so the And 𝜔𝑡 = θ) or 𝜔 = θ) /𝑡
same momentum will be reflected completely. "
∴ 𝑘/𝜔 = 𝑡/𝑥 = 1/(𝑥/𝑡) = , where 𝑣 is the
Final momentum P
& velocity of electromagnetic wave, which is
𝑃U = (negative value)
D independent of wavelength of wave but
∴Change in momentum depends upon the nature of medium of
Δ𝑝 = 𝑝U − 𝑝0 propagation of wave
𝐸 𝐸 2𝐸 43 (b)
=− − = −
𝑐 𝑐 𝑐 𝑐 3 × 108
Thus , momentum transferred to the surface is 𝑣XKLLY@K = = = 3 × 10/ ms!"
#& √𝜇1 𝜀1 √10 × 10..
𝛥𝑝V = |∆𝑝| = P*+,,-.+ .×")(
D λXKLLY@K = P
= F)×")( = 3.33 × 10!# m

Page|8
44 (a) Energy contained in a cylinder
The frequency of Electromagnetic Wave along 𝑈 = avearge energy density × volume
𝑦 −direction 1
= 𝜀) 𝐸)# × 𝐴𝑙
v = 30 MHz 2
The electric field component of the wave along 1
= × (8.85 × 10!"# ) × (50)# × (10 × 10!* )
𝑦-direction. 2
×1
𝐸 = 6 Vm!" !""
= 1.1 × 10 J
46 (a)
𝑑 = √2ℎ𝑅 or ℎ = 𝑑# /2𝑅
47 (d)
𝐸) 9 × 10.
𝐵) = = = 3 × 10!+ T
𝑐 3 × 108
48 (b)
In Electromagnetic, the ratio of the amplitudes 𝑒𝑉 = ℎ𝑐/𝜆
of electric and magnetic field is always Or 𝜆 = ℎ𝑐/𝑒𝑉 𝑖𝑒, 𝜆 ∝ 1/𝑉
constant and it is equal to velocity of the 49 (c)
Electromagnetic Waves. 𝜀) 𝐾𝐴 (8.85 × 10!"# ) × 10 × 1
𝑖𝑒,
&
=𝑐 𝐶= =
' 𝑑 10!.
!8
or 𝐵 =
& /
= . × ")% = 8.85 × 10 F
D 𝑑 𝑑𝑉
or 𝐵 = 2 × 10!8 T 𝑖 = (𝐶𝑉) = 𝐶 = 8.85 × 10!8 × 25
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
45 (b) = 2.2 × 10!/ A

Page|9
 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. The distance between a point source of light and a screen which is 60 𝑐𝑚 is increased to 180 𝑐𝑚. The
intensity on the screen as compared with the original intensity will be
a) (1/9) times b) (1/3) times
c) 3 times d) 9 times
2. A thin lens made of glass of refractive index µ = 1.5 has a focal length equals is 12 cm in air. It is now
!
immersed in water Nµ = "O. Its new focal length is
a) 48 cm b) 36 cm
c) 24 cm d) 12 cm
3. The focal length of an objective of a telescope is 3 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒 and diameter 15 𝑐𝑚. Assuming for a normal eye,
the diameter of the pupil is 3 𝑚𝑚 for its complete use, the focal length of eye piece must be
a) 6 𝑐𝑚 b) 6.3 𝑐𝑚
c) 20 𝑐𝑚 d) 60 𝑐𝑚
4. The minimum magnifying power of a telescope is 𝑀, If the focal length of its eye lens is halved, the
magnifying power will become
a) 𝑀/2 b) 2 𝑀
c) 3 𝑀 d) 4 𝑀
5. A plane mirror makes an angle of 30° with horizontal. If a vertical ray strikes the mirror, find the angle
between mirror and reflected ray
a) 30° b) 45°
c) 60° d) 90°
6. The focal lengths of the objective and the eye-piece of a compound microscope are 2.0 𝑐𝑚 and 3.0 𝑐𝑚
respectively. The distance between the objective and the eye-piece is 15.0 𝑐𝑚. The final image formed by
the eye-piece is at infinity. The two lenses are thin. The distances in 𝑐𝑚 of the object and the image
produced by the objective measured from the objective lens are respectively
a) 2.4 and 12.0 b) 2.4 and 15.0
c) 2.3 and 12.0 d) 2.3 and 3.0
7. Image formed on retina of eye is proportional to
a) Size of object b) Area of object
Size of object Size of image
c) d)
Size of image Size of object
8. The power of the combination of a convex lens of focal length 50 cm and concave lens of focal length 40 cm
is
a) +1 D b) -1 D
c) Zero d) -0.5 D
9. Resolving power of a microscope depends upon
a) The focal length and aperture of the eye lens b) The focal lengths of the objective and the eye lens
c) The apertures of the objective and the eye lens d) The wavelength of light illuminating the object
10. If a lens is cut into two pieces perpendicular to the principal axis and only one part is used, the intensity of
the image
a) Remains same #
b) times
$
c) 2 times d) Infinite
11. A hollow double concave lens is made of very thin transparent material. It can be filled with air or either of
two liquids 𝐿# and 𝐿$ having refractive indices 𝑛# and 𝑛$ respectively (𝑛$ > 𝑛# > 1). The lens will diverge
a parallel beam of light if it is filled with
a) Air and placed in air b) Air and immersed in 𝐿#
c) 𝐿# and immersed in 𝐿$ d) 𝐿$ and immersed in 𝐿#
12. Given figures show the arrangements of two lenses, The radii of curvature of all the curved surfaces are
same. The ratio of the equivalent focal length of combinations 𝑃, 𝑄 and 𝑅 is

a) 1 ∶ 1 ∶ 1 b) 1 ∶ 1 ∶ −1
c) 2 ∶ 1 ∶ 1 d) 2 ∶ 1 ∶ 2
13. The intensity of direct sunlight on a surface normal to the rays is 𝐼% . What is the intensity of direct sunlight
on a surface, whose normal makes an angle of 60° with the rays of the sun
√3
a) 𝐼% b) 𝐼% j l
2
𝐼%
c) d) 2𝐼%
2
14. A source of light emits a continuous stream of light energy which falls on a given area. Luminous intensity
is defined as
a) Luminous energy emitted by the source per b) Luminous flux emitted by source per unit solid angle
second
c) Luminous flux falling per unit area of a given d) Luminous flux coming per unit area of an illuminated
surface surface
15. The dispersive powers of crown and flint glasses are 0.02 and 0.04 respectively. In an achromatic
combination of lenses the focal length of flint glass lens is 40 𝑐𝑚. The focal length of crown glass lens will
be
a) −20 𝑐𝑚 b) +20 𝑐𝑚
c) −10 𝑐𝑚 d) +10 𝑐𝑚
16. The reason of seeing the Sun a little before the sunrise is
a) Reflection of the light b) Refraction of the light
c) Scattering of the light d) Dispersion of the light
17. A thin plano-convex lens of focal 𝑓 is split into two halves. One of the halves is shifted along the optical
axis. The separation between object and image plane is 1.8 m. The magnification of the image formed by
one of the half lens is 2. Find the focal-length of the lens and separation between the two halves

a) 0.1 m b) 0.4 m
c) 0.9 m d) 1 m
18. Which mirror is to be used to obtain a parallel beam of light from a small lamp?
a) Plane mirror b) Convex mirror
c) Concave mirror d) Any one of these

Page|2
19. Two thin lenses whose powers are +2𝐷 and −4𝐷 respectively combine, then the power of combination is
a) −2𝐷 b) +2𝐷
c) −4𝐷 d) +4𝐷
20. Near and far points of human eye are
a) 25 cm and infinite b) 50 cm and 100 cm
c) 25 cm and 50 cm d) 0 cm and 25 cm
21. A man’s near point is 0.5 m and far point is 3 m. Power spectacle lenses repaired for
(i) reading purposes
(ii) seeing distant objects, respectively
a) −2 D and + 3 D b) +2 D and −3 D
c) +2 D and – 0.33 D d) −2 D and + 0.33D
22. Refractive index of the material of a prism is 1.5. If δ& = 𝐴, what will be a value of angle of the given
prism?
(whereδ& = minimum deviation; 𝐴 = angle of prism)
a) 82.8° b) 41.4°
c) 48.6° d) 90°
23. 60° prism hasµ = √2. Angle of incidence for minimum deviation is
a) 45° b) 30°
c) 60° d) 90°
24. A layered lens as shown in figure is made of two types of transparent materials indicated by different
shades. A point object is placed on its axis. The object will form

a) 1 image b) 2 images
c) 3 images d) 9 images
25. A hypermetropic person having near point at a distance of 0.75 m puts on spectacles of power 2.5 D. The
near point now is at
a) 0.75 m b) 0.83 m
c) 0.26 cm d) 0.26 m
26. Lux is equal to
a) 1 𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒𝑛/𝑚$ b) 1 𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒𝑛/𝑐𝑚$
c) 1 𝑐𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑙𝑎/𝑚$ d) 1 𝑐𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑙𝑎/𝑐𝑚$
27. The radius of curvature of the convex face of a planoconvex lens is 15 cm and the refractive index of the
material is 1.4. Then the power of the lens in diopter is
a) 1.6 b) 1.66
c) 2.6 d) 2.66
28. The Cauchy’s dispersion formula is
a) 𝑛 = 𝐴 + 𝐵𝜆'$ + 𝐶𝜆'! b) 𝑛 = 𝐴 + 𝐵𝜆$ + 𝐶𝜆'!
c) 𝑛 = 𝐴 + 𝐵𝜆'$ + 𝐶𝜆! d) 𝑛 = 𝐴 + 𝐵𝜆$ + 𝐶𝜆!
29. A 2.0 cm tall object is placed 15 cm in front of a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm. What is the size and
nature of the image
a) 4 cm, real b) 4 cm, virtual
c) 1.0 cm, real d) None of these
30. The plane surface of a plano-convex lens of focal length 𝑓 is silvered. It will behave as
a) Plane mirror b) Convex mirror of focal length 2 𝑓
( d) None of the above
c) Concave mirror of focal length $
31. A medium shows relation between 𝑖 and 𝑟 as shown. If speed of light in the medium is 𝑛𝑐 then value of 𝑛 is

Page|3
 sin r

30°
sin i

a) 1.5 b) 2
c) 2'# d) 3'#/$
#!
32. The frequency of a light ray is 6 × 10 𝐻𝑧. Its frequency when it propagates in a medium of refractive
index 1.5, will be
a) 1.67 × 10#! 𝐻𝑧 b) 9.10 × 10#! 𝐻𝑧
c) 6 × 10#! 𝐻𝑧 d) 4 × 10#! 𝐻𝑧
33. Refractive index of glass with respect to medium is!. If the differences between velocities of light in
"
* '#
medium and glass is 6.25 × 10 ms , then velocity of light in medium is
a) 2.5 × 10+ ms'# b) 0.125 × 10+ ms'#
c) 1.5 × 10+ ms'# d) 3 × 10+ ms'#
34. The ratio of the refractive index of red light to blue light in air is
a) Less than unity b) Equal to unity
c) Greater than unity d) Less as well as greater than unity depending upon
the experimental arrangement
SECTION - B
35. A thin convex lens of focal length 10 𝑐𝑚 is placed in contact with a concave lens of same material and of
same focal length. The focal length of combination will be
a) Zero b) Infinity
c) 10 𝑐𝑚 d) 20 𝑐𝑚
36. A hypermetropic person has to use a lens of power +5 D to normalize his vision. The near point of the
hypermetropic eye is
a) 1 m b) 1.5 m
c) 0.5 m d) 0.66 m
37. The spectrum obtained from a sodium vapour lamp is an example of
a) Absorption spectrum b) Emission spectrum
c) Continuous spectrum d) Band spectrum
38. If a parallel beam of white light is incident on a converging lens, the colour which is brought to focus
nearest to the lens is
a) Violet b) Red
c) The mean colour d) All the colours together
39. Dispersive power depends on the following
a) Material of the prism b) Shape of the prism
c) Size of the prism d) Size, shape and material of the prism
40. The light gathering power of a camera lens depends on
a) Its diameter only b) Ratio of diameter and focal length
c) Product of focal length and diameter d) Wavelength of light used
41. How will the image formed by a convex lens be affected, if the central portion of the lens is wrapped in
blank paper, as shown in the figure

a) No image will be formed b) Full image will be formed but is less bright

Page|4
 c) Full image will be formed but without the
central portion
42. The twinkling effect of star light is due to
a) Total internal reflection
c) Constant burning of hydrogen in the star
43. The graph shows how the magnification 𝑚 produced by a convex thin lens varies with image distance 𝑣.
What was the focal length of the used lines
m
d) Two images will be formed, one due to each exposed
half
b) High dense matter of star
d) The fluctuating apparent position of the star being
slightly different from of the star being different
from the actual position of the star

a c
v

a) 𝑏/𝑐 b) 𝑏/𝑐𝑎
c) 𝑏𝑐/𝑎 d) 𝑐/𝑏
44. A fish, looking up through the water sees the outside world contained in a circular horizon. If the refractive
index of water is 4/3 and the fish is 12 cm below the surface of water, the radius of the circle in centimetre
is
12 × 3
a) b) 12 × 3 × √5
√5
12 × 3
c) d) 12 × 3 × √7
√7
45. The wavelength of sodium light in air is 5890Å. The velocity of light in air is 3 × 10'+ ms ̄¹. The wavelength
of light in a glass of refractive index 1.6 would be close to
a) 5890Å b) 3681Å
c) 9424Å d) 15078Å
46. Focal length of a convex lens of refractive index 1.5 in 2 𝑐𝑚. Focal length of lens when immersed in a liquid
of refractive index of 1.25 will be
a) 10 𝑐𝑚 b) 2.5 𝑐𝑚
c) 5 𝑐𝑚 d) 7.5 𝑐𝑚
47. A combination of two thin lenses of the same material with focal length 𝑓# and 𝑓$ , arranged on a common
axis minimizes chromatic aberration. If the distance between them is
(𝑓 + 𝑓$ ) (𝑓 + 𝑓$ )
a) # b) #
4 2
c) (𝑓# + 𝑓$ ) d) 2(𝑓# + 𝑓$ )
48. Speed of light is maximum in
a) Water b) Air
c) Glass d) Diamond
49. A ray of light is incident on a plane mirror at an angle of 60°.The angle of deviation produced by the
mirror is
a) 120° b) 30°
c) 60° d) 90°
50. The refractive index of a material of a planoconcave lens is 5/3, the radius of curvature is 0.3 m. The focal
length of the lens in air is
a) -0.45 m b) -0.6 m
c) -0.75 m d) -1.0 m

Page|5
1) a 2) a 3) a 4) b 29) a 30) c 31) d 32) c
5) c 6) a 7) a 8) d 33) a 34) a 35) b 36) a
9) d 10) a 11) d 12) a 37) b 38) a 39) a 40) a
13) c 14) b 15) a 16) b 41) b 42) d 43) d 44) c
17) b 18) c 19) a 20) a 45) b 46) c 47) b 48) b
21) c 22) a 23) b 24) b 49) c 50) a
25) d 26) a 27) d 28) a

Page|6
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (a) When final image is formed at infinity,
1 𝐼$ 𝑟#$ 60$ 1 length of the tube = 𝑣4 + 𝑓5
𝐼∝ ⇒ = = =
𝑟 $ 𝐼# 𝑟$$ 180$ 9 ⇒ 15 = 𝑣4 + 3 ⇒ 𝑣4 = 12 𝑐𝑚
# # #
2 (a) For objective lens ( = 6 − 7
$ $ $
Focal length in air is given by 1 1 1
1 1 1 ⇒ = − ⇒ 𝑢4 = −2.4 𝑐𝑚
= “ , µ- − 1” • − – (+2) (+12) 𝑢
𝑓, ₐ 𝑅# 𝑅$ 7 (a)
The focal length of lens immersed in water For large objects, large image is formed on
is given by
retina
1 1 1
= “ . 𝑛- − 1” • − – 8 (d)
𝑓# 𝑅# 𝑅$
𝑃 = 𝑃# + 𝑃$
When, 𝑅# , 𝑅$ are radii of curvatures of the #%% #%%
=( + , both 𝑓# and 𝑓$ are in cm.
two surfaces of lens and . 𝑛- is refractive % (&

index of glass with respect to liquid. 100 100

= −
0 50 40
Also, . µ- = ₐ! 0"
! # =2-2.5=-0.5 D
!
Given, ₐ , 𝑛- = 1.5, 𝑓, ₐ = 12 cm, ₐ , 𝑛. = " 9 (d)
$8 9:; <
𝑓. “ₐ , 𝑛- − 1” R.P. of microscope = =
∴ =
𝑓, ₐ “ . 𝑛- − 1” 10 (a)
𝑓# (1.5 − 1) 0.5 × 4 Since light transmitting area is same, there
= = is no effect on intensity
12 N #.3 − 1O 0.5
!/" 11 (d)
⇒ 𝑓# = 4 × 12 = 48 cm # 0 # #
(
= N0& − 1O N> − > O where 𝑛$ and 𝑛# are
% % &
3 (a) the refractive indices of the material of the
Full use of resolving power means whole lens and of the surroundings respectively.
aperture of objective in use. And for For a double concave lens, N> − > O is
# #

relaxed vision % &

always negative

D d

n1 n1
n2
fo fe

𝑓4 𝐷 300 15 Hence 𝑓 is negative only when 𝑛$ > 𝑛#

= ⇒ = ⇒ 𝑓5 = 6 𝑐𝑚
𝑓5 𝑑 𝑓5 0.3 12 (a)
4 (b) In given images, 𝑃, 𝑄 and 𝑅 lenses in
1 contact for 𝑃 combination of lenses
𝑚∝
𝑓5 1 1 1 2
= + =
5 (c) 𝐹? 𝑓 𝑓 𝑓
Incident ray 𝑓
𝐹? =
30° 30° Reflected ray 2
Similarly for 𝑄 and 𝑅 combination
60° 𝑓
𝐹@ =
30°
Surface 2
𝑓
6 (a) 𝐹> =
2
Then 𝑃 ∶ 𝑄 ∶ 𝑅 = 1 ∶ 1 ∶ 1

Page|7
13 (c) 𝑓 D =distance of far point = −3m
𝐼4 # #
𝑃 = (D = − "D =−0.33 D
𝐼< = 𝐼4 cos 𝜃 = 𝐼4 cos 60° =
2
15 (a) 22 (a)
A% A& %.%$ %.%! µ = 1.5
By using + =0⇒ + =0
(% (& (% !% δ& = 𝐴
𝑓# = −20 𝑐𝑚 We know that
16 (b) E B F'
The sun appears
sin N O
$
µ= E
above the horizon
Horizon
sin
B $
EBE
sin N O sin 𝐴
Atmospheric
As seen 1.5 = $
=
A E E
refraction from the sin sin
$ $
E E
Actual position of 2 sin $ . cos $
the sun 1.5 = E
sin
$
(Just below horizon)
𝐴
17 (b) 1.5 = 2 cos
2
This is a modified displacement method 𝐴 1.5
cos = = 0.75
problem 2 2
Here, 𝑎 = 1.8m and
,BC
=#
$ 𝑐𝑜𝑠41.4 = 0.75
,'C
𝐴
Solving we get 𝑑 = 0.6 m = 41.4
2
𝑎$ − 𝑑$ 𝐴 = 82.8
∴𝑓=
4𝑎 23 (b)
= 0.4m
Here, 𝐴 = 60°, µ = √2
18 (c)
Now,
It lamp is placed at the focus of concave E B F'
mirror then we get parallel beam of light. sin N $
O
µ= E
… (i)
19 (a) sin N $ O
𝑃 = 𝑃# + 𝑃$ = 2𝐷 − 4𝐷 = −2𝐷
Substituting given values in Eq. (i) , we get
20 (a) G%° B F'
Our eye lens has a power to adjust its focal sin N $
O
√2 = G%°
length to see the nearer and father objects, sin N O
$
this process of adjusting focal length is δ&
called accommodation. However, if the Or sin •30° + – = √2 sin 30°
2
object is brought too close or bring too far δ& 1 1
from the eye, the focal length cannot be Or sin •30° + – = √2 × =
2 2 √2
adjusted to from the image on the retina. δ&
Thus, there is minimum or maximum Or sin •30° + – = 45°
2
distance for the clever vision of an object. δ&
Or •30° + – = sin 45°
For a normal eye, near point or least 2
distant vision 𝐷 = 25 cm and far point = ∞ Or δ& = 30°
21 (c) 𝐴 + δ&
∴ Angle of incidnece 𝑖 =
For reading purpose 2
60° + 30°
𝑢 = −25 cm, 𝑣 = −50 cm, 𝑓 =? = = 30°
1 1 1 1 1 1 2
∴ = − = + = 24 (b)
𝑓 𝑣 𝑢 50 25 50
100 Note that two refractive indices are
P= = +2D involves. Therefore, two images will be
𝑓
formed
For distinct vision,
Page|8
25 (d) The image is real, inverted, of size 4 cm at
1 1 1 a distance 30 cm in front of the mirror
= −
𝑓 𝑣 𝑢 30 (c)
1 1 1 100 25 Focal length of effective lens
2.5 = − or = − −
−0.75 𝑢 𝑢 75 10 1 2 1 2 1 𝑓.
# ! 3 # '+'#3 $" = + = + ⇒𝐹=
Or 7 = − " − $ or 7 = G = − G 𝐹 𝑓. 𝑓& 𝑓. ∞ 2
G 31 (d)
Or 𝑢 = − $" m = −0.26m
9:; K
From graph it is clear that tan 30° =
26 (a) 9:; L
𝐿 1 sin 𝑟 1
𝐼= $ ⇒ = = ⇒ 𝜇 = √3
𝑟 √3 sin 𝑖 𝜇
27 (d) M # #
Also 𝑣 = 8 = 𝑛𝑐 ⇒ 𝑛 = 8 = = (3)'#/$
√"
1 1 1
= (𝜇 − 1) • − – 32 (c)
𝑓 𝑅# 𝑅$
Frequency remain unchanged
For planoconvex lens
33 (a)
𝑅₁ = ∞, 𝑅₂ = −𝑅 = −1.5 𝑐𝑚, 𝜇 = 1.4
1 1 So, velocity of light in glass
∴ = (1.4 − 1) •0 + – 𝑉&
𝑓 15 𝑉O =
1 1 𝜇
𝑜𝑟 = 0.4 × 𝑉&
𝑓 15 𝑉& − 𝑉O = 𝑉& −
𝜇
Therefore, power of the lens in diopter
100 40 1
𝑃= = = 2.66 𝐷 ∴ 6.25 × 10* = 𝑉& £1 − ! ¤
𝑓 15
"
29 (a) *
𝑉& = 6.25 × 10 × 4
= 2.5 × 10+ 𝑚𝑠 '#
34 (a)
𝜇P.75 > 𝜇K5C
35 (b)
𝑓# 𝑓$ 10(−10) −100
𝑓= = = =∞
𝑓# + 𝑓$ 10 + (−10) 10 − 10
36 (a)
# #
𝑓 = ? = 3m = 20 cm
According to New Cartesian sign # # #
convention, Now, 6 − 7 = $%
# # # # # #
Object distance 𝑢 = −15 𝑐𝑚 Or − '$3 = $% or 6 = $% − $3
6
Focal length of a concave lens, 𝑓 = −10 𝑐𝑚 # 3'! # #
Or = or = #%%
Height of the object ℎ4 = 2.0 𝑐𝑚 6 #%% 6
# # # Or 𝑑 = 100 cm = 1 m
According to mirror formula, 6 + 7 = (
37 (b)
1 1 1 1 1 Sodium light gives emission spectrum
= − = − ⇒ 𝑣 = −30 𝑐𝑚
𝑣 𝑓 𝑢 −10 −15 having two yellow lines
This image is formed 30 cm from the 38 (a)
mirror on the same side of the object. It is Focal length for violet is minimum
a real image 40 (a)
'6 I(
Magnification of the mirror, 𝑚 = 7
=I A camera is a device used to take pictures,
)
−(−30) ℎJ either singly or in sequence. Camera’s
⇒ = ⇒ ℎJ = −4 𝑐𝑚 have a lens positioned in front of the
−15 2
Negative sign shows that image is inverted camera’s opening together the incoming
light and to focus the image or part of the

Page|9
 image on the recording surface. The size of r

aperture (its diameter) controls the

C
brightness of the scene control and the
amount of light that enters the camera
c
during a period of time, and the shutter (

controls the length of time that the light

hits the recording surface. or 𝑟 = 12 tan 𝐶
A diameter of an aperture is measured in 12 sin 𝐶
or 𝑟 =
𝑓- stops. A lower 𝑓- stops number opens √1 − sin$ 𝐶
#
the aperture admits more light onto the 12 × Q 12 12
camera sensor. Higher 𝑓 – stop numbers 𝑟= = =
$
«1 − Q& ¬µ − 1 «N!O − 1
# $
make the cameras aperture smaller so less
"
light hits the sensor. 12 × 3
41 (b) 𝑖𝑒, 𝑟 =
√7
Only the light-gathering power is reduced 45 (b)
42 (d) When light passes from one medium to
The atmosphere can be considered to another, its frequency remains unchanged
consist of a number of parallel layers of air but it velocity (and hence, wavelength)
of different densities and therefore of changes.
different refractive indices. The density wavelength in air (λ, )
and the refractive index of layers decrease , µ- =
wavelength in glass “λ- ”
with altitude.
5890
The rays of light coming from a star to the ⇒ 1.6 =
λ-
earth are thus continually refracted from
the rarer to the denser layers and so they 5890
bend slightly towards the normal at each ⇒ 𝜆- = = 3681 Å
1.6
refraction from one layer to the next. Thus,
they follow a curved path and reach the 46 (c)
eyes of the observer at 𝑂 as shown in 𝑓. , 𝜇O − 1 , 𝜇O −1 𝑓# 1.5 − 1
= = ! 8*
⇒ = #.3
figure. Hence, the image of the star 𝑆 is 𝑓, . 𝜇O − 1 −1 2 −1
! 8# #.$3
seen as 𝑆′. But due to the wind and the ⇒ 𝑓# = 5𝑐𝑚
convection currents in air the density of 48 (b)
layers keep on changing and hence, the #
𝑣 ∝ 8 , µ is smaller for air than water, glass
position of the stat 𝑆′ as seen, keeps on
changing. These different images of the and diamond
start give an impression to an observer 49 (c)
that the star is twinkling. Here, angle of incidence, 𝑖 = 60°
43 (d) ∴ Angle of deviation
('6 # δ = 180° − (𝑖 + 𝑟)
For a lens 𝑚 = = −(𝑣 + 1
( = 180° − 2𝑖 (As 𝑖 = 𝑟)
Comparing it with 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑐 = 180° − 2 × 60° = 60°
#
Slope = 𝑚 = − ( 50 (a)
P Lens maker’s formula
From graph, slope of the line = M 1 1 1
# P M = (𝜇 − 1) • − –
Hence − = ⇒ |𝑓| = 𝑓 𝑅# 𝑅$
( M P
44 (c) Where, 𝑅₂ = ∞, 𝑅₁ = 0.3 𝑚
K 1 5 1 1
From figure, tan 𝐶 = #$ ∴ = • − 1– • − –
𝑓 3 0.3 ∞

P a g e | 10
 1 2 1 𝑜𝑟 𝑓 = 0.45 𝑚
⇒ = ×
𝑓 3 0.3

P a g e | 11
 Wave Optics
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. Maxwell’s equations describe the fundamental laws of

a) Electricity only b) Magnetism only
c) Mechanics only d) Both (a) and (b)
2. A single slit is located effectively at infinity in front of a lens of focal length 1 m and it is illuminated
normally with light of wavelength 600 nm. The first minima on either side of central maximum are
separated by 4 mm. Width of the slit is ……
a) 0.1 mm b) 0.2 mm
c) 0.3 mm d) 0.4 mm
3. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the fringe width will remain same, if (𝐷 = distance between screen
and plane of slits, 𝑑 = separation between two slits and 𝜆 = wavelength of light used)
a) Both 𝜆 and 𝐷 are doubled b) Both 𝑑 and 𝐷 are doubled
c) 𝐷 is doubled but 𝑑 is halved d) 𝜆 is doubled but 𝑑 is halved
4. The fringe width in Young’s double slit experiment increases when
a) Wavelength increases b) Distance between the slits increases
c) Distance between the source and screen d) The width of the slits increases
decreases
5. Which of following can not be polarized
a) Radio waves b) Ultraviolet rays
c) Infrared rays d) Ultrasonic waves
6. Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensities 𝐼 and 4𝐼 are superposed. The maximum and
minimum possible intensities in the resulting beam are
a) 5𝐼 and 𝐼 b) 5𝐼 and 3𝐼
c) 9𝐼 and 𝐼 d) 9𝐼 and 3𝐼
7. Pick out the longest wavelength from the following types of radiations
a) Blue light b) 𝛾-rays
c) 𝑋-rays d) Red light
8. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slit separation is 1𝑚𝑚 and the screen is 1𝑚 from the slit. For a
monochromatic light of wavelength 500 𝑛𝑚, the distance of 3rd minima from the central maxima is
a) 0.50 𝑚𝑚 b) 1.25 𝑚𝑚
c) 1.50 𝑚𝑚 d) 1.75 𝑚𝑚
9. Wave which cannot travel in vacuum is
a) 𝑋-rays b) Infrasonic
c) Ultraviolet d) Radiowaves
10. The electromagnetic waves do not transport
a) Energy b) Charge
c) Momentum d) Information
11. An electromagnetic wave, going through vacuum is described by 𝐸 = 𝐸! sin(𝑘𝑥 − 𝜔𝑡). Which of the
following is independent of wavelength
 a) 𝑘 b) 𝜔
c) 𝑘/𝜔 d) 𝑘𝜔
12. A radio receiver antenna that is 2 𝑚 long is oriented along the direction of the electromagnetic wave and
receives a signal of intensity 5 × 10"#$ 𝑊/𝑚% . The maximum instantaneous potential difference across the
two ends of the antenna is
a) 1.23 𝜇𝑉 b) 1.23 𝑚𝑉
c) 1.23 𝑉 d) 12.3 𝑚𝑉
13. If we observe the single slit Frunhofer diffraction with wavelength 𝜆 and slit width e, the width of the
central maxima is 2𝜃. On decreasing the slit width for the same 𝜆
a) θ increases b) θ remains unchanged
θ increases or decreases depending on the intensity
c) θ decreases d)
of light
14. A point source of electromagnetic radiation has an average power output of 800 𝑊. The maximum value of
electric field at a distance 4.0 𝑚 from the source is
a) 64.7 𝑉/𝑚 b) 57.8 𝑉/𝑚
c) 56.72 𝑉/𝑚 d) 54.77 𝑉/𝑚
15. "&
A plane wavefront (𝜆 = 6 × 10 𝑚) falls on a slit 0.4 𝑚𝑚 wide. A convex lens of focal length 0.8𝑚 placed
behind the slit focusses the light on a screen. What is the linear diameter of second maximum
a) 6𝑚𝑚 b) 12𝑚𝑚
c) 3𝑚𝑚 d) 9𝑚𝑚
16. Which one of the following have minimum wavelength
a) Ultraviolet rays b) Cosmic rays
c) 𝑋-rays d) 𝛾-rays
17. In a Young’s experiment, two coherent sources are placed 0.90 mm apart and the finges are observed one
metre away. If it produces the second dark fringe at a distance of 1 mm from the central fringe, the
wavelength of monochromatic light used would be
a) 60 × 10"' cm b) 10 × 10"' cm
c) 10 × 10"( cm d) 6 × 10"( cm
18. A light wave is incident normally over a slit of width 24 × 10"( 𝑐𝑚. The angular position of second dark
fringe from the central maxima is 30°. What is the wavelength of light
a) 6000 Å b) 5000 Å
c) 3000 Å d) 1500 Å
19. A plane electromagnetic wave of wave intensity 6 𝑊/𝑚% strikes a small mirror area 40 𝑐𝑚% , held
perpendicular to the approaching wave. The momentum transferred by the wave to the mirror each
second will be
a) 6.4 × 10"& 𝑘𝑔 − 𝑚/𝑠 % b) 4.8 × 10") 𝑘𝑔 − 𝑚/𝑠 %
c) 3.2 × 10"* 𝑘𝑔 − 𝑚/𝑠 % d) 1.6 × 10"#! 𝑘𝑔 − 𝑚/𝑠 %
20. Oil floating on water looks coloured due to interference of light. What should be the order of magnitude of
thickness of oil layer in order that this effect may be observed?
a) 10,000 Å b) 1 cm
c) 10 Å d) 100 Å
21. A beam of light of wavelength 600 nm from a distant source falls on a single slit 1 mm wide and the
resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2 m away. The distance between the first dark fringes
on either side of the central bright fringe is
a) 1.2 cm b) 1.2 mm
c) 2.4 cm d) 2.4 mm
22. Which if the following phenomena is not common to sound and light waves?
a) Interference b) Diffraction
c) Coherence d) Polarisation
23. How fast a person should drive his car so that the red signal of light appears green?

Page|2
 (Wavelength for red colour = 6200Å and wavelength for green colour = 5400Å)
a) 1.5 × 10) 𝑚/𝑠 b) 7 × 10& 𝑚/𝑠
&
c) 3.9 × 10 𝑚/𝑠 d) 2 × 10) 𝑚/𝑠
24. In Fresnel’s biprism experiment is held in water instead of air, then what will be the effect on fringe width
a) Decreases b) Increases
c) No effect d) None of these
25. In Young’s double slit interference experiment, the slit separation is made 3 fold. The fringe width
becomes
a) 1/3 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠 b) 1/9 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠
c) 3 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠 d) 9 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠
26. In a Young’s double slit experiment using red and blue lights of wavelengths 600 nm and 480 nm
respectively, the value of 𝑛 from which the 𝑛+, red fringe coincides with (𝑛 + 1) the blue fringe is
a) 5 b) 4
c) 3 d) 2
27. In Fresnel’s biprism (𝜇 = 1.5) experiment the distance between source and biprism is 0.3 𝑚 and that
between biprism and screen is 0.7𝑚 and angle of prism is 1°. The fringe width with light of wavelength
6000 Å will be
a) 3 𝑐𝑚 b) 0.011 𝑐𝑚
c) 2 𝑐𝑚 d) 4 𝑐𝑚
28. A parallel monochromatic beam of light is incident normally on a narrow slit. A diffraction pattern is
formed on a screen placed perpendicular to the direction of incident beam. At the first maximum of the
diffraction pattern, the phase difference between the rays coming from the edges of the slit is
a) 0 𝜋
b)
2
c) 𝜋 d) 2𝜋
29. A rocket is moving away from the earth at a speed of 6 × 10& 𝑚/𝑠. The rocket has blue light in it. What will
be the wavelength of light recorded by an observer on the earth (wavelength of blue light = 4600 Å)
a) 4600 Å b) 5520 Å
c) 3680 Å d) 3920 Å
30. Light of wavelength 𝜆 = 5000 Å falls normally on a narrow slit. A screen placed at a distance of 1𝑚 from
the slit and perpendicular to the direction of light. The first minima of the diffraction pattern is situated at
5 𝑚𝑚 from the centre of central maximum. The width of the slit is
a) 0.1 𝑚𝑚 b) 1.0 𝑚𝑚
c) 0.5 𝑚𝑚 d) 0.2 𝑚𝑚
31. "$
A thin mica sheet of thickness 2 × 10 𝑚 and refractive index (𝜇 = 1.5) is introduced in the path of the
first wave. The wavelength of the wave used is 5000 Å. The central bright maximum will shift
a) 2 fringes upward b) 2 fringes downward
c) 10 fringes upward d) None of these
32. The distance between the first dark and bright band formed in Young’s double slit experiment with band
width B is
𝐵 b) B
a)
4
𝐵 3𝐵
c) d)
2 2
33. A plane wave of wavelength 6250 Å is incident normally on a slit of width 2 × 10"% cm. The width of the
principal maximum on a screen distant 50 cm will be
a) 312.5 × 10"- cm b) 312.5 × 10"' cm
c) 312 cm d) 312.5 × 10"( cm
34. Maximum diffraction takes place in a given slit for
a) 𝛾 − rays b) Ultraviolet light
c) Infrared light d) Radiowaves
Page|3
35. In Fresnel’s biprism experiment, on increasing the prism angle, fringe width will
a) Increase b) Decrease
c) Remain unchanged d) Depend on the position of object
SECTION-B
36. A slit 5 cm wide is irradiated normally with microwaves of wavelength 1.0 cm. Then the angular spread of
the central maximum on either side if incident light is nearly
a) 1/5 rad b) 4 rad
c) 5 rad d) 6 rad
37. Which of the following phenomena can explain quantum nature of light
a) Photoelectric effect b) Interference
c) Diffraction d) Polarization
38. In the set up shown in figure, the two slits 𝑆# and 𝑆% are not equidistant from the slit S. The central fringe at
O is, then

a) Always bright b) Always dark

c) Either dark or bright depending on the position d) Neither dark nor bright
of S
39. The 21 𝑐𝑚 radio wave emitted by hydrogen in interstellar space is due to the interaction called the
hyperfine interaction is atomic hydrogen. the energy of the emitted wave is nearly
a) 10"#& 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 b) 1 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒
")
c) 7 × 10 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 d) 10"%' 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒
40. Irreducible phase difference in any wave of 5000 Å from a source of light is
a) 𝜋 b) 12𝜋
$
c) 12𝜋 × 10 d) 𝜋 × 10$
41. In an electromagnetic wave, the amplitude of electric field is 1 𝑉/𝑚, the frequency of wave is 5 × 10#' 𝐻𝑧.
The wave is propagating along 𝑧-axis. The average energy density of electric field, in 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒/𝑚- , will be
a) 1.1 × 10"## b) 2.2 × 10"#%
c) 3.3 × 10"#- d) 4.4 × 10"#'
42. In Young’s double slit experiment a minima is observed when path difference between the interfering
beam is
a) 𝜆 b) 1.5𝜆
c) 2𝜆 d) 2.25𝜆
43. The limit of resolution of an optical instrument arises on account of
a) Reflection b) Diffraction
c) Polarization d) Interference
44. Fringes are obtained with the help of a biprism in the focal plane of an eyepiece distance 1 m from the slit.
A convex lens produces images of the slit in two positions between biprism and eyepiece. The distances
between two images of the slit in two positions are4.05 × 10"- m and 2.90 × 10"- m respectively. The
distance between the slits will be
a) 3.43 × 10"- m b) 0.343m
c) 0.0343m d) 43.3m
45. When one of the slits of Young’s experiment is covered with a transparent sheet of thickness 4.8 𝑚𝑚, the
central fringe shifts to a position originally occupied by the 30./ bright fringe. What should be the
thickness of the sheet if the central fringe has to shift to the position occupied by 20./ bright fringe
a) 3.8 𝑚𝑚 b) 1.6 𝑚𝑚
Page|4
 c) 7.6 𝑚𝑚 d) 3.2 𝑚𝑚
46. The phenomenon of diffraction of light was discovered by
a) Huyghen b) Newton
c) Fresnel d) Grimaldi
47. Light of wavelength 6000 Å falls on a single slit of width 0.1 mm. The second minimum will be formed for
the angle of diffraction of
a) 0.08 rad b) 0.06 rad
c) 0.12 rad d) 0.012 rad
48. Light waves travel in vacuum along the 𝑦 – axis. Which of the following may represent the wavefront?
a) 𝑦 = constant b) 𝑥 = constant
c) 𝑧 = constant d) 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 = constant
49. In Young’s double alit experiment, the seventh maximum with wavelength 𝜆# is at a distance 𝑑# and the
same maximum with wavelength 𝜆% is at distance𝑑% . Then 𝑑# /𝑑% =
𝜆# 𝜆%
a) b)
𝜆% 𝜆#
𝜆#% 𝜆%%
c) % d) %
𝜆% 𝜆#
50. Red light is generally used to observe diffraction pattern from single slit. If blue light is used instead of red
light, then diffraction pattern
a) Will be more clear b) Will contract
c) Will expanded d) Will not be visualized

Page|5
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) d 2) c 3) b 4) a 29) b 30) a 31) a 32) c
5) d 6) c 7) d 8) b 33) a 34) d 35) b 36) a
9) b 10) b 11) c 12) a 37) a 38) c 39) d 40) a
13) a 14) d 15) a 16) b 41) b 42) b 43) b 44) a
17) d 18) a 19) d 20) a 45) d 46) d 47) d 48) a
21) d 22) d 23) c 24) b 49) a 50) b
25) a 26) b 27) b 28) d

Page|6
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
2 (c) 11 (c)
𝜆 The angular wave number 𝑘 =
%D
; where 𝜆
𝑒 sin θ = 𝜆 ⇒ sin θ ≈ θ = 1
𝑒
is the wave length. The angular frequency
𝑓𝜆 is 𝑤 = 2𝜋𝑣
𝑥 = 𝑓, θ = E %D/1 # #
𝑒 The ratio F = = H1 = I = constant
%DH
∴ 2𝑥 = separation between minima on 12 (a)
either side of central maximum’ 1
𝐼 = 𝜀! 𝐶𝐸!%
2
2𝑓𝜆
= 2𝐼 2 × 5 × 10"#$
𝑒 ⇒ 𝐸! = › =›
𝜀! 𝑐 8.85 × 10"#% × 3 × 10)
%01
Hence, 𝑒 = 𝑉
%2 = 0.61 × 10"$
𝑚
2 × 1 × 600 × 10"* Also 𝐸! =
J!
⇒ 𝑉! = 𝐸! 𝑑 = 0.61 × 10"$ ×
= = 0.3 mm :
4 × 10"- 2 = 1.23𝜇𝑉
3 (b) 13 (a)
𝜆𝐷 The diffraction pattern of light waves of
𝛽= wavelength (𝜆) diffracted by a single, long
𝑑
4 (a) narrow slit of width is shown. For first
𝜆𝐷 minimum.
𝛽= ⇒𝛽∝𝜆
𝑑
5 (d) 𝑒 sin θ = λ
Ultrasonic waves are longitudinal waves
λ
6 (c) sin θ =
% % e
𝐼345 = ‘’𝐼# + ’𝐼% “ = ‘√𝐼 + √4𝐼“ = 9𝐼
% %
𝐼367 = ‘’𝐼# − ’𝐼% “ = ‘√𝐼 − √4𝐼“ = 𝐼
7 (d)
𝜆89: > 𝜆;<=9 > 𝜆>"?@A > 𝜆B
8 (b)
Distance of 𝑛+, minima from central bright
fringe
(2𝑛 − 1)𝜆𝐷
𝑥C =
2𝑑
For 𝑛 = 3 𝑖. 𝑒. 3?: minima
(2 × 3 − 1) × 500 × 10"* × 1
𝑥- =
2 × 1 × 10"- When 𝑒 is decreased for same wavelength,
5 × 500 × 10"$
= = 1.25 × 10"- 𝑚 sin θ increases, hence θ increases. Thus,
2
width of central maxima will increase.
= 1.25 𝑚𝑚
9 (b) 14 (d)
Infrasonic waves are mechanical waves Intensity of EM wave is given by
10 (b) 𝑃 1
EM waves transport energy, momentum 𝐼= %
= 𝑣@H . 𝑐 = 𝜀! 𝐸!% × 𝑐
4𝜋𝑅 2
and information but not charge. EM waves
𝑃
are unchanged ⇒ 𝐸! = ›
2𝜋𝑅% 𝜀! 𝑐

Page|7
 22 (d)
800
=› Sound waves cannot be polarised as they
2 × 3.14 × (4) × 8.85 × 10"#% × 3 × 10)
%
are longitudinal. Light waves can be
𝑉 polarised as they are transverse.
= 54.77
𝑚
15 (a) 23 (c)
(1
For secondary maxima 𝑑 sin 𝜃 = Doppler shift (Source moving towards
%
𝑥 5𝜆 observer)
⇒ 𝑑𝜃 = 𝑑. = 𝑉
𝐷(≈ 𝑓) 2 𝜆K = 𝜆 ¢1 − £
5𝜆𝑓 5 × 0.8 × 6 × 10"& 𝐶
⇒ 2𝑥 = = 𝑉
𝑑 4 × 10"' 5400Å = 6200Å ¢1 − £
𝐶
= 6 × 10"- 𝑚 = 6𝑚𝑚 54
17 (d) 𝑉 = ¤1 − ¥ 𝐶 = 3.9 × 10& approx
62
Distance of 𝑛th dark fringe from central 24 (b)
fringe (𝑎 + 𝑏)𝜆 𝜆
(2𝑛 − 1)𝜆𝐷 𝛽= , 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝛽 ∝
𝑥C = 2𝑎(𝜇 − 1)𝛼 (𝜇 − 1)
2𝑑 "
(2 × 2 − 1)𝜆𝐷 3𝜆𝐷 #$
When placed in water 𝛽′ ∝
∴ 𝑥% = = #
L $ "#M
2𝑑 2𝑑 #

3𝜆 × 1 1
𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝛽′ ∝ (O"OK) but < 𝜇
⇒ 1 × 10"- =
2 × 0.9 × 10"-
"( 𝛽K (𝜇 − 1)
⇒ 𝜆 = 6 × 10 cm ∴ = ∵ 𝜇K > 1𝜆 ∴ 𝛽K > 𝛽
18 (a) 𝛽 (𝜇 − 𝜇′)
For second dark fringe 𝑑 sin 𝜃 = 2𝜆 𝑖. 𝑒., the fringe width increases
25 (a)
⇒ 24 × 10"( × 10"% × sin 30 = 2𝜆 #
⇒ 𝜆 = 6 × 10"& 𝑚 = 6000 Å 𝛽 ∝ : ⇒ If 𝑑 becomes thrice, then 𝛽
#
19 (d) becomes - times
Momentum transferred in one second 26 (b)
2𝑈 2𝑆@H 𝐴 2 × 6 × 40 × 10"' 𝑛𝜆? = (𝑛 + 1)𝜆Q
𝑝= = =
𝑐 𝑐 3 × 10)
"#! % 𝑛 + 1 𝜆? 600 4
= 1.6 × 10 𝑘𝑔 − 𝑚/𝑠
= = =
20 (a) 𝑛 𝜆Q 480 5
Oil floating on water looks coloured only
1 4 1
when thickness of oil layer=wavelength of = −1= 𝑛 =4
𝑛 5 4
light=10000Å
27 (b)
21 (d)
(𝑎 + 𝑏)𝜆
𝜆𝐷 600 × 10"* × 2 𝛽=
𝛽= = = 12 × 10"' m 2𝑎(𝜇 − 1)𝛼
𝑑 1 × 10"- Where 𝑎 = distance between source and
So, distance between the first dark fringes biprism = 0.3 𝑚
on either side of the central bright fringe 𝑏 = distance between biprism and screen
= 0.7 𝑚
= 2𝛽 𝛼 = Angle of prism = 1°, 𝜇 = 1.5, 𝜆 =
6000 × 10"#! 𝑚
= 2 × 12 × 10"' m (!.-S!.&)×$×#!%&
Hence, 𝛽 = '
%×!.-(#.("#)×L#°× M
= 24 × 10"' m ()!

= 1.14 × 10"' 𝑚 = 0.0114 𝑐𝑚

= 2.4 mm 28 (d)

Page|8
 The phase difference (ϕ) between the Width of central maximum=
%1X
@
wavelets from the top edge and the
%V
bottom edge of the slit is ϕ = (𝑑 sin θ) 2 × 6250 × 10"#! × 0.5
W =
where d is the slit width. The first minima 2 × 10"'
of the diffraction pattern occurs at sin θ =
1 %D 1
, so ϕ = -𝑑 × : ® = 2𝜋
: 1
312.5 × 10"- cm
29 (b)
Δ𝜆 𝑣 6 × 10&
= = = 0.2
𝜆 𝑐 3 × 10) 34 (d)
Δ𝜆 = 𝜆K − 𝜆 = 0.2𝜆 ⇒ 𝜆K = 1.2𝜆 Greater is the wavelength of wave higher
= 1.2 × 4600 = 5520Å will be its degree of diffraction.
30 (a)
Position of n./ minima 𝑥C =
C1X 35 (b)
: #
1 × 5000 × 10"#! ×1 Fringe width (𝛽) ∝
Z[6\3 ^7_`a (b)
⇒ 5 × 10"- =
𝑑 36 (a)
⇒ 𝑑 = 10"' 𝑚 = 0.1 𝑚𝑚 Angular spread on either side is θ = @ =
W

31 (a) #
Y Y rad
Shift = 1 (𝜇 − 1)𝑡 = ((!!!×#!%(! ) × (1.5 − (

1) × 2 × 10"$ 37 (a)
= 2𝛽 𝑖. 𝑒. ,2 fringes upwards Photoelectric effect explain the quantum
32 (c) nature of light while interference,
C1X diffraction and polarization explain the
Position of nth bright fringe 𝑥# =
:
wave nature of light
For first bright fringe 𝑛 = 1 38 (c)
Path difference, 𝑥 = (𝑆𝑆# + 𝑆# 𝑂) − (𝑆𝑆% +
𝜆𝐷 𝑆% 𝑂)
∴ 𝑥# =
𝑑
If𝑥 = 𝑛𝜆, the central fringe at O will be
(%C"#)1X
Position of nth dark fringe 𝑥% = %: bright. If𝑥 = (2𝑛 − 1)𝜆/2, the central
fringe at O will be dark.
For first dark fringe 𝑛 = 1
39 (d)
𝜆𝐷 ℎ𝑐 6.6 × 10"-' × 3 × 10)
∴ 𝑥% = 𝐸= =
2𝑑 𝜆 21 × 10"%
1X = 0.94 × 10"%' = 10"%' 𝐽
Now, 𝑥# − 𝑥% = %: 41 (b)
Average energy density of electric field is
If B is the band width, then
given by
𝐵 1 1 𝐸! % 1
𝑥# − 𝑥% = 𝑢9 = 𝜀! 𝐸 % = 𝜀! ¢ £ = 𝜀! 𝐸!%
2 2 2 √2 4
1
33 (a) = × 8.85 × 10"#% (1)%
4
Here, 𝜆 = 6250 Å = 6250 × 10"#! m = 2.2 × 10"#% 𝐽/𝑚-
𝑎 = 2 × 10"% cm = 2 × 10"' m 44 (a)
Distance between the slits,
𝐷 = 50 cm = 0.5 m

Page|9
 𝑑 = ’𝑑# 𝑑% = ’4.05 × 10"- × 2.90 × 10"- 2 × 6 × 10"&
θ=
1 × 10"'
= 3.427 × 10"- m θ = 12 × 10"-
θ = 0.012 rad
45 (d) 48 (a)
If shift is equivalent to 𝑛 fringes then As velocity of light is perpendicular to the
(𝜇 − 1)𝑡 𝑡% 𝑛% wavefront, and light is travelling in
𝑛= ⇒𝑛∝𝑡⇒ = ⇒ 𝑡%
𝜆 𝑡# 𝑛# vacuum along the𝑦 − axis, therefore, the
𝑛%
= ×𝑡 wavefront is represented by𝑦 = constant.
𝑛#
20 49 (a)
𝑡% = × 4.8 = 3.2𝑚𝑚
30 𝐷
47 (d) 𝑑# = 7𝜆#
𝑑
Given single slit of width 𝑑 = 0.1 mm
X
𝑑 = 0.1 × 10"- m And 𝑑% = 7𝜆% :
Or 𝑑 = 1 × 10"' m
Light of wavelength 𝑎 = 600 Å 𝑑# 𝜆#
∴ =
Or 𝛼 = 6 × 10"& m 𝑑% 𝜆%
The angle of diffraction
50 (b)
𝑛𝜆
θ= 𝜆c`da < 𝜆eaf . Therefore fringe pattern will
𝑑
contract because fringe width ∝ 𝜆

P a g e | 10
 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. If light of wavelength 𝜆! is allowed to fall on a metal, then kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted is 𝐸! . If
wavelength of light changes to 𝜆" then kinetic energy of electrons changes to 𝐸" . Then work function of the
metal is
𝐸! 𝐸" (𝜆! − 𝜆" ) 𝐸! 𝜆! − 𝐸" 𝜆"
a) b)
𝜆! 𝜆" (𝜆! − 𝜆" )
𝐸! 𝜆! − 𝐸" 𝜆" 𝜆! 𝜆" 𝐸! 𝐸"
c) d)
(𝜆" − 𝜆! ) (𝜆" − 𝜆! )
2. Vidicon works on the principle of
a) Electrical conductivity b) Photoconductivity
c) Thermal conductivity d) SONAR
3. If the kinetic energy of the particle is increased by 16 times, the percentage change in the de Broglie
wavelength of the particle is
a) 25% b) 75%
c) 60% d) 50%
4. The 𝑋-ray wavelength of 𝐿# line of platinum (𝑍 = 78) is 1.30Å. The 𝑋-ray wavelength of 𝐿# line of
Molybdenum (𝑍 = 42) is
a) 5.41 Å b) 4.20 Å
c) 2.70 Å d) 1.35 Å
5. There are 𝑛! photons of frequency 𝑣! in a beam of light. In an equally energetic beam there are 𝑛" photons
of frequency 𝑣" . Then the correct relation
𝑛! 𝑣! 𝑛!
a) = b) =1
𝑛" 𝑣" 𝑛"
𝑛! 𝑣" 𝑛! 𝑣""
c) = d) =
𝑛" 𝑣! 𝑛" 𝑣!"
6. Photons of energy of 6 eV are incident on a metal surface whose work function is 4 eV. The minimum
kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons will be
a) Zero b) 1 eV
c) 2 eV d) 10 eV
7. For the production of 𝑋-rays, the target should be made of
a) Steel b) Copper
c) Aluminimum d) Tungsten
8. Irreducible area 𝑎 𝑏 𝑐 𝑑, in figure is
 a) Work b) Plank’s constant
c) Joule d) Charge
9. Bragg’s law for 𝑋-rays is
a) 𝑑 sin 𝜃 = 2𝑛𝜆 b) 2𝑑 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜆
c) 𝑛 sin 𝜃 = 2𝜆𝑑 d) None of these
10. A tiny spherical oil drop carrying a net charge 𝑞 is balanced in still air with vertical uniform electric field of
$!%
strength × 10' Vm(! .When the field is switched off, the drop is observed to fall with terminal
&
velocity 2 × 10() ms(! . Given g = 9.8 ms(" , viscosity of the air =1.8 × 10(' Ns m(" and the density of oil =
900 kg m() , the magnitude of 𝑞 is
a) 1.6 × 10(!* C b) 3.2 × 10(!* C
c) 4.8 × 10 (!* d) 8.0× 10(!* C
C
11. A parallel beam of light is incident normally on a plane surface absorbing 40% of the light and reflecting
the rest. If the incident beam carries 60 W of power, the force exerted by it on the surface is
a) 3.2 × 10($ N b) 3.2 × 10(& N
c) 5.12 × 10(& N d) 5.12 × 10($ N
12. From the figure describing photoelectric effect we may infer correctly that

a) Na and Al both have the same threshold b) Maximum kinetic energy for both the metals depend
frequency linearly on the frequency
c) The stopping potentials are different for Na and d) Al is a better photo sensitive material than Na
Al for the same change in frequency
13. The characteristic X-rays radiation is emitted, when
a) The electrons are accelerated to a fixed energy b) The source of electrons emits a monoenergetic beam
c) The bombarding electrons knock out electrons d) The valence electrons in the target atoms are
from the inner shell of the target atoms and one removed as a result of the collision
of the outer electrons falls into this vacancy
14. In 𝑋-ray experiment 𝐾# , 𝐾+ denotes
a) Characteristic b) Continuous wavelength
c) 𝛼, 𝛽-emissions respectively d) None of these
15. The electrons are emitted in the photoelectric effect from a metal surface
a) Only if the frequency of the incident radiation is b) Only if the temperature of the surface is high
above a certain threshold value
c) At a rate that is independent of the nature of d) With a maximum velocity proportional to the
the metal frequency of the incident radiation
16. The ratio of the energy of an 𝑋-ray photon of wavelength 1 Å to that of visible light of wavelength 5000 Å
is
a) 1 :5000 b) 5000 :1

Page|2
 c) 1: 25 × 10, d) 25 × 10,
17. What is the de-Broglie wavelength (in Å) of the α-particle accelerated through a potential difference 𝑉?
0.287 12.27
a) b)
√𝑉 √𝑉
0.101 0.22
c) d)
√𝑉 √𝑉
18. The ratio of the energy of a photon with 𝜆 = 150 nm to that with 𝜆 = 300 nm is
a) 2 1
b)
4
c) 4 1
d)
2
19. Who discovered the charge on an electron for the first time?
a) Millikan b) Thomson
c) Kelvin d) Coulomb
20. The potential difference applied to an X-ray tube is 5 kV and the current through it is 3.2 mA. The number
of electrons striking the target per second is (Take 𝑒 =1.6 × 10(!* C)
a) 1.6 × 10, b) 2 × 10(,
c) 4 × 10 !, d) 2 × 10!,
21. An important spectral emission line has a wavelength of 21cm. The corresponding photon energy is (ℎ =
6.62 × 10()- Js and 𝑐 = 3 × 10$ ms(! )
a) 5.9 × 10($ eV b) 5.9 × 10(- eV
(,
c) 5.9 × 10 eV d) 11.8 × 10(, eV
22. Cathode rays are similar to visible light rays as
a) They both can be deflected by electric and b) They both have a definite magnitude of wavelength
magnetic fields
c) They both can ionize a gas through which they d) They both can expose a photographic plate
pass
23. Photoelectric effect is an example of
a) Elastic collision b) Inelastic collision
c) Two dimensional collision d) Oblique collision
24. Which of the following supports the wave nature of X-rays?
a) Photoelectric effect b) Photosynthesis
c) Compton scattering d) Diffraction
25. When a cathode ray tube is operated at 2912 V, the velocity of electrons is
3.2 × 10& m/s. Find the velocity of cathode ray if the tube is operated at 5824 V
a) 2.4 × 10& m/s b) 5.2 × 10& m/s
c) 4.525 × 10& m/s d) 2.4 × 10, m/s
26. Momentum of a photon of wavelength 𝜆 is
a) ℎ/𝜆 b) ℎ𝜆/𝑐 "
c) ℎ 𝜆/𝑐 d) Zero
27. The frequency of a photon, having energy 100 𝑒𝑉 is (ℎ = 6.6 × 10()- 𝐽-𝑠)
a) 2.42 × 10", 𝐻𝑧 b) 2.42 × 10!, 𝐻𝑧
c) 2.42 × 10!" 𝐻𝑧 d) 2.42 × 10* 𝐻𝑧
28. The wavelength 𝜆 of the 𝐾# line of characteristic X-rays spectra varies with atomic number approximately
a) 𝜆 ∝ 𝑍 b) 𝜆 ∝ √𝑍
1 1
c) 𝜆 ∝ " d) 𝜆 ∝
𝑍 √𝑍
29. The stopping potential (𝑉. )
a) Depends upon the angle of incident light b) Depends upon the intensity of incident light
c) Depends upon the surface nature of the d) Is independent of the intensity of the incident light
substances
Page|3
30. Energy required to remove an electron from an aluminium surface is 4.2 eV. If light of wavelength 2000 Å
falls on the surface, the velocity of fastest electrons ejected from the surface is
a) 2.5 × 10!$ ms(! b) 2.5 × 10!) ms(!
c) 6.7 × 10!$ ms(! d) None of these
31. The photoelectric threshold wavelength for potassium (work function being 2 𝑒𝑉) is
a) 310 𝑛𝑚 b) 620 𝑛𝑚
c) 1200 𝑛𝑚 d) 2100 𝑛𝑚
32. The photo-electrons emitted from a surface of sodium metal are such that
a) They all are of the same frequency b) They have the same kinetic energy
c) They have the same de Broglie wavelength d) They have their speeds varying from zero to a
certain maximum
33. X-rays of wavelength 0.140 nm are scattered from a block of carbon. What will be the wavelenghts of X-
rays scattered at 90. ?
a) 0.140 nm b) 0.142 nm
c) 0.144 nm d) 0.146 nm
34. The minimum wavelength of 𝑋-ray emitted by 𝑋-rays tube is 0.4125 Å. The accelerating voltage is
a) 30 𝑘𝑉 b) 50 𝑘𝑉
c) 80 𝑘𝑉 d) 60 𝑘𝑉
35. Light of wavelength 5000 Å falls on a sensitive plate with photoelectric work functional of 1.9 eV. The
kinetic energy of the photoelectron emitted will be
a) 0.58 eV b) 2.48 eV
c) 1.24 eV d) 1.16 eV
36. Electron with energy 80 keV are incident on the tungsten target of a 𝑋-rays tube. 𝐾 shell electrons of
tungsten have −72.5 keV energy. 𝑋-rays emitted by the tube contain only
A continuous 𝑋-rays spectrum
A continuous 𝑋-ray spectrum (Bremsstrahlung) with
a) (Bremsstrahlung) with a minimum wavelengthb)
all wavelengths
of ~0.155Å
A continuous 𝑋-rays spectrum (Bremsstrahlung)
c) The characteristic 𝑋-rays spectrum of tungsten d) with a minimum wavelength of ~0.155 Å and the
characteristic 𝑋-rays spectrum of tungsten
37. For harder 𝑋-rays
a) The wavelength is higher b) The intensity is higher
c) The frequency is higher d) The frequency is higher
38. In an ionisation experiment it is found that a doubly ionised particle enters a magnetic field of 1 T and moves
in a circular path of radius 1 m with a speed of 1.6 × 10& ms(! . The particle must be
a) C// b) Be//
//
c) Li d) He//
39. A proton of mass 1.67 × 10("& kg enters a uniform magnetic field of 1 T at point 𝐴 as shown in figure, with
a speed of 10& ms(! . The magnetic field is directed normal to the plane of paper downwards. The proton
emerges out of the magnetic field at point 𝐶, then the distance 𝐴𝐶 and the value of angle θ will respectively
be

a) 0.7 m, 45° b) 0.7 m, 90°

c) 0.14 m, 90° d) 0.14 m, 45°
40. The value of Plank energy is

Page|4
 𝑛ℎ𝑐
a) b) 𝑛ℎ𝜆
𝜆
𝑛ℎ𝜆
c) 𝑛ℎ𝑐𝜆 d)
𝑐
41. A uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field are acting along the same direction in a certain
region. If an electron is projected along the direction of the fields with a certain velocity, then
a) Its velocity will decrease b) Its velocity will increase
c) It will turn towards right of direction of motion d) It will turns towards left of direction of motion
42. Among the following four spectral regions, the photons has the highest energy in
a) Infrared b) Violet
c) Red d) Blue
43. A caesium photocell, with a steady potential difference of 60𝑉 across, is illuminated by a bright point
source of light 50 𝑐𝑚 away. When the same light is placed 1𝑚 away the photoelectrons emitted from the
cell
a) Are one quarter as numerous b) Are half as numerous
c) Each carry one quarter of their previous d) Each carry one quarter of their previous energy
momentum
44. Hard X-ray for the study of fractures in bones should have a minimum wavelength of 10(!! m. The
accelerating voltage for electrons in X-ray machine should be
a) <124 kV b) >124 kV
c) Between 60 kV and 70 kV d) =100 kV
45. Which one of the following is true in photoelectric emission
a) Photoelectric current is directly proportional to b) Phototelectric current is directly proportional to the
the amplitude of light of a given frequency intensity of light of a given frequency at moderate
intensities
c) Above the threshold frequency, the maximum d) The threshold frequency depends upon the
K.E. of photoelectrons is inversely proportional wavelength of incident light
to the frequency of incident light
46. Which of the following is dependent on the intensity of incident radiation in a photoelectric experiment
a) Work function of the surface b) Amount of photoelectric current
c) Stopping potential will be reduced d) Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons
47. X-rays are
a) Stream of electrons b) Stream of positively charged particles
c) Electromagnetic radiantions of high frequency d) Stream of uncharged particles
48. An 𝛼-particle moves in a circular path of radius 0.83 𝑐𝑚 in the presence of a magnetic field of 0.25 𝑊𝑏/𝑚" .
The de Broglie wavelength associated with the particle will be
a) 1 Å b) 0.1 Å
c) 10 Å d) 0.01 Å
49. de-Broglie hypothesis treated electrons as
a) Particles b) Waves
c) Both ′𝑎′ and ′𝑏′ d) None of these
(!$
50. A particle of charge −16 × 10 C moving with velocity 10 ms(! along the 𝑥-axis enters a region where a
magnetic field of induction B is along the y-axis and an electric field of magnitude 10- Vm(! is along the
negative z-axis. If the charged particle continues moving along the x-axis, the magnitude of B is
a) 10) Wbm(" b) 10' Wbm("
c) 10!, Wbm(" d) 10() Wbm("

Page|5
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) c 2) b 3) b 4) a 29) d 30) d 31) b 32) d
5) c 6) a 7) d 8) b 33) b 34) a 35) a 36) d
9) b 10) d 11) b 12) b 37) c 38) a 39) d 40) a
13) c 14) a 15) a 16) b 41) a 42) b 43) a 44) a
17) c 18) a 19) a 20) d 45) b 46) b 47) c 48) d
21) c 22) d 23) b 24) d 49) c 50) a
25) c 26) a 27) b 28) c

Page|6
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :

1 (c) 𝑞𝐸 = 𝑚g … (i)
ℎ𝑐 ℎ𝑐 6𝜋η 𝑟𝑣 = 𝑚g
𝐸 = 𝑊. + 𝐾012 ⇒ = 𝑊. + 𝐸! and -
𝜆! 𝜆" 𝜋𝑟 ) ρg = 𝑚g … (ii)
)
= 𝑊. + 𝐸"
)56 !/)
⇒ ℎ𝑐 = 𝑊. 𝜆! + 𝐸! 𝜆! and ℎ𝑐 = 𝑊. 𝜆" + 𝐸" 𝜆" ∴ 𝑟 = £-786¤ … (𝑖𝑖𝑖)
⇒ 𝑊. 𝜆! + 𝐸! 𝜆! = 𝑊. 𝜆" + 𝐸" 𝜆" ⇒ 𝑊. Substituting the value of r in Eq. (ii), we get
𝐸! 𝜆! − 𝐸" 𝜆" )56 !/)
= 6𝜋η𝑣 £-7:6¤ = 𝑚g
(𝜆" − 𝜆! )
2 (b) )56
or (6𝜋η𝑣)) £ ¤ = (𝑚g))
-786
Vidicon is basically 𝑉𝐼𝐷 (𝑒𝑜) + 𝐼𝐶𝑂𝑁 (oscope). It
Again substituting 𝑚g = qE, we get
is a small televison camera tube that forms a )
charge density image on a photoconductive (𝑞𝐸)" = £ ¤ (6𝜋η𝑣))
-%86
surface for subsequent electron-beam scanning ) !/"
Or 𝑞𝐸 = £-%86¤ (6𝜋ηg))/"
3 (b)
!

ℎ 𝜆! 𝐾" 16𝐾 1 3 "

𝜆= ⇒ =˜ =˜ =4 ∴ 𝑞= š › (6𝜋η𝑣))/"
𝐸 4𝜋ρg
√2𝑚𝐾 𝜆" 𝐾! 𝐾
Substituting the values, we get
𝜆! 𝜆! 100
= 4 ⇒ 𝜆" = = = 25 7 3
𝜆" 4 4 ˜
𝑞= '
× 216𝜋 )
4𝜆 = 100 − 25 = 75% 81𝜋 × 10 4𝜋 × 900 × 9.8
4 (a) × ¦(1.8 × 10(' × 2 × 10() )) =
The wave length of 𝐿# line is given by (!*
8.0 × 10 C
1 1 1
= 𝑅(𝑧 − 7.4)" š " − " › 11 (b)
𝜆 2 3
1 Momentum of incident light per second
⇒𝜆∝ 𝐸 60
(𝑍 − 7.4)" 𝑝! = = = 2 × 10(&
𝑐 3 × 10$
𝜆! (𝑧" − 7.4)" 1.30 (42 − 7.4)"
⇒ = ⇒ = Momentum of reflected light per second
𝜆" (𝑧! − 7.4)" 𝜆" (78 − 7.4)" 60 𝐸 60
⇒ 𝜆" = 5.41 Å 𝑝" = × = = 1.2 × 10(&
100 𝑐 3 × 10$
5 (c) Force on the surface = change in momentum per
Here, 𝐸! = 𝐸" second
𝑛! ℎ𝑣! = 𝑛" ℎ𝑣" = 𝑝" − (−𝑝! ) = 𝑝" + 𝑝! = (2 + 1.2) × 10(& =
3! 4
So, = " 3.2 × 10(& N
3" 4!
6 (a) 12 (b)
1 The graph between stopping potential and
𝑚𝑣 " = ℎ𝑣 − ϕ. = ℎ𝑣 − ℎ𝑣. frequency is a straight line, so stopping potential
2
For minimum kinetic energy of emitted and hence, maximum kinetic energy of
photoelectron, photoelectrons depends linearly on the
𝑣 = 𝑣. frequency.
1 15 (a)
∴ 𝑚𝑣 " = 0
2 Refer to threshold frequency
7 (d) 16 (b)
Target should be of high atomic number and high Energy 𝐸 = ℎ𝑣 = ℎ
;
∴
=!
=
<"
=
'...
< =" <! !
melting point
10 (d) 17 (c)

Page|7
 ℎ ℎ Stopping potential depends upon the energy of
𝜆= =
𝑚𝑣 √2𝑚𝑒𝑉 photon
6.6 × 10#$% 30 (d)
=
'2 × (4 × 1.66 × 10#&' ) × (2 × 1.6 × 10#() ) × 𝑉 1 ℎ𝑐
0.101 𝑚𝑣 " = − ϕ(in eV)
= 2 𝜆
√𝑉 6.6 × 10()- × 3 × 10$
= − 4.2
18 (a) 2000 × 10(!. × 1.6 × 10(!*
According to Einstein, the energy of photon is = 2eV = 2 × 1.6 × 10(!* J
given by 𝑣 = ¦2 × 2 × 1.6 × 10(!* /9.1 × 10()!
>;
𝐸 = ℎ𝑣 = = ¦6.4/9.1 = 10, ms(!
<
Where ℎ is Planck’s constant, 𝑐 the speed of light 31 (b)
and 𝜆 the wavelength. 12375 12375
𝜆. = = = 6187.5Å ≃ 620 𝑛𝑚
𝐸! 𝜆" 𝑊.(?C) 2
∴ =
𝐸" 𝜆! 33 (b)
Given, 𝜆! = 150 nm , 𝜆 = 300nm For ϕ = 90. , cos ϕ = 0
=! ).. " >
∴ ="
= !'. = ! So, 𝜆F = 𝜆 + 5
/;
20 (d) ,.,)×!.*+,
3?
= 0.140× 10(* + (*.!×!.*+! )()×!.- )
Current 𝑖= @ = (0.140 × 10(* + 2.4 × 10(!" ) m =
𝑛 𝑖 3.2 × 10()
⇒ = = = 2 × 10, /s 0.142 nm
𝑡 𝑒 1.6 × 10(!* 34 (a)
21 (c)
12375 12375
>;
𝐸 = ℎ𝑣/𝜆 = ?< (in eV) 𝜆0GH = Å⇒𝑉= = 30 𝑘𝑉
𝑉 0.4125
,.,×!.*+, ×)×!.- 35 (a)
= = 5.9 × 10(, eV
!.,×!.*!. ×.."! ℎ𝑐
22 (d) 𝐸I = − ϕ. (in eV)
𝜆
Light consists of photons and cathode rays 6.6 × 10()- × 3 × 10$
consists of electrons. However both effect the = − 1.9
5000 × 10(!. × 1.6 × 10(!*
photographic plate = 2.48 − 1.9 = 0.58 eV
25 (c) 36 (d)
"?C Since the energy of incident electron, 𝐸 = 80 keV.
𝑣=© 5 The minimum wavelength of 𝑋-rays produced is
Since e, and m are constant, 4! = ©C!
4 C ℎ𝑐 6.6 × 10()- × 3 × 10$
𝜆= =
" "
𝐸 80 × 1000 × 1.6 × 10(!*
or 𝑣" = 𝑣! ©
C!
= 3.2 × 10& ©
'$"- = 1.55 × 10(!. m = 0.155 Å
C" "*!"
Since the energy of K-shell electron is −72.5 keV,
&
=4.525 × 10 m/s so the incident electron of energy 80 keV will not
26 (a) only produce continuous spectrum of minimum
>;
Energy of photon 𝐸 = <
= 𝑚𝑐 " ; wavelength 0.155Å but shell also knock electron
momentum of photon = 𝑚𝑐 = ℎ/𝜆 of 𝐾 shell out of atom, resulting emission of
27 (b) characteristics 𝑋-rays
𝐸 = ℎ𝑣 ⇒ 100 × 1.6 × 10(!* = 6.6 × 10()- × 𝑣 38 (a)
⇒ 𝑣 = 2.42 × 10!, 𝐻𝑧 As 𝑞 𝑣 𝐵 = 𝑚𝑣 " /𝑟
JKL ("×!.,×!.*!. )×!×!
28 (c) or 𝑚 = =
4 !.,×!.0
According to Mosley’s law 𝑣 = 𝑎(𝑍 − 𝑏)" and 𝑣 ∝ 2 × 10",
! = 2 × 10(", kg = = 12
< 1.66 × 10("&
29 (d) Therefore, particle must be c //
39 (d)

Page|8
 From the symmetry of figure, the angle θ = 45°. !"-..×!.*!4
or 𝑉. = =124 kv
!.*!!
The path of moving proton in a normal magnetic
Hence, accelerating voltage for electrons in X–ray
field is circular. If 𝑟 is the radius of the circular
machine should be less than 124 kv.
path, then from the figure,
!
𝐴𝐶 = 2 𝑟 cos 45° = 2𝑟 × = √2𝑟 …(i) 48 (d)
√"
54 " 54 ℎ ℎ
As 𝐵 𝑞 𝑉 = L
or 𝑟 = KJ 𝜆= ⇒𝜆=
𝑝 𝑚𝑣
√2 𝑚𝑣 √2 × 1.67 × 10("& × 10& 𝑚𝑣 1
𝐴𝐶 = = 𝑟= ⇒ 𝑚𝑣 = 𝑞𝑟𝐵 ⇒ (2𝑒)(0.83 × 10(" ) š ›
𝐵𝑞 1 × 1.6 × 10(!* 𝑞𝐵 4
= 0.14 m 6.6 × 10()- × 4
41 (a) 𝜆= ⇒ 𝜆 = 0.01 Å
2 × 1.6 × 10(!* × 0.83 × 10(!"
When E, v and B are all along same direction, 50 (a)
then magnetic force experienced by electron is The force on a particle is
zero while electric force is acting opposite to Y
velocity of electron, so velocity of electron will
decrease. B
42 (b)
>; V
Energy of a photon, 𝐸 = < X
𝜆GHNO1OPQ > 𝜆OPQ > 𝜆RSTP > 𝜆UGVSPW E
Therefore, violet has the highest energy
Z
43 (a)
Number of photo electrons So, 𝑭 = q(𝑬 + 𝒗 × 𝑩)
1 𝑁! 𝑑" " or 𝐅 = 𝐅P + 𝐅0
(𝑁) ∝ Intensity ∝ " ⇒ =š ›
𝑑 𝑁" 𝑑! 𝐅P = q𝐄
"
𝑁! 100 4 𝑁! = −16× 10(!$ × 10- ´−𝑘µ¶
⇒ =š › = ⇒ 𝑁" =
𝑁" 50 1 4 =16× 10(!- 𝑘µ
44 (a) and 𝐅0 =−16 × 10(!$ (10ı̂ × 𝐵ȷ̂)
From conservation of energy the electron kinetic =−16 × 10(!& × 𝐵(+kµ)
energy equals the maximum photon energy (we
=−16 × 10(!& 𝐵 × kµ
neglect the work function ϕ because it is
Since, particle will continue to move along + 𝑥-
normally so small compared to 𝑒𝑉. ).
axis, so resultant force is equal to 0.
𝑒𝑉. = ℎ𝑣max
>;
𝐅P + 𝐅0 = 0
or 𝑒𝑉. = < ∴ 16 × 10(!- = 16 × 10(!& 𝐵
123
ℎ𝑐 !,×!.*!,
∴ 𝑉. = ⇒ 𝐵= !,×!.*!0
= 10)
𝑒𝜆 0GH
𝐵 = 10 Wb-m("
)

Page|9
 Atoms
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. If the wavelength of the first line of the balmer series of hydrogen is 6561Å, the wavelength of the second
line of the series should be
a) 13122 Å b) 3280 Å
c) 4860 Å d) 2187 Å
2. When a hydrogen atom is bombared, the atom is excited to then 𝑛 = 4 state. The energy released, when
the atom goes from 𝑛 = 4 state to the ground state is
a) 1.275 eV b) 12.75 eV
c) 5 eV d) 8 eV
3. The ionization energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6eV. Following Bohr’s theory, the energy corresponding to a
transition between 3rd and 4th orbit is
a) 3.40 eV b) 1.51 eV
c) 0.85 eV d) 0.66 eV
4. Assuming 𝑓to be frequency of first line in Balmer series, the frequency of the immediate next( 𝑖𝑒, second)
line is
a) 0.50 𝑓 b) 1.35 𝑓
c) 2.05 𝑓 d) 2.70 𝑓
5. Continuous emission spectrum is produced by
a) Incandescent electric lamp b) Mercury vapour lamp
c) Sodium vapour lamp d) Polyatomic substances
6. Bohr’s atom model assumes
a) The nucleus is of infinite mass and is at rest b) Electrons in a quantized orbit will not radiate energy
c) Mass of electron remains constant d) All the above conditions.
7. According to Bohr’s atomic model, the relation between principal quantum number(𝑛) and radius of
orbit(𝑟) is
1
a) 𝑟 ∝ 𝑛! b) 𝑟 ∝ !
𝑛
1
c) 𝑟 ∝ d) 𝑟 ∝ 𝑛
𝑛
8. Mercury vapour lamp gives
a) Continuous spectrum b) Line spectrum
c) Band spectrum d) Absorption spectrum
9. Band spectrum is also called
a) Molecular spectrum b) Atomic spectrum
c) Flash spectrum d) Line absorption spectrum
10. The energy of an electron in 𝑛th orbit of the hydrogen atom is given by 𝐸" = #$%.' eV The energy required
"!
to raise an electron from the first orbit to the second orbit will be
a) 10.2 eV b) 12.1 eV
c) 13.6 eV d) 3.4 eV
11. Suppose an electron is attracted towards the origin by a force (
, where 𝑘 is constant and 𝑟 is the distance
)
of the electron from the origin. By applying Bohr model to this system, the radius of the 𝑛th orbital of the
electron is found to be 𝑟" and the kinetic energy of the electron to be 𝑇" . Then which of the following is
true?
1
a) 𝑇" ∝ ! , 𝑟" ∝ 𝑛! b) 𝑇" independent of 𝑛, 𝑟" ∝ 𝑛
𝑛
1 1
c) 𝑇" ∝ , 𝑟" ∝ 𝑛 d) 𝑇" ∝ , 𝑟" ∝ 𝑛!
𝑛 𝑛
12. Ionisation potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV. The least energy of photon of Balmer series is
a) 3.4 eV b) 1.89 eV
c) 10.2 ev d) 8.5 eV
13. The required energy to detach one electron from Balmer series of hydrogen spectrum is
a) 13.6 eV b) 10.2 eV
c) 3.4 eV d) −1.5 eV
14. The angular momentum (L) of an electron moving in a stable orbit around nucleus is
*
a) Half integral multiple of b) integral multiple of ℎ
!+
*
c) integral multiple of d) Half integral multiple of ℎ
!+
,
15. Ionization energy of He ion at minimum position is
a) 13.6 eV b) 27.2 eV
c) 54.4 eV d) 68.0 eV
16. Three photons coming from excited atomic hydrogen sample are observed, their energies are 12.1 eV, 10.2
eV and 1.9 eV. These photons must come from
a) Single atom b) Two atoms
c) Three atoms d) Either two or three atom
17. As the electron in Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom passes from state 𝑛=2 to 𝑛=1 , the kinetic energy 𝐾 and
potential energy 𝑈 change as
a) 𝐾 two-fold, 𝑈 four-fold b) 𝐾 four-fold, 𝑈 two-fold
c) 𝐾 four-fold, 𝑈 also four-fold d) 𝐾 two-fold, 𝑈 also two-fold
18. If the radii of nuclei of $% Al!- and %. Zn'/ are 𝑅$ and 𝑅! respectively, then 0" is equal to
0!
27 64
a) b)
64 27
4 3
c) d)
3 4
19. The ratio of minimum wavelength of Lyman and Balmer series will be
a) 10 b) 5
c) 0.25 d) 1.25
20. Hydrogen atom excites energy level from fundamental state to 𝑛 = 3. Number of spectrum lines, according
to Bohr, is
a) 4 b) 3
c) 1 d) 2
21. What is the maximum wavelength of light emitted in Lyman series by hydrogen atom?
a) 691 nm b) 550 nm
c) 380 nm d) 122 nm
22. In a hydrogen atom, the electron in a given orbit has total energy −1.5 eV. The potential energy is
a) 1.5 eV b) −1.5 eV
c) 3.0 eV d) −3.0 eV
23. An electron is moving in an orbit of a hydrogen atom from which there can be a maximum of six transition.
An electron is moving in an orbit of another hydrogen atom from which there can be a maximum of three
transition. The ratio of the velocities of the electron in these two orbits is

Page|2
 1 2
a) b)
2 1
5 3
c) d)
4 4
24. The wave number of the energy emitted when electron comes from fourth orbit to second orbit in
hydrogen is 20,397 cm#$ . The wave number of the energy for the same transition in He, is
a) 5,099 cm#$ b) 20,497 cm#$
c) 14400 Å d) 81,588 cm#$
25. A neon sign does not produce
a) A line spectrum b) An emission spectrum
c) An absorption spectrum d) Photons
26. The magnetic moment of the ground state of an atom whose open sub-shell is half-filled with five electrons
is
a) √35m𝜇1 b) 35 𝜇1
c) 35√𝜇1 d) 𝜇1 √35
27. The ratio of minimum to maximum wavelength in Balmer series is
a) 5: 9 b) 5: 36
c) 1: 4 d) 3: 4
28. In H spectrum, the wavelength of H2 line is 656 nm whereas in a distance galaxy, the wavelength of H2 line
is 706 nm. Estimate the speed of galaxy with respect to earth
a) 2 × 103 ms#$ b) 2 × 10- ms#$
c) 2 × 10' ms#$ d) 2 × 104 ms#$
29. The acceleration of electron in the first orbit of hydrogen atom is
4𝜋 ! 𝑚 ℎ!
a) b)
ℎ% 4𝜋 ! 𝑚𝑟
ℎ ! 𝑚! ℎ!
c) d)
2𝜋 ! 𝑚! 𝑟 % 4𝜋 ! 𝑟 %
30. The figure indicates the energy levels of a certain atom. When the system moves from 2𝐸 level to𝐸, a
/5
photon of wavelength 𝜆 is emitted. The wavelength of photon produced during its transition from %
level
to 𝐸 is
𝜆 3𝜆
a) b)
3 4
4𝜆
c) d) 3𝜆
3
31. The product of linear momentum and angular momentum of an electron of the hydrogen atom is
proportional to 𝑛 6 , where 𝑥 is
a) 0 b) 1
c) −2 d) 2
32. In hydrogen atom, the electron is moving round the nucleus with velocity 2.18 × 10' ms#$ in an orbit of
radius 0.528 Å. The acceleration of the electron is
a) 9 × 10$3 ms#! b) 9 × 10!! ms#!
c) 9 × 10#!! ms#! d) 9 × 10$! ms#!
33. The first line of Balmer series has wavelength 6563 Å. What will be the wavelength of the first member of
Lyman series?
a) 1215.4 Å b) 2500 Å
c) 7500 Å d) 600 Å
34. The first member of the Balmer’s series of the hydrogen has a wavelength 𝜆, the wavelength of the second
member of its series is
27 20
a) 𝜆 b) 𝜆
20 27

Page|3
 27 d) None of these
c) 𝜆
20
35. Two energy lavels of an electron in an atom are separated by 2.3 eV. The frequency of radiation emitted
when the electrons go from higher to lower level is
a) 6.95 × 10$/ Hz b) 3.68 × 10$4 Hz
$/
c) 5.6 × 10 Hz d) 9.11 × 10$4 Hz
SECTION - B
36. Let the potential energy of hydrogen atom in the ground state be regarded as zero. Then its potential
energy in the first excited state will be
a) 20.4 eV b) 13.6 eV
c) 3.4 eV d) 10.2eV
37. The atomic number and the mass number of an atom remains unchanged when it emits
a) a photon b) a neutron
c) 𝛽 −particle d) An 𝛼 − particle
38. The production of band spectra is caused by
a) Atomic nuclei b) Hot metals
c) Molecules d) electrons
39. For an electron in the second orbit of Bohr’s hydrogen atom, the moment of linear momentum is
a) 𝑛𝜋 b) 2𝜋ℎ
2ℎ ℎ
c) d)
𝜋 𝜋
40. In a hydrogen atom, the electron moves around the nucleus in a circular orbit of radius 5 × 10#$$ m. Its
time period is 1.5 × 10#$' .The current associated with the electron motion is (charge of electron is
1.6 × 10#$' C)
a) 1.00 A b) 1.066 × 10#% A
c) 1.81 × 10 A #% d) 1.66 × 10#% A
41. If the binding energy of the electron in a hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV, the energy required to remove the
electron from the first excited state of Li!, is
a) 30.6 eV b) 13.6 eV
c) 3.4 eV d) 122.4 eV
42. The ratio of areas of the electron orbits for the first excited state and the ground state for the hydrogen
atom is
a) 4:1 b) 16:1
c) 8:1 d) 2:1
43. Excitation energy of a hydrogen like atom in its first excitation state is 40.8 eV. Energy needed to remove
the electron from the ion in ground state is
a) 40.8 eV b) 27.2 eV
c) 54.4 eV d) 13.6 eV
44. The radius of hydrogen atom in its ground state is 5.3 × 10#$$ m. After collision with an electron it is
found to have a radius of 212 × 10#$$ m. What is the principal quantum number 𝑛 of the final state of
atom?
a) 𝑛 = 4 b) 𝑛 = 2
c) 𝑛 = 16 d) 𝑛 = 3
45. Energy 𝐸 of a hydrogen atom with principal quantum number 𝑛 is given by 𝐸 = − $%.' eV.The energy of a
"!
photon ejected when the electron jumps from n =3 state to 𝑛 = 2state of hydrogen , is approximately
a) 1.5 eV b) 0.85 eV
c) 3.4 eV d) 1.9 eV
46. White light is passed through a dilutee solution of potassium permanganate. The spectrum produced by
the emergent light is
a) Band emission spectrum b) Line emission spectrum

Page|4
 c) Band absorption spectrum d) Line absorption spectrum
47. The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of hydrogen is about −3.4eV. Its kinetic energy in
this state is
a) − 3.4 eV b) − 6.8 eV
c) 6.8 eV d) 3.4 eV
48. The nucleus of an atom consists of
a) Electrons and protons b) Electrons, protons and neutrons
c) Electrons and Neutrons d) Neutrons and protons
49. Which of the following transition in Balmer series for hydrogen will have longest wavelength?
a) 𝑛=2 to 𝑛=1 b) 𝑛 =6 to 𝑛=1
c) 𝑛 =3 to 𝑛=2 d) 𝑛 =6 to 𝑛=2
50. The first excited state of hydrogen atoms is 10.2 eV above its ground state. The temperature needed to
excite hydrogen atoms to first excited level, is
a) 7.9 × 10/ K b) 3.5 × 10/ K
c) 5.8 × 10/ K d) 14 × 10/ K

Page|5
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) c 2) b 3) d 4) b 29) c 30) d 31) a 32) b
5) a 6) d 7) a 8) b 33) a 34) b 35) c 36) d
9) a 10) a 11) a 12) b 37) a 38) c 39) d 40) d
13) c 14) c 15) c 16) c 41) a 42) b 43) c 44) b
17) c 18) d 19) c 20) b 45) d 46) c 47) d 48) d
21) d 22) d 23) d 24) d 49) c 50) a
25) c 26) d 27) a 28) b

Page|6
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :

1 (c) 7 (a)
For Balmer series, 𝑛$ − 2, 𝑛! = 3 for 1st line Electron angular momentum about the
and 𝑛! = 4 for second line *
nucleus is an integer multiple of!+ , where ℎ
$ $ is Planck’s constant.
𝜆$ ! − ! 3/16 3 36 27
= y!$ /$ z = = × = 𝐼𝜔 = 𝑚𝑣𝑟
𝜆! − 5/16 16 5 20 "*
!! %! = !+
𝑟∝𝑛
20 20
𝜆! = 𝜆$ = × 6561 = 4860 Å 8 (b)
27 27
When electric discharge is passed through
2 (b) mercury vapour lamp, eight to ten lines
Energy released = 𝐸/ − 𝐸$ from red to violet are seen in its spectrum.
In some line spectra there are only a few
13.6 13.6
=− − |− ! } = 1.75eV lines, while in many of them there are
4! 1
hundreds of them. Hence, mercury vapour
3 (d) lamp gives line spectra.
𝐸 = 𝐸/ − 𝐸% 10 (a)
13.6 13.6
13.6 13.6 𝐸 = 𝐸! − 𝐸$ = − ! — |− ! } = 10.2 eV
=− — |− ! } = −0.85 + 1.51 2 1
4! 3
11 (a)
= 0.66 eV Radius of orbit
"! * !
4 (b) 𝑟" = / +! ( ! ;!
$
For Balmer series, 𝑛7 =2 and 𝑛8 =3,4,5,…. 𝑟" ∝ 𝑛!
Frequency, of 1st spectral line of Balmer Energy 𝐸 = −𝑅𝑐ℎ "!
<!

series
$ $
1
𝑓 = 𝑅𝑍 ! 𝑐 ƒ!! − %!„ 𝐸∝ !
𝑛
or 𝑓 = 𝑅𝑍 ! 𝑐 × %'
4
…(i) 12 (b)
Least energy of photon of Balmer series is
Frequency, of 2nd spectral line of Balmer
obtained when an electron jumps to 2nd
series
$ $
orbit from 3rd orbit.
𝑓’ = 𝑅𝑍 ! 𝑐 ƒ!! − /! „
% −13.6 −13.6
or 𝑓′ = 𝑅𝑍 ! 𝑐 × $' ….(ii) 𝐸 = 𝐸% − 𝐸! = Œ !
− | ! }• eV
3 2
Form eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
7 !. 1 1 13.6 × 5
79
= !- = 13.6 Œ − • = eV
4 9 36
27
∴ 𝑓9 = 𝑓 = 1.35 𝑓 = 1.89 eV
20
5 (a)
Incandescent electric lamp produces 13 (c)
continuous emission spectrum whereas In Balmer series, 𝑛 = 2
mercury and sodium vapour give line 13.6
emission spectrum. Polyatomic substances 𝐸= = 3.4 eV
2!
such as H! , CO ! and KMnO/ produces band
absorption spectrum. 14 (c)

Page|7
 For an electron to remain orbiting around /
⇒ 𝜆ABC =
%.!D$ ×$./
the nucleous, the angular momentum (𝐿)
= 1216 Å = 121.6 m
should be an integral multiple of ℎ/2𝜋.
"*
∴ λABC =122nm
𝑖𝑒, 𝑚𝑣𝑟= !+ 22 (d)
where 𝑛 = principle quantum number of PE= 2 × total energy
electron,
and ℎ= Planck’s constant = 2(−1.5) eV = −3.0 eV
15 (c)
23 (d)
Energy of helium ions.
Number of spectral lines obtained due to
$%.' < !
𝐸" = − eV transition of electrons from 𝑛th orbit to
"!
In minimum position, 𝑛=1 lower orbit is,
"("#$)
For He, , 𝑍 = 2 𝑁=
!
#$%.' × (!)! "" ("" #$)
𝐸= $
eV I case 6 = !
𝐸 = 54.4 eV ⇒ 𝑛$ = 4
16 (c) "! ("! #$)
II case 3 =
These photons will be emitted when !

electron makes transitions in the shown ⇒ 𝑛! = 3

way. Velocity of electron in hydrogen atom in 𝑛th
So, these transitions is possible from two or orbit
1
three atoms. 𝑣" ∝
𝑛
From three atoms separately. 𝑣" 𝑛!
17 (c) 9
=
𝑣 " 𝑛$
As 𝑈 = 2𝐸, 𝐾 = −𝐸 𝑛' 3
$%.' ⇒ =
Also, 𝐸= − "!
eV 𝑛% 4
Hence, 𝐾 and 𝑈 change as four fold each. 24 (d)
19 (c) 1 1 3𝑅
𝑣̅ = 𝑅 Œ ! − ! • = = 20397cm#$
𝜆 ∝ 𝑛! 2 4 4
@%&'() $ ! $
∴ = ƒ!„ = / =0.25 For the same transaction in He atom (𝑍 =
@*(+',-
2)
20 (b)
"("#$)
Number of spectral lines = = 1 1 3𝑅 × 2!
! 𝑣̅ = 𝑅𝑍 ! Œ − • =
%(%#$)
=3 2! 4! 4
!
= 20397 × 4 = 81588 cm#$
21 (d)
In Lyman series, wavelength emitted is 25 (c)
given by The Spectrum of light emitted by a
$ $ $ luminous source is called the emission
@
= 𝑅 •$! − "! •
Spectrum. Neon bulb gives an emission
where, 𝑛 =2,3,4……
Spectrum. The spectrum of the neon light
and 𝑅 =Rydberg’s constant
has several bright lines. The red lines are
= 1.097 × 10- m#$
bright. The emission Spectrum of an
For maximum wavelength 𝑛=2
1 1 1 element is the exact opposite of its
∴ = 1.097 × 10- Œ ! − ! • absorption Spectrum, that is, the
λABC 1 2
$ $ $ frequencies emitted by a material when
@'(.
= 1.097 × 10- •$ − /• heated are the only frequencies that will be
%
= 1.097 × 10- × / absorbed when it is lighted with a white

Page|8
 light. Hence, neon sign does not produce an $
As 𝐸% is rd, 𝜆! must be 3 times, 𝑖𝑒, 3𝜆
%
absorption Spectrum.
26 (d) 31 (a)
The magnetic moment of the ground state Linear momentum = 𝑚𝑣 =
;I<
$%- "
of an atom is "*
Angular momentum = ! +
µ = m𝑛(𝑛 + 2)µ1
Where, µ1 is gyromagnetic moment. Here, Given,
open sub-shell is half-filled with 5 Linear momentum × angular momentum ∝
electrons. 𝑖𝑒, 𝑛=5 𝑛6
𝑚𝑐𝑍 𝑛ℎ
∴ µ = m5(5 + 2). µ1 ∴ × ∝ 𝑛6
137 𝑛 2𝜋
=µ1 √35 𝑛. ∝ 𝑛 6
27 (a) ⇒ 𝑥=0
1 1 1 𝑅×5 32 (b)
= 𝑅 Œ ! − !• =
𝜆AEF 2 3 36 Given, 𝑣 = 2.18 × 10' ms#$ , 𝑟 = 0.528 ×
1 1 1 𝑅 10#$. m
= 𝑅Œ ! − • = Acceleration of electron moving round the
𝜆ABC 2 ∞ 4
nucleus
𝜆AEF 𝑅 × 5 4 5 J!.$3 ×$.1 K
!
= × = 𝑎 = ..4!3 ×$.2"3 ≈ 9 × 10!! ms#!
𝜆ABC 36 𝑅 9
33 (a)
$ $
𝜆1 ƒ$! − ! ! „ 3/4 27
= $ $
= =
28 (b) 𝜆L ƒ − „ 5/36 5
!! %!
∆𝜆 = 706 − 656 = 50 nm = 50 × 10#D m, 𝑣
=? 5 5
𝜆L = 𝜆1 = × 6563 = 1215.4 Å
27 27
∆@ H
As =I
@ 34 (b)
The wavelength of series for 𝑛 is given by
∆𝜆 50 × 10#D
∴ 𝑣= ×𝑐 = × 3 × 103 $ $
= 𝑅 ƒ !! − " ! „
$
𝜆 656 × 10#D @
were 𝑅 is Rydberg’s constant.
= 2.2 × 10- ms#$
For Balmer series 𝑛=3 gives the first
29 (c) member of series and 𝑛=4 gives the second
"* member of series. Hence,
From 𝑚𝑣𝑟 = !+
$ $ $
𝑛ℎ @
= 𝑅 ƒ !! − %! „
𝑣 = $ 4
2π𝑚𝑟 = 𝑅 ƒ%'„ …(i)
H! "! * ! @"
Acceleration, 𝑎 = = /+! ;! ) 0 $ $ $
) =𝑅ƒ − „
*! @! !! /!
= /+! ;! ) 0 (𝑛 = 1) $! %0
= 𝑅 ƒ$' × /„ = $'
…(ii)
30 (d)
𝜆! 16 5 20
In the first case, energy emitted, ⇒ = × =
𝜆$ 3 36 27
𝐸$ = 2𝐸 − 𝐸 = 𝐸 20
𝜆! = 𝜆 (∵ 𝜆$ = 𝜆)
27
In the second case, energy emitted 35 (c)
Given, 𝐸! − 𝐸$ = 2.3 eV
4𝐸 𝐸 5!#5$ !.% × $.'×$.2"4
𝐸! = −𝐸 = Or v= =
3 3 * '.' ×$.205
$4
= 0.55 × 10

Page|9
 = 5.5 × 10$/ Hz 𝐴9 4𝜋(𝑟′)!
=
37 (a) 𝐴99 4𝜋(𝑟′′)!
When a 𝛾 − ray photon is emitted then 𝐴9 16
=
atomic number and mass number remains 𝐴99 1
unchanged. 43 (c)
38 (c) The excitation energy in the first excited
The given type of spectrum has coloured state is
$ $
bands of light on a dark-ground. One end of 𝐸 = 𝑅ℎ𝑐𝑍 ! ƒ$! − !! „ = (13.6 eV) ×
each band is sharp and bright and the %
𝑍! × /
brightness gradually decreases towards the
%
other end. Band spectrum is obtained from ∴ 40.8 = 13.6 × 𝑍 ! × /
the molecules in the gaseous state of matter. ⇒ 𝑍=2
For example, when discharge is passed So, the ion in problem is He, . The energy of
through oxygen, nitrogen or carbon dioxide, the ion in the ground state is
the light emitted from these gases give band 0*I< !
𝐸 = $!
= 13.6 × 4 = 54.4 eV
spectrum.
Hence, 54.4 eV is required to remove the
39 (d)
electron from the ion.
The moment of linear momentum is angular
44 (b)
momentum
"* 𝑟 ∝ 𝑛!
𝐿 = 𝑚𝑣𝑟 =
!M 𝑟7 𝑛7 !
Here, 𝑛=2 =| }
𝑟8 𝑛8
2ℎ ℎ !$.! ×$.2"" " !
∴ 𝐿= = = ƒ$ „
2π π 4.%×$.2""
41 (a) 𝑛! = 4
13.6 𝑛=2
𝐸 = − 𝑍 ! ! eV
𝑛 45 (d)
For first excited state, $%.'
Given , 𝐸" = eV
13.6 "!
𝐸! = −3! × Energy of photon ejected when electron
4
= −30.6 eV jumps from 𝑛=3 state to 𝑛=2 state is given
Ionisation energy for first excited state of by
Li!, is 30.6 eV. ∆𝐸 = 𝐸% − 𝐸!
42 (b) 13.6 13.6
∴ 𝐸% = − eV = − eV
The radius of the orbit of the electron in the (3)! 9
𝑛th excited state 13.6 13.6
𝐸! = − eV = − eV
"! /+O * !
3
(2) ! 4
𝑟N = /+! ;<N ! $%.' $%.'
So, ∆𝐸 = 𝐸% − 𝐸! = − D
− ƒ− /
„
For the first excited state
𝑛 = 2 ,𝑍 = 1 = 1.9 eV
/O * !
3
(approximately)
∵ 𝑟’ = +;N ! 47 (d)
For the ground state of hydrogen atom Kinetic energy of electron
𝑛 = 1 ,𝑍 = 1 𝑍𝑒 !
*! O 𝐾 =
∵ 𝑟’’ = +;N3! 8𝜋𝜀. 𝑟
The ratio of radius Potential energy of electron
$ <N !
𝑟9 4 𝑈 = /+O
= 3) )
𝑟 99 1 ∴ Total energy
The ratio of area of the electron orbit for <N ! <N !
hydrogen atom 𝐸 = 𝐾 + 𝑈 = 3+O )
− /+O3 )
3

P a g e | 10
 <N ! For maximum wavelength if𝑛$ = 𝑛,then
Or 𝐸=
3+O3 )
𝑛! = 𝑛 + 1
Or 𝐸 = −𝐾
∴ 𝜆 𝑖𝑠 maximumfor𝑛! = 3 and 𝑛$ = 2.
Or 𝐾 = −𝐸 = −(−3.4) 50 (a)
Or = 3.4 eV According to kinetic interpretation of
48 (d) temperature
Nucleus Contains only the neutrons and 1 3
protons. 𝐸𝑘 = |= 𝑚𝑣 ! } = 𝑘𝑇
2 2
49 (c) Given : 𝐸8 = 10.2 eV = 10.2 × 1.6 × 10#$D J
According to the Bohr’s theory the %
So, 𝑘𝑇 = 10.2 × 1.6 × 10#$D J
wavelength of radiations emitted from !
! $..! × $.' ×$.2"4
hydrogen atom given by Or 𝑇 =%×
(
$ $ $ ""! "!! ! $..! × $.' ×$.2"4
@
= 𝑅 •" ! − " ! • ⇒ 𝜆 = J"!! ""! K0 =%× = 7.9 ×
" ! $.%3 ×$.2!0
10/ K

P a g e | 11
 Nuclei
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. 1 𝑔 of hydrogen is converted into 0.993 𝑔 of helium in a thermonuclear reaction. The energy released is
a) 63 × 10! 𝐽 b) 63 × 10"# 𝐽
c) 63 × 10"$ 𝐽 d) 63 × 10%# 𝐽
2. If the binding energy per nucleon in & Li! and % He$ nuclei are respectively 5.60 MeV and 7.06 MeV, then the
energy of proton in the reaction & Li + 𝑝 → 2% He $ is
a) 19.6 MeV b) 2.4 MeV
c) 8.4 MeV d) 17.3 MeV
3. %&(
The energy released in the fission of 1Kg of '% U is (energy per fission =200 MeV)
a) 5.1 × 10 eV%) b) 5.1 × 10%) J
c) 8.2 × 10 J "& d) 8.2 × 10"& MeV
4. An electron jumps from the 4*+ orbit to the 2,- orbit of hydrogen atom. Given the Rydberg’s constant 𝑅 =
10( 𝑐𝑚." . The frequency in 𝐻𝑧 of the emitted radiation will be
3 3
a) × 10( b) × 10"(
16 16
9 3
c) × 10"( d) × 10"(
16 4
5. The half-life of radioactive Polonium (𝑃𝑜) is 138.6 𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑠. For ten lakh Polonium atoms, the number of
disintegration in 24 hours is
a) 2000 b) 3000
c) 4000 d) 5000
6. The fact that photons carry energy was established by
a) Doppler’s effect b) Compton’s effect
c) Bohr’s theory d) Diffraction of light
7. Half-life of radioactive substance is 3.20 h. What is the time taken for a 75% of substance to be used?
a) 6.38 h b) 12 h
c) 4.18 day d) 1.2 day
8. The half-life of a radioactive element is 3.8 days. The fraction left after 19 days will be
a) 0.124 b) 0.062
c) 0.093 d) 0.031
9. The count rate of a Geiger-Muller counter for the radiation of a radioactive material of half life of
30 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 decreases to 5 𝑠 ." after 2 hours. The initial count rate was
a) 25 𝑠 ." b) 80 𝑠 ."
c) 625 𝑠 ." d) 20 𝑠 ."
10. If '% 𝑈 %&/ undergoes successively 8 𝛼-decays and 6 𝛽-decays, then resulting nucleus is
a) /% 𝑈 %#) b) /% 𝑃𝑏%#)
c) /% 𝑈 %"# d) /% 𝑈 %"$
11. Excitation energy of a hydrogen like ion in its first excitation state is 40.8 𝑒𝑉. Energy needed to remove the
electron from the ion in ground state is
 a) 54.4 𝑒𝑉 b) 13.6 𝑒𝑉
c) 40.8 𝑒𝑉 d) 27.2 𝑒𝑉
12. A radioactive element '# 𝑋 %&/ decays into /& 𝑌
%%%
. The number of 𝛽 −particles emitted are
a) 4 b) 6
c) 2 d) 1
13. 1 atomic mass unit is equal to
" "
a) %( (mass of 𝐹% molecule) b) "$ (mass of 𝑁% molecule)
" "
c) (mass of one 𝐶-atom) d) ") (mass of 𝑂% molecule)
"%
%&/
14. 𝑈 decays into 𝑇ℎ%&$ by the emission of an 𝛼 −particle. There follows a chain of further radioactive
decays, either by 𝛼 −decay or by 𝛽 −decay. Eventually a stable nuclide is reached and after that, no further
radioactive decay is possible. Which of the following stable nuclides is the end product of the 𝑈 %&/
radioactive decay chain
a) 𝑃𝑏%#) b) 𝑃𝑏%#!
c) 𝑃𝑏%#/ d) 𝑃𝑏%#'
15. Binding energy per nucleon plot against the mass number for stable nuclei is shown in the figure. which
curve is correct
D
Binding energy

B
per nucleon

C
A
Mass number

a) 𝐴 b) 𝐵
c) 𝐶 d) 𝐷
16. The rest energy of an electron is
a) 510 𝐾𝑒𝑉 b) 931 𝐾𝑒𝑉
c) 510 𝑀𝑒𝑉 d) 931 𝑀𝑒𝑉
17. In hydrogen atom, electron makes transition from 𝑛 = 4 to 𝑛 = 1 level. Recoil momentum of the 𝐻 atom
will be
a) 3.4 × 10.%! 𝑁 − 𝑠 b) 6.8 × 10.%! 𝑁 − 𝑠
c) 3.4 × 10.%$ 𝑁 − 𝑠 d) 6.8 × 10.%$ 𝑁 − 𝑠
18. Nuclear fission experiments show that the neutrons split the uranium nuclei into two fragments of about
same size. This process is accompanised by the emission of several
a) Protons and positrons b) 𝛼-particles
c) Neutrons d) Protons and 𝛼-particles
19. According to the Rutherford’s atomic model, the electrons inside the atom are
a) Stationary b) Not stationary
c) Centralized d) None of these
20. Which of the following rays are not electromagnetic waves
a) 𝛾-rays b) 𝛽-rays
c) Heat rays d) 𝑋-rays
21. The first line in the Lyman series has wavelength 𝜆. The wavelength of the first line in Balmer series is
2 9
a) 𝜆 b) 𝜆
9 2
5 27
c) 𝜆 d) 𝜆
27 5
22. Best neutron moderator is
a) Beryllium oxide b) Pure water
c) Heavy water d) Graphite
23. Imagine an atom made up of a proton and a hypothetical particle of double the mass of the electron but
having the same charge as the electron. Apply the Bohr’s atom model and consider all possible transitions
Page|2
 of this hypothetical particle to the first excited level. The longest wavelength photon that will be emitted
has wavelength 𝜆 (given in terms of the Rydberg constant 𝑅 for the hydrogen atom) is equal to
a) 9/(5𝑅) b) 36/(5𝑅)
c) 18/(5𝑅) d) 4/𝑅
24. The half-life of a radioactive substance is 48 hours. How much time will it take to disintegrate to its "
𝑡ℎ
")
part
a) 12 ℎ b) 16 ℎ
c) 48 ℎ d) 192 ℎ
25. The fussion process is possible at high temperatures, because at higher temperatures
a) The nucleus disintegrates b) The molecules disintegrates
c) Atom become ionized d) The nucleus get sufficient energy to overcome the
strong forces of repulsion
26. In half life of a radio isotope is 2 seconds and number of atoms are only 4, then after one half life remaining
(without decay) atoms are probably
a) 1 b) 2
c) 3 d) All the above
27. The correct order of ionizing capacity of 𝛼, 𝛽 and 𝛾 −rays is
a) 𝛼 > 𝛾 > 𝛽 b) 𝛼 > 𝛽 > 𝛾
c) 𝛼 < 𝛽 < 𝛾 d) 𝛾 > 𝛼 > 𝛽
28. The example of nuclear fusion is
a) Formation of 𝐵𝑎 and 𝐾𝑟 from U%&( b) Formation of 𝐻𝑒 from 𝐻
c) Formation of 𝑃𝑢 − 235 from 𝑈 − 235 d) Formation of water from hydrogen and oxygen
29. Equivalent energy of mass equal to 1 𝑎. 𝑚. 𝑢. is
a) 931 𝐾𝑒𝑉 b) 931 𝑒𝑉
c) 931 𝑀𝑒𝑉 d) 9.31 𝑀𝑒𝑉
30. The ratio of the wavelengths for 2 → 1 transition on 𝐿𝑖 00 , 𝐻𝑒 0 and 𝐻 is
a) 1 : 2 : 3 b) 1 : 4 : 9
c) 4 : 9 : 36 d) 3 : 2 : 1
31. The ratio of speed of an electron in ground state in Bohrs first orbit of hydrogen atom to velocity of light in
air is
𝑒% 2𝑒 % 𝜀#
a) b)
2𝜀# ℎ𝑐 ℎ𝑐
𝑒& 2𝜀# ℎ𝑐
c) d)
2𝜀# ℎ𝑐 𝑒%
32. The ratio of half-life times of two elements A and B is 1! 2
1"
. The ratio of respectively decay constants 2! is
"
𝑇3 𝑇4
a) b)
𝑇4 𝑇3
𝑇4 + 𝑇3 𝑇4 − 𝑇3
c) d)
𝑇4 𝑇4
33. Ionization energy of hydrogen is 13.6 𝑒𝑉. If ℎ = 6.6 × 10.&$ 𝐽 − 𝑠, the value of 𝑅 will be of the order of
a) 10"# 𝑚." b) 10! 𝑚."
$ ."
c) 10 𝑚 d) 10.! 𝑚."
34. Which of the following transitions in a hydrogen atom emits photon of the highest frequency
a) 𝑛 = 1 to 𝑛 = 2 b) 𝑛 = 2 to 𝑛 = 1
c) 𝑛 = 2 to 𝑛 = 6 d) 𝑛 = 6 to 𝑛 = 2
35. The ratio between Bohr radii are
a) 1 : 2 : 3 b) 2 : 4 : 6
c) 1 : 4 : 9 d) 1 : 3 : 5

Page|3
36. Consider a radioactive material of half-life 1.0 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒. If one of the nuclei decays now, the next one will
decay
"
a) After 1 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒 b) After 567 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒
#%
" d) After any time
After 8 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒, where 𝑁 is the number of
c)
nuclei present at that moment
37. The most stable particle in Baryon group is
a) Proton b) Lamda-particle
c) Neutron d) Omega-particle
38. An artificial radioactive decay series begins with unstable %$"
'$ 𝑃𝑢. The stable nuclide obtained after eight
𝛼 −decays and five 𝛽 −decays is
a) %#'
/& 𝐵𝑖 b) %#'
/% 𝑃𝑏
%#(
c) /% 𝑇𝑖 d) %#"
/% 𝐻𝑔
39. A radioactive sample has 𝑁# active atoms 𝑡 = 0. If the rate of disintegration at any time is 𝑅 and the
number of atoms is 𝑁, then the ratio 𝑅/𝑁 varies with time as
a) b)

O t O t
c) d)

O t O t
40. The mass and energy equivalent to 1 𝑎𝑚𝑢 are respectively
a) 1.67 × 10.%! 𝑔𝑚, 9.30 𝑀𝑒𝑉 b) 1.67 × 10.%! 𝑘𝑔, 930 𝑀𝑒𝑉
c) 1.67 × 10.%! 𝑘𝑔, 1 𝑀𝑒𝑉 d) 1.67 × 10.&$ 𝑘𝑔, 1 𝑀𝑒𝑉
41. The activity of a sample of a radioactive material is 𝐴 at time 𝑡" and 𝐴% at time 𝑡% (𝑡% > 𝑡" ). If its mean life is
𝑇, then
a) 𝐴" 𝑡" = 𝐴% 𝑡% b) 𝐴" − 𝐴% = 𝑡% − 𝑡"
c) 𝐴% = 𝐴" 𝑒 (: $ .: % )/1 d) 𝐴% = 𝐴" 𝑒 (:$ /:% )/1
42. Mean life of a radioactive sample is 100 s. Then its half-life(in minutes) is
a) 0.693 b) 1
c) 10 .$ d) 1.155
43. Neutrons are used in nuclear fission, because
a) Neutrons are attracted by nucleus b) Mass of neutrons is greater than protons
c) Neutrons are neutral and hence are not d) Neutrons could be accelerated to a greater energy
repelled by the nucleus
44. In hydrogen atom, the electron is moving round the nucleus with velocity 2.18 × 10) 𝑚/𝑠 in an orbit of
radius 0.528Å. The acceleration of the electron is
a) 9 × 10"/ 𝑚/𝑠 % b) 9 × 10%% 𝑚/𝑠 %
c) 9 × 10.%% 𝑚/𝑠 % d) 9 × 10"% 𝑚/𝑠 %
45. A count rate metre shows a count of 240 per minute from a given radioactive source later the metre shows
."
a count rate 0f 30 min . The half-life of the source is
a) 80 min b) 120 min
c) 20 min d) 30 min
46. 99% of a radioactive element will decay between
a) 6 and 7 half lives b) 7 and 8 half lives
c) 8 and 9 half lives d) 9 half lives
47. A moderator is used in nuclear reactors in order to
a) Slow down the speed of the neutrons b) Accelerate the neutrons
Page|4
 c) Increase the number of neutrons d) Decrease the number of neutrons
48. The frequency of 1st line of Balmer series in 𝐻% atom is 𝑣# . The frequency of line emitted by singly ionized
𝐻𝑒 atom is
a) 2𝑣# b) 4𝑣#
c) 𝑣# /2 d) 𝑣# /4
49. In the nuclear fusion reaction
% & $
"H + "H → %H𝑒 + 𝑛
given that the repulsive potential energy between the two nuclei is 7.7 × 10."$ J, the temperature at
which the gases must be heated to initiate the reaction is nearly [Boltzmann’s constant 𝑘 =
1.38 × 10.%& JK ." ]
a) 10! K b) 10( K
c) 10& K d) 10' K
50. Consider a hypothetical annihilation of a stationary electron with a stationary positron. What is the
wavelength of resulting radiation
(ℎ = Planck’s constant, 𝑐 = speed of light, 𝑚# = rest mass)
ℎ ℎ
a) b)
2𝑚# 𝑐 𝑚# 𝑐
2ℎ ℎ
c) d)
𝑚# 𝑐 𝑚# 𝑐 %

Page|5
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) b 2) d 3) c 4) c 29) c 30) c 31) a 32) a
5) d 6) c 7) a 8) d 33) b 34) a 35) c 36) d
9) b 10) b 11) a 12) d 37) a 38) a 39) d 40) b
13) c 14) a 15) c 16) a 41) c 42) d 43) c 44) b
17) b 18) c 19) b 20) b 45) c 46) a 47) a 48) b
21) d 22) a 23) c 24) d 49) d 50) b
25) d 26) b 27) b 28) b

Page|6
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (b) %( " :/1$/%
∴ = ¤ %¥
∆𝑚 = 1 − 0.993 = 0.007 𝑔𝑚 "##
" % " :/1$/%
∴ 𝐸 = (∆𝑚)𝑐 % = (0.007 × 10.& )(3 × 10/ )% or ¤ ¥ = ¤ ¥
% %
= 63 × 10"# 𝐽 :
or = 2
2 (d) 1$/%

Applying principle of energy conservation. ∴ 𝑡 = 2𝑇"/% = 2 × 3.20 = 6.40 ℎ

or t ≈ 6.38 h
Energy of proton=total BE of 2 α −energy 8 (d)
of Li! 8)
In time 𝑡 = 𝑇 , 𝑁 =
%
= 8 × 7.06 × 7 × 5.6 In another half-life,(ie, after 2 half-lives)
" 8) 8) " %
= 56.48 − 39.2 = 17.28 MeV 𝑁= = = 𝑁# ¤ ¥
% % $ %
After yet another half-life ,(𝑖𝑒, after 3 half-
3 (c) lives)
Energy released from 1 kg of uranium " 8 8) " &
%## ×"#& ×".)×"#'$( × ).#%& ×"#%& 𝑁 = % ¤ $) ¥ = /
= 𝑁# ¤%¥ and so on.
=
%&( Hence, after 𝑛
= 8.2 × 10"& J
half-lives
4 (c) " A
1 1 1 3𝑅 16 𝑁 = 𝑁# ¤%¥
= 𝑅 % − %¡ = ⇒𝜆=
𝜆 2 4 16 3𝑅 " :/1
16 = 𝑁# ¤ ¥
%
= × 10.( 𝑐𝑚 where 𝑡 = 𝑛 × 𝑇 = total time of 𝑛 half-
3
@ &×"#$) ' lives.
Frequency 𝑛 = 2 = $& = ") × 10"( 𝐻𝑧
×"#'+ : "'
* Here, 𝑛 = =
1 &./
5 (d)
%$ " 8 " A
=5
𝑛 = %$×"&/.) = "&/.) ; Now 8 = ¤%¥ = ∴ The fraction left
)
" "/"&/.) 𝑁 1 A 1 ( 1
¤%¥ = ¡ = ¡ =
𝑁# 2 2 32
1 "/"&/.) = 0.031
⇒ 𝑁 = 10,00000 ¡ = 995011
2 9 (b)
So number of disintegration %×&)

= 1000000 − 995011 = 4989 = 5000 1 :/1$/% 1 *) 𝐴#

𝐴 = 𝐴# ¡ ⇒ 5 = 𝐴# ¡ =
7 (a) 2 2 16
."
⇒ 𝐴# = 80𝑠
The activity or decay rate 𝑅 of radioactive
10 (b)
substance is the number of decays per (/D,)F)
(4C%&/) .
second. (BC'%) 𝑈 §⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯© B . 𝑋 4
∴ 𝑅 = 𝜆𝑁 G
So 𝐴 = 𝐴 − 4𝑛D = 238 − 4 × 8 = 206
" :/1$/% and 𝑍 G = 𝑛F − 2𝑛H + 𝑧 = 6 − 2 × 8 + 92 =
or 𝑅 = 𝜆𝑁# ¤%¥
82
" :/1$/%
or 𝑅 = 𝑅# ¤ ¥ 11 (a)
%
where 𝑅# = 𝜆𝑁# is the activity of Excitation energy ∆𝐸 = 𝐸% − 𝐸" =
" "
radioactive substance at time 𝑡 = 0. 13.6 𝑍 % «"% − %%¬
According to question, 3
𝑅 75 ⇒ 40.8 = 13.6 × × 𝑍 % ⇒ 𝑍 = 2
=1− = 25% 4
𝑅# 100

Page|7
 Now required energy to remove the transition of particle from 𝑛 = 3 to 𝑛 = 2 ⇒
0"&.)B % J@ " "
electron from ground state = = = 𝐸& − 𝐸% = 2𝑅ℎ𝑐 ¤%% − &% ¥
(")% 2/01
"/
13.6(𝑍)% = 54.4 𝑒𝑉 This gives 𝜆MNO = (L
12 (d) 24 (d)
Number of 𝛼 −particles emitted =
%&/.%%%
𝑁 1 :/1 1 1 :/$/
=4 = ¡ ⇒ = ¡
$ 𝑁# 2 16 2
This decreases atomic number to 90 − 1 $
1 :/$/

4 × 2 = 82 ⇒ ¡ = ¡ ⇒ 𝑡 = 192 ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠
2 2
Since atomic number of /& 𝑌 %%% is 83, this is 25 (d)
possible of one 𝛽 −particle is emitted In practise, nuclear fusion is very difficult
14 (a) process. This is so when positively charged
(4𝑛 + 2) series starts from 𝑈 %&/ and it’s nuclei come very close for fusion, the force
stable end product is 𝑃𝑏%#) of electrical repulsion between them
16 (a) becomes very strong. For fusion against this
Rest energy of an electron = 𝑚I 𝑐 % force, they require very high energy. To
Here 𝑚I = 9.1 × 10.&" 𝑘𝑔 and 𝑐 = velocity impart, so much energy to them, very high
of light temperature and very high pressure is
∴ Rest energy = 9.1 × 10.&" × (3 × required.
10/ )% 𝑗𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 26 (b)
9.1 × 10.&" × (3 × 10/ )% 1 1
= 𝑒𝑉 = 510 𝑘𝑒𝑉 𝑁 = 𝑁# ¡ 𝑛 = 4 × = 2
1.6 × 10."' 2 2
17 (b) 27 (b)
Recoil momentum = momentum of photon Ionizing property depends upon the charge
=2
J and mass
30 (c)
1 1 ℎ𝑅 × 15
= ℎ𝑅 ¯ % − % ° = 1 1 1 1
𝑛" 𝑛% 16 = 𝑅𝑍 % ¯ % − % ° ⇒ 𝜆 ∝ %
𝜆 𝑛" 𝑛% 𝑍
= 6.8 × 10.%! 𝑁 × 𝑠
𝜆KP 22 : 𝜆QI 2 : 𝜆Q = 4: 9: 36
18 (c)
31 (a)
In nuclear fission, neutrons are released
Speed of electron in 𝑛*+ orbit (in CGS) 𝑣A =
21 (d)
%RBI %
$
For first line in Lyman series 𝜆K$ = &L …(i) AJ
(𝑘 = 1)
&) For first orbit of 𝐻" ; 𝑛 = 1 and 𝑍 = 1
For first line in Balmer series 𝜆3$ = …(ii)
(L %RI % S %RI %
So 𝑣 = ⇒ =
From equations (i) and (ii) J @ J@
𝜆3$ 27 27 27 32 (a)
= ⇒ 𝜆3$ = 𝜆K$ ⇒ 𝜆3$ = 𝜆 Half-life of a radioactive element
𝜆K$ 5 5 5
#.)'& "
23 (c) 𝑇= 2
or 𝑇 ∝ 2
LJ@ 2! 1
In hydrogen atom 𝐸A = − A% ∴ = 1"
2" !
Also 𝐸A ∝ 𝑚; where 𝑚 is the mass of the 33 (b)
electron. Here the electron has been 𝐸
replaced by a particle whose mass is double 𝐸 = −𝑅𝑐ℎ ⇒ 𝑅 = −
𝑐ℎ
of an electron. Therefore, for this 13.6 × 1.6 × 10."'
=
hypothetical atom energy in 𝑛:J orbit will 3 × 10/ × 6.6 × 10.&$
!
be given by 𝐸A = −
%LJ@ = 1.098 × 10 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚
A%
34 (a)
The longest wavelength 𝜆MNO (or minimum
∵ 𝐸" > 𝐸%
energy) photon will correspond to the
∴ 𝑣" > 𝑣%
Page|8
 𝑖. 𝑒., photons of higher frequency will be (2.18 × 10) )%
∴𝑎= = 9 × 10%% 𝑚/𝑠 %
emitted if transition takes place from 𝑛 = 2 0.528 × 10."#
to 1 45 (c)
n=6 The number of counts left after time t
n=5 3
n=4 " 4$/%
E2 𝑁 = 𝑁# ¤%¥
n=3 &)
" 4$/%
n=2 ∴ 30 = 240 ¤%¥
E1

n=1
or (∵ 𝑡 = 1h = 60 min)
&)
36 (d) &# " 4
= ¤%¥ $/%
%$#
Because radioactivity is a spontaneous &)
" & " 4
phenomenon or ¤%¥ = ¤&¥ $/%
37 (a) Comparing the powers, we get
The proton is the most stable in the Baryon 60
group ∴ = 3
𝑇"/%
38 (a) )#
𝑇"/% =
Mass number decreases by 8 × 4 = 32 &
Atomic number decreases by 8 × 2 − 5 = 𝑇"/% = 20 min
11 46 (a)
39 (d) 1 A 𝑁 1 A 1 1 A
𝑁 = 𝑁# ¡ ⇒ = ¡ ⇒ − ¡
T8
Rate 𝑅 = − T: = 𝜆𝑁# 𝑒 .2: = 𝜆𝑁 ⇒ 8 = 𝜆
L 2 𝑁# 2 100 2
A
L ⇒ 2 − 100
(constant) 𝑖. 𝑒., graph between and 𝑡, is a 𝑛 comes out in between 6 and 7
8
straight line parallel to the time axis 47 (a)
41 (c) Moderator slows down neutrons
𝐴 = 𝐴# 𝑒 .2: = 𝐴# 𝑒 .:/U ; where 𝜏 = mean life
So 𝐴" = 𝐴# 𝑒 .:$ /1 48 (b)
𝐴" 𝑣Q% 1 % 1
⇒ 𝐴# = .: /1 = 𝐴" 𝑒 :$ /1 𝑣 ∝ 𝑍% ⇒ = ¡ = ⇒ 𝑣QI = 4𝑣Q%
𝑒 $ 𝑣QI 2 4
∴ 𝐴% = 𝐴# 𝑒 .:/1 = µ𝐴" 𝑒 :$ /1 ¶𝑒 .:% /1 = 4𝑣#
⇒ 𝐴% = 𝐴" 𝑒 (:$ .:% )/1 49 (d)
42 (d) 3
𝑘𝑇 = 7.7 × 10."$ J
1 "## 2
Half-life 𝑇/2 = ".$$
= ".$$ s = 69.44 s % ×!.! ×"#'$5
)'.$$ T = & × ".&/ ×"#'%* = 3.7 × 10' K
= ≈ 1.155 min
)# 50 (b)
44 (b) From conservation of momentum, two
The electron in a hydrogen atom, moves identical photons must travel in opposite
with constant acceleration, called directions with equal magnitude of
centripetal acceleration, round the nucleus. J@
S%
momentum and energy 2
from
Acceleration of electron 𝑎 = V J@ J@
)
conservation of energy + = 𝑚# 𝑐 % +
Given, 𝑣 = 2.18 × 10 𝑚/𝑠 2 2
𝑚# 𝑐 %
𝑟 = 0.528 Å = 0.528 × 10."# 𝑚
ℎ
⇒𝜆=
𝑚# 𝑐

Page|9
 Semiconductor Electronics
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. A zener diode has a contact potential of 1 V in the absence of biasing. It undergoes Zener breakdown for an
electric field of 106 V-m!" at the depletion region of 𝑝-𝑛 junction. If the width of the depletion region is 2.5
𝜇m, what should be the reverse biased potential for the Zener breakdown to occur?
a) 3.5 V b) 2.5 V
c) 1.5 V d) 0.5 V
2. Let 𝑛# and 𝑛$ represent the number density of electrons and holes in a semiconductor. Then
a) 𝑛# > 𝑛$ if the semiconductor is intrinsic b) 𝑛# < 𝑛$ if the semiconductor is intrinsic
c) 𝑛# ≠ 𝑛$ if the semiconductor is intrinsic d) 𝑛# = 𝑛$ if the semiconductor is intrinsic
3. The density for simple cubic lattice is (where 𝐴 is atomic weight, 𝑁 is Avogadro’s number and 𝑎 is a lattice
parameter)
4𝐴 2𝐴
a) b)
𝑁𝑎% 𝑁𝑎%
𝐴 𝐴
c) %
d)
𝑁𝑎 𝑁𝑎&
4. A 𝑝-𝑛 photodiode is fabricated from a semiconductor with a band gap of 2.5 𝑒𝑉. It can detect a signal of
wavelength
a) 6000 Å b) 4000 𝑛𝑚
c) 6000 𝑛𝑚 d) 4000 Å
5. The peak voltage in the output of a half-wave diode rectifier fed with a sinusoidal signal without filter is
10 𝑉. The dc compound of the output voltage is
a) 10/√2 𝑉 b) 10/𝜋 𝑉
c) 10 𝑉 d) 20/𝜋 𝑉
6. In space charge limited region, the plate current in a diode is 10 𝑚𝐴 for plate voltage 150 𝑉. If the plate
voltage is increased to 600 𝑉, then the plate current will be
a) 10 𝑚𝐴 b) 40 𝑚𝐴
c) 80 𝑚𝐴 d) 160 𝑚𝐴
7. The symbol given in figure represents
E C

a) 𝑁𝑃𝑁 transistor b) 𝑃𝑁𝑃 transistor

c) Forward biased 𝑃𝑁 junction diode d) Reverse biased 𝑁𝑃 junction diode
8. The output wave form of full-wave rectifier is
a) b)
 c) d)

9. In a 𝑃𝑁-junction
a) 𝑃 and 𝑁 both are at same potential b) High potential at 𝑁 side and low potential at 𝑃 side
High potential at 𝑃 side and low potential at 𝑁
c) d) Low potential at 𝑁 side and zero potential at 𝑃 side
side
10. The circuit diagram shows a logic combination with the states of output X, Y and Z given for inputs P, Q, R
and S all at state 1. When inputs P and R change to state 0 with inputs Q and S still at 1, the states of
outputs X, Y and Z change to

a) 1, 0, 0 b) 1, 1, 1
c) 0, 1, 0 d) 0, 0, 1
11. The combination of the following gates produces

a) AND gate b) NAND gate

c) NOR gate d) OR gate
12. In a triode amplifier, 𝜇 = 25, 𝑟' = 40 kilo ohm and load resistance 𝑅( = 10 kilo ohm. If the input signal
voltage is 0.5 volt, then output signal voltage will be
a) 1.25 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 b) 5 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
c) 2.5 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 d) 10 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
13. Zener diode is used as
a) Half wave rectifier b) Full wave rectifier
c) Ac voltage stabilizer d) Dc voltage stabilizer
14. Diode is used as a/an
a) Oscillator b) Amplifier
c) Rectifier d) Modulator
15. A logic gate is an electronic circuit which
a) Makes logic decisions b) Allows electrons flow only in one direction
c) Works binary algebra d) Alternates between 0 and 1 values
16. Of the diodes shown in the following diagrams, which one is reverse biased
a) –12V b)
R R

– 5V – 10V
c) +5V d) +10V

R
+5V R

17. Current gain β)* common emitter mode of transistor is

∆𝐼+ ∆𝐼,
a) β)* = v y , 𝑉+ = constant b) β)* = v y , 𝑉+ = constant
∆𝐼, ∆𝐼+
∆𝐼+ ∆𝐼-
c) β)* = v y , 𝑉+ = constant d) β)* = v y , 𝑉+ = constant
∆𝐼- ∆𝐼+

Page|2
18. The diode shown in the circuit is a silicon diode. The potential difference between the points 𝐴 and 𝐵 will
be
2W Si
A B

6V

a) 6 𝑉 b) 0.6 𝑉
c) 0.7 𝑉 d) 0 𝑉
19. Avalanche breakdown in a p-n junction diode is due to
a) Sudden shift of Fermi level b) Increase in the width of forbidden gap
c) Sudden increase of impurity concentration d) Cumulative effect of increased electron collision and
creation of added electron-hole pairs
20. In a 𝑃-type semi-conductor, germanium is dopped with
a) Gallium b) Boron
c) Aluminium d) All of these
21. For the given combination of gates, if the logic states of inputs 𝐴, 𝐵, 𝐶 are as follows 𝐴 = 𝐵 = 𝐶 = 0 and
𝐴 = 𝐵 = 1, 𝐶 = 0, then the logic states of output 𝐷 are

a) 0, 0 b) 0, 1
c) 1, 0 d) 1, 1
22. If in a triode valve amplification factor is 20 and plate resistance is 10 kΩ, then its mutual conductance is
a) 2 milli mho b) 20 milli mho
c) (1⁄2) milli mho d) 200 milli mho
23. The following configuration of gate is equivalent to figure.

a) NAND b) XOR
c) OR d) None of these
24. A transistor is operated in common-emitter configuration at 𝑉. = 2𝑉 such that a change in the base
current from 100 𝜇𝐴 produces a change in the collector current from 5 𝑚𝐴 to 10 𝑚𝐴. The current gain is
a) 75 b) 100
c) 150 d) 50
25. Select the outputs 𝑌 of the combination of gates shown below for inputs 𝐴 = 1, 𝐵 = 0; 𝐴 = 1, 𝐵 = 1 and
𝐴 = 0, 𝐵 = 0 respectively

a) (0 1 1) b) (0 0 1)
c) (1 0 0) d) (1 1 1)
26. The resonance frequency of the tank circuit of an oscillator when 𝐿 = "/ 𝑚𝐻 and 𝐶 = 0.04𝜇 𝐹 are
0!
connected in parallel is
a) 250 𝑘𝐻𝑧 b) 25 𝑘𝐻𝑧
c) 2.5 𝑘𝐻𝑧 d) 25 𝑀𝐻𝑧

Page|3
27. The introduction of a grid in a triode valve affects plate current by
a) Making the thermionic emission easier at low b) Releasing more electrons from the plate
temperature
c) Increasing plate voltage d) Neutralizing space charge
28. The output of a NAND gate is 0
a) If both inputs are 0 b) If one input is 0 and the other input is 1
c) If both inputs are 1 d) Either if both inputs are 1 or if one of the inputs is 1
and the other 0
29. In order to forward bias a 𝑃𝑁 junction, the negative terminal of battery is connected to
a) 𝑃-side b) Either 𝑃-side or 𝑁-side
c) 𝑁-side d) None of these
30. In an unbiased 𝑝 − 𝑛 junction, holes diffuse from 𝑝-region to 𝑛-region, because
b) They move across the junction by the potential
a) Free electrons in the 𝑛-region attract them
difference
Hole concentration in 𝑝-region is more as d) All of the above
c)
compared to 𝑛-region
31. In a semiconductor, the forbidden energy gap between the valence band and the conduction band is of the
order is
a) 1 MeV b) 0.1 MeV
c) 1 eV d) 5 eV
32. Number of secondary electrons emitted per number of primary electrons depends on
a) Material of target b) Frequency of primary electrons
c) Intensity d) None of the above
33. In an experiment, the saturation in the plate current in a diode is observed at 240𝑉. But a student still
wants to increase the plate current. It can be done, if
a) The plate voltage is increased further b) The plate voltage is decreased
c) The filament current is decreased d) The filament current is increased
34. In the 𝐶𝐵 mode of a transistor, when the collector voltage is changed by 0.5 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡. The collector current
changes by 0.05 𝑚𝐴. The output resistance will be
a) 10 𝑘Ω b) 20 𝑘Ω
c) 5 𝑘Ω d) 2.5 𝑘Ω
35. In order to prepare a 𝑝-type semiconductor, pure silicon can be doped with
a) Phosphorus b) Aluminium
c) Antimony d) Germanium
SECTION - B
36. Which one of the following statement is not correct in the case of light emitting diodes
a) It is a heavily doped 𝑝-𝑛 junction b) It emits light only when it is forward biased
c) It emits light only when it is reverse biased d) The energy of the light emitted is less than the
energy gap of the semiconductor used
37. A source of 8𝑉 drives the diode in fig. through a current-limiting resistor of 100 𝑜ℎ𝑚. Then the magnitude
of the slope load line on the 𝑉-𝐼 characteristics of the diode is

–
8V
+

100 W

a) 0.01 b) 100
c) 0.08 d) 12.5
38. 14 × 10"1 electrons reach the anode per second. If the power consumed is 448 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠, then the plate
(anode) voltage is
a) 150 𝑉 b) 200𝑉
Page|4
 c) 14 × 448𝑉 d) 448/14𝑉
39. A piece of copper and another of germanium are cooled from room temperature to 77 K, the resistance of
a) Each of them increases b) Each of them decreases
c) Copper decreases and germanium increases d) Copper increases and germanium decreases
40. Silicon is a semiconductor. If a small amount of 𝐴𝑠 is added to it, then its electrical conductivity
a) Decreases b) Increases
c) Remains unchanged d) Becomes zero
41. Semiconductor is damaged by the strong current due to
a) Lack of free electron b) Excess of electrons
c) Excess of proton d) None of these
(𝐴 + 𝐵) ∙ •••••••••
42. What will be the input of 𝐴 and 𝐵 for the Boolean expression •••••••••• (𝐴 ∙ 𝐵) = 1
a) 0, 0 b) 0, 1
c) 1, 0 d) 1, 1
43. Platinum and silicon are heated upto 250℃ and after that cooled. In the process of cooling
a) Resistance of platinum will increase and that of b) Resistance of silicon will increase and that of
silicon will decrease platinum will decrease
c) Resistance of both will increase d) Resistance of both will decrease
!"
44. Mutual conductance of triode is 2 mΩ and the amplification factor is 50. Its anode is connected with a
source of 250 V and a resistance of 25 kΩ. The voltage gain of this amplifier is
a) 12.5 b) 10
c) 25 d) 50
45. A material has 𝑁 atom in its crystal structure which is a hexagonal close packed. Then the number of
electronic states in a band is
a) 𝑁 b) 2 𝑁
c) 4 𝑁 d) 6 𝑁
46. In a CE, n-p-n transistor circuit, the emitter current is
a) More than the collector current b) Less than the collector current
c) Less than the base current d) Equal to the difference of the collector current and
the base current
47. Carbon, silicon and germanium atoms have four valence electrons each. Their valence and conduction
bands are separated by energy band gaps represented by (𝐸2 )C, (𝐸2 )Si and (𝐸2 )Ge respectively. Which one
of the following relationships is true in their case?
a) (𝐸2 )C > (𝐸2 )Si b) (𝐸2 )C = (𝐸2 )Si
c) (𝐸2 )C < (𝐸2 )Ge d) (𝐸2 )C (𝐸2 )Si
48. In a n-p-n transistor amplifier, the collector current is 9 mA. If 90% of the electrons from the emitter reach
the collector, then
a) α = 0.9, β = 9.0 b) The base current is 10 mA
c) The emitter current is 1 mA d) α = 9.0, β = 0.9
49. The device that can act as a complete electronic circuit is
a) Zener diode b) Junction diode
c) Integrated circuit d) Junction transistor
50. The plate current 𝑖 in a triode valve is given 𝑖 = 𝐾ž𝑉 + 𝜇𝑉 Ÿ%/& where 𝑖 is in milliampere and 𝑉 and 𝑉
' ' ' 2 ' ' 2
5 !%
are in 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡. If 𝑟' = 10 𝑜ℎ𝑚, and 𝑔6 = 5 × 10 𝑚ℎ𝑜, then for 𝑖' = 8 𝑚𝐴 and 𝑉' = 300 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡, what is the
value of 𝐾 and grid cut off voltage
a) −6𝑉, (30)%/& b) −6𝑉, (1/30)%/&
c) +6𝑉, (1/30)%/& d) +6𝑉, (1/30)%/&

Page|5
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) b 2) d 3) c 4) d 29) c 30) c 31) c 32) c
5) b 6) c 7) a 8) c 33) d 34) a 35) b 36) c
9) b 10) c 11) a 12) c 37) a 38) b 39) c 40) b
13) c 14) c 15) a 16) c 41) b 42) a 43) b 44) c
17) a 18) a 19) d 20) d 45) b 46) a 47) a 48) a
21) d 22) a 23) b 24) d 49) c 50) b
25) c 26) b 27) d 28) c

Page|6
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS:
1 (b) For a wide range of values of load
Reverse biased potential for the zener resistance, the current in the zener diode
breakdown may change but the voltage across it
𝑉7 = 𝐸𝑑 = 108 × 2.5 × 10!8 = 2.5 volt remains unaffected. Thus the output
2 (d) voltage across the zener diode is a
In an intrinsic semiconductor, 𝑛# = 𝑛$ regulated voltage
3 (c) 14 (c)
In simple cubic lattice, volume, 𝑉 = 𝑎% A diode is used as a rectifier to convert 𝑎𝑐
mass of unit cell 𝐴/𝑁 𝐴 to 𝑑𝑐
density = = =
volume of unit cell 𝑉 𝑁𝑎% 16 (c)
4 (d) Because 𝑁-side is more positive as
ℎ𝑐 12400 12400 compared to 𝑃-side
𝐸= ⇒𝜆= = = 4960Å
𝜆 𝐸(𝑒𝑣) 2.5 18 (a)
This is the maximum wavelength i.e., the In the given condition diode is in reverse
signals having wavelength greater than this biasing so it acts as open circuit. Hence
value are not detected by photodiode. potential difference between 𝐴 and 𝐵 is 6𝑉
Hence correct option is (d) 19 (d)
5 (b) At high reverse voltage, due to high electric
:" "/
In half wave rectifier 𝑉9. = = field, the minority charge carriers, while
0 0
6 (c) crossing the junction acquire very high
In space charge limited region, the plate velocities. These by collision breaks down
%/& the covalent bonds generating more
current is given by Child’s law 𝑖' = 𝐾𝑉'
%/&
carriers. A chain reaction is established
;#! :#! 8// %/&
Thus, =v y =¥ ¦ = (4)%/& = giving rise to high current. This mechanism
;#$ :#$ "1/
is called avalanche breakdown.
8
20 (d)
Or 𝑖'& = 𝑖'" × 8 = 10 × 8 𝑚𝐴 = 80 𝑚𝐴
Gallium, boron and aluminum are trivalent
7 (a)
21 (d)
N N Here Boolean expression is 𝑌 = ••••••••••••••
(𝐴 + 𝐵) ∙ 𝐶 .
so 𝑌 = 𝐴.•••••
𝐵 = ••••
0.1 = 1 as the boolean
P
expression of it is 𝑌 = •••••
𝐴. 𝐵.
The arrow head in the transistor symbol 22 (a)
always shows the direction of hole flow in Amplification factor 𝜇 = 20
the emitter region Plate resistance 𝑅' =10 kΩ = 10 × 10% Ω
10 (c) ∴ Mutual conductance
In that states output X, Y and Z changes to < &/
𝑔6 = C = "/×"// = 2 × 10!% mho
0, 1, 0. #

11 (a) = 2 milli mho

From circuit 23 (b)
𝑌 = §§§§§§
𝐴∙𝐵 =𝐴∙𝐵 Output of 𝐺" = (𝐴 + 𝐵);
This is an output of an AND gate. ••••••
Output of 𝐺& = 𝐴 ∙ 𝐵;
12 (c) Output of 𝐺% = (𝐴 + 𝐵). ••••••
𝑨∙𝑩
Voltage gain =
:%&'
=
<
⇒
>%&'
=
&1 Which give XOR gate.
*# -"×$"/
:() "= /./1 "= 24 (d)
+, $"×$"/
⇒ 𝑉@AB = 2.5 𝑉 ∆𝑖. (10 − 5) × 10!%
𝛽= = = 50
13 (c) ∆𝑖E (200 − 100) × 10!8
26 (b)
Page|7
 1 1 1 1 8
𝑣= = 𝑖 × 100 + 𝑉 = 8 ⇒ 𝑖 = − 𝑉+
2𝜋√𝐿𝐶 2𝜋 "/ 100 100
- × 10!% × 0.04 × 10!8 ⇒ 𝑖 = −(0.01)𝑉 + 0.08
0!
"
= 25 𝑘𝐻F Thus the slope of 𝑖-𝑉 graph = = 0.01
C,
28 (c)
38 (b)
If inputs are 𝐴 and 𝐵 then output for NAND
𝑃 448 × 10!%
••••
gate is 𝑌 = 𝐴𝐵 𝑃 = 𝑉𝑖 ⇒ 𝑉 = =
𝑖 14 × 10"1 × 1.6 × 10!"J
•••• = 1• = 0
⇒ If 𝐴 = 𝐵 = 1, 𝑌 = 1.1 = 200𝑉
29 (c) 39 (c)
In reverse biasing negative terminal of the We know that resistance of conductor is
battery is connected to 𝑁-side directly proportional to temperature (𝑖𝑒,
32 (c) 𝑅 ∝ ∆𝑡), while resistance of semiconductor
Intensity ∝ Number of electrons is inversely proportional to temperature
33 (d) "
¥𝑖𝑒, 𝑅 ∝ ∆I¦.
After saturation plate current can be
increased by increasing the temperature of Therefore, it is clear that resistance of
filament. It can be done by increasing the conductor decreases with decrease in
filament current temperature of 𝑣𝑖𝑐𝑒-𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑎, while in case of
34 (a) semiconductor, resistance increase with
Here ∆𝑉. = 0.5 𝑉, ∆𝑖. = 0.05𝑚𝐴 = 0.05 × decrease in temperature of 𝑣𝑖𝑐𝑒-𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑎.
10!% 𝐴 Since, copper is pure conductor and
Output resistance is given by germanium is a semiconductor hence, due
∆𝑉. 0.5 to decrease in temperature, resistance of
𝑅GHI = = = 105 Ω = 10𝑘Ω conductor decreases while that of
∆𝑖. 0.05 × 10!%
35 (b) semiconductor increases.
When an impurity atom with 3 valence 40 (b)
electrons (as aluminium) is introduced in a Impurity increases the conductivity
pure silicon crystal, all the three of its 41 (b)
valence electrons form covalent bonds with When a strong current passes through the
one each valence electrons of the nearest semiconductor it heats up the crystal and
silicon atom while the valence electron of covalent bonds are broken. Hence because
the fourth nearest silicon atom is not able of excess number of free electrons it
to form the bond, leading to formation of behaves like a conductor
hole or 𝑝-type semiconductor. While 42 (a)
phosphorus being a pentavalent impurity The given Boolean expression can be
leads to formation of 𝑛-type semiconductor. written as
𝑌 = (𝐴 •••••••• •••••
+ 𝐵). (𝐴. 𝐵) = (𝐴̅. 𝐵•). (𝐴̅ + 𝐵•)
= (𝐴̅ 𝐴̅). 𝐵• + (𝐵•. 𝐵•)
= 𝐴̅. 𝐵• + 𝐴̅ 𝐵• = 𝐴̅ 𝐵•
𝑨 𝑩 𝒀
0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 1 0
43 (b)
37 (a) The temperature coefficient of resistance of
If 𝑖 is the current in the diode and 𝑉 is silicon (𝑖𝑒, semiconductor) is negative and
voltage drop across it, then for given figure that of platinum (𝑖𝑒, conductor) is positive.
voltage equation is 44 (c)

Page|8
 µ 50 50 (b)
𝑅L = = = 25 × 10% Ω;
g 6 2 × 10!% 𝜇 = 𝑟' 𝑔6 = 50
µ𝑅( 50 × 25 × 10% %/& ∆:#
2$//
&;#
𝐴M = = = 25 From 𝑖' = 𝐾𝑉' ⇒ = 𝑟' =
𝑅L + 𝑅( 25 × 10% + 25 × 10% ∆;# %O !//
46 (a) "/%
𝜇 3𝜇𝐾 &/% /𝑖'
In n-p-n transistor as CE amplifier ⇒ 𝑔6 = =
𝑟' 2
𝑖# = 𝑖E + 𝑖. 3
Therefore, the emitter current is more than = 𝜇𝐾 &/% ³𝐾"/% ž𝑉'
2
the collector current. "/&
+ 𝜇𝑉2 Ÿ ´
48 (a)
3 "/& "/%
Let 𝐼# be the emitter current. = 𝜇𝐾ž𝑉' + 𝜇𝑉2 Ÿ = 75 𝐾 ž𝑖' /𝐾Ÿ
J/ 2
∴ "//
× 𝐼# = 𝐼. Because 𝑖' was in 𝑚𝐴, 𝑔6 is substituted as
"// N0 "/
⇒ 𝐼# = = 𝐼. 5 𝑚℧
J/ J
"/%
𝐼. 9 ⇒ 5 = 75𝐾 &/% 𝑖' = 75 𝐾 &/% (8)"/% ⇒ 𝐾
∴𝛼= = = 0.9
𝐼# 10 1 %/&
And =v y
30
𝐼. 𝐼. 1 1 9 : %//
𝛽= = = N1 = "/ = Cut off grid voltage 𝑉P = − <4 = − 1/ =
𝐼# 𝐼# − 𝐼. −1 −1 1
N0 J −6𝑉
=9

Page|9
 Communication Systems
Date : TEST ID:
Time : 00:45:00 Straight Line Marks: 180

CHAPTERWISE TEST PAPER

SECTION-A
Single Correct Answer Type

1. The characteristic impedance of a co-axial cable is160 Ω. If its inductance is 0.4 mH, its capacitance would
be
a) 15.6 µF b) 1.6 F
c) 15.6 nF d) 15.6 pF
2. In amplitude modulation, carrier wave frequencies are
a) Lower compared to those in frequency b) Higher compared to those in frequency modulation
modulation
c) Same as in frequency modulation d) Lower sometimes and higher sometimes to those in
frequency modulation
3. What type of modulation is employed in India for radio transmission
a) Amplitude modulation b) Frequency modulation
c) Pulse modulation d) None of these
4. In the above question, if oscillator output is modulated by audio frequencies upto 10 kHz, the frequency
range occupied by the side bonds will be
a) 711.9 kHz to 712.1 kHz b) 692 kHz to 732 kHz
c) 702 kHz to 722 kHz d) 71.2 kHz to 70.2 kHz
5. If an electromagnetic wave is transmitted to the height equal to 150 km with maximum frequency 300 kHz
and critical frequency 100 kHz, the skip distance is
a) 426 km b) 636 km
c) 824 km d) 849 km
6. The diameter of an optical fiber is
a) 10!" m b) 10!# m
!$
c) 10 cm d) 10!% cm
7. The population inversion necessary for laser action used in solid state lasers is
a) Electrical discharge b) Inelastic atom-atom collisions
c) Direct conversion d) Optical pumping
8. What fraction of the surface area of earth can be covered to establish communication by one geostationary
satellite?
a) 1/2 b) 1/3
c) 1/4 d) 1/8
9. Calculate the phase velocity of electromagnetic wave having electron density and frequency of D-layer,
𝑁 = 400 electron 𝑐𝑐 !& , 𝑣 = 200 kHz
a) 3 × 10' ms!& b) 3.5 × 10' ms!&
'
c) 6.9 × 10 ms !& d) 1.1 × 10( ms!&
10. A laser beam of pulse power 10&% W is focused on an object of area10!# cm% . the energy flux in Wcm% at
the point of focus is
a) 10%) b) 10&*
'
c) 10 d) 10#
11. In satellite communication, the communication satellite;
a) Acts as a reflector for a beam of modulated b) Acts as a repeater for a signal reaching there, without
microwave from transmitter sent directly any change in frequency
towards it
c) Receives the coming modulated microwave d) None of the above
signal, amplifies it and returns it to earth at a
different frequency
12. The losses in transmission lines are
a) Radiation losses only b) Conductor heating only
c) Dielectric heating only d) All of the above
13. What should be the maximum acceptance angle at the aircore interface of an optical fibre if 𝑛& and 𝑛% are
the refractive indices of the core and the cladding, respectively
a) sin!& (𝑛% /𝑛& ) b) sin!& e𝑛&% − 𝑛%%
𝑛% 𝑛&
c) gtan!& h d) gtan!& h
𝑛& 𝑛%
14. The space wave propagation is utilized in
a) Only television communication b) Can be reflected by ionosphere
c) Cannot be reflected by mesosphere d) Cannot be reflected by any layer of earth's
atmosphere
15. Ozone layer blocks the radiations of wavelength
a) Less than 3 × 10!+ m b) Equal to 3 × 10!+ m
!+ d) All of these
c) More than 3 × 10 m
16. The modulation technique used for transforming digital data into analog signals are
a) Amplitude shift keying (ASK) only b) Frequency shift keying (FSK) only
c) Phase shift keying (PSK) only d) All of the above
17. What is the range of the characteristic impedance of a coaxial cable?
a) Between 150 W to 600 W b) Between 50 W to 70 W
c) Between 0 W to 50 W d) Between 100 W to 150 W
18. Advantage of optical fibre is
a) High band width and EM interference b) Low band width and EM interference
c) High band width low transmission capacity and d) High band width, high data transmission capacity
no EM interference and no EM interference
19. What should be the velocity of an object so that it’s mass becomes twice of its rest mass?
a) 3 × 10' ms!& b) 2.59 × 10' ms!&
c) 4 × 10' ms!& d) None of these
20. In pulse modulation of analog signals, common pulse system employed are
a) Pulse amplitude modulation (PAM) b) Pulse position and pulse duration modulation (PPM
and PDM)
c) Pulse code modulation (PCM) d) All of the above
21. In an amplitude modulated wave for audio frequency of 500 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒/𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑, the appropriate carrier
frequency will be
a) 50 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠 b) 100 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠
c) 500 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠 d) 50,000 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠
22. Consider an optical communication system operating at 𝜆~800 𝑛𝑚. Suppose, only 1% of the optical source
frequency is the available channel bandwidth for optical communication. How many channels can be
accommodated for transmitting audio signals requiring a bandwidth of 8 𝑘𝐻𝑧
a) 4.8 × 10' b) 48
'
c) 6.2 × 10 d) 4.8 × 10"
23. Through which mode of propagation, the radio waves can be sent from one place to another
a) Ground wave propagation b) Sky wave propagation
Page|2
 c) Space wave propagation d) All of the above
24. The fundamental radio antenna is a metal rod which has a length equal to
a) 𝜆 in free space at the frequency of operation b) 𝜆/2 in free space at the frequency of operation
c) 𝜆/4 in free space at the frequency of operation d) 3𝜆/4 in free space at the frequency of operation
25. In optical communication system operating at 1200 nm, only 2% of the source frequency is available for
TV transmission having a bandwidth of 5 MHz. The number of TV channels that can be transmitted is
a) 2 million b) 10 million
c) 0.1 million d) 1 million
26. The waves relevant to telecommunications are
a) Visible light b) Infrared
c) Ultraviolet d) Microwave
27. A laser device produces amplification in the
a) Microwave region b) Ultraviolet or visible region
c) Infrared region d) None of the above
28. In which frequencies range space waves normally propagated
a) HF b) VHF
c) UHF d) SHF
29. The electromagnetic waves of frequency 2 𝑀𝐻𝑧 to 30 𝑀𝐻𝑧 are used
a) In ground wave propagation b) In sky wave propagation
c) In microwave propagation d) In satellite communication
30. Venus looks brighter than other stars, due to
a) Atomic fusion takes place on its surface b) It is closer to the earth than other stars
c) It has higher density than other stars d) It is heavier than other stars
31. What is the refractive index of the fiber core?

a) 1.556 b) 1.453
c) 1.425 d) 1.626
32. Which of the following explain that all galaxies are receding from us?
a) White dwarfs b) Neutron stars
c) Black holes d) Red shift
33. In earth's atmosphere, for 𝐸-layer, the virtual height and critical frequency are
a) 80 km and 3MHz b) 90 km and 3.5 MHz
c) 120 km and 4.5 MHz d) 110 km and 4 MHz
34. A laser beam is used for carrying out surgery because it
a) Is highly monochromatic b) Is highly coherent
c) Is highly directional d) Can be sharply focused
35. An antenna is a device
a) That convert electromagnetic energy into radio b) That converts radio frequency signal into
frequency signal electromagnetic energy
c) That converts guided electromagnetic waves d) None of these
into free space electromagnetic waves and vice-
versa
SECTION - B
36. The distance of coverage of a transmitting antenna is 12.8 km. Then, the height of the antenna is
(Given that radius of earth = 6400 km)
a) 6.4 m b) 12.8 m
c) 3.2 m d) 16 m

Page|3
37. The maximum distance upto which TV transmission from a TV tower of height ℎ can be received is
proportional to
a) ℎ&/% b) ℎ
c) ℎ $/% d) ℎ%
38. The velocity factor of a transmission line is 𝑥. If dielectric constant of the medium is 2.6, the value of 𝑥 is
a) 0.26 b) 0.62
c) 2.6 d) 6.2
39. The normalised fiber frequency is expressed by (𝑎=fiber core radius, 𝜆) =free space wavelength, 𝜇& , 𝜇% =
refractive index of core and cladding)
2𝜋𝑎 % 2𝜋𝑎 %
a) (𝜇& − 𝜇%% )% b) (𝜇& − 𝜇%% )&/%
𝜆) 𝜆)
2𝜋𝑎 % 2𝜋𝑎 %
c) (𝜇& − 𝜇%% )!&/% d) (𝜇& − 𝜇%% )
𝜆) 𝜆)
40. The range of characteristics impedance for co-axial wire lines is
a) 40 Ω to 150 Ω b) 400 Ω to 1500 Ω
c) 4 Ω to 15 Ω d) 40 kΩ to 150 kΩ
41. Long distance short-wave radio broadcasting uses
a) Ground wave b) Ionospheric wave
c) Direct wave d) Sky wave
42. The characteristic impedance of a coaxial cable is of the order of
a) 50 W b) 200 W
c) 270 W d) None of these
43. If 𝜇& and 𝜇% are the refractive indices of the material of core and cladding of an optical fiber, then the loss
of light due to its leakage can be minimised by having
a) 𝜇& > 𝜇% b) 𝜇& < 𝜇%
c) 𝜇& = 𝜇% d) None of these
44. A broken ligament is being ‘welded’ back in place using 20 ms pulses from a 0.5 W laser operating at a
wavelength of 632 nm. The number of photons in 5 pulses of laser are
a) 1.59 × 10!&' b) 3.18 × 10!&+
c) 1.59 × 10%$ d) 3.18 × 10!&*
45. A laser beam is used for locating distant objects because
a) It is monochromatic b) It is coherent
c) It is not absorbed d) It has small angular speed
46. The mobile telephones operate typically in the range of
a) 1 − 100 𝑀𝐻𝑧 b) 100 − 200 𝑀𝐻𝑧
c) 1000 − 2000𝑀𝐻𝑧 d) 800 − 950𝑀𝐻𝑧
47. The velocity of a particle at which the kinetic energy is equal to its rest energy is
3𝑐 𝑐
a) ˆ ‰ b) 3
2 √2
!
𝑐√3
c) (3𝑐)" d)
2 2
48. Which of the following is not the main characteristic of laser beam?
a) High irradiance b) High divergence
c) Highly monochromatic d) Highly coherent
49. The frequency band used in the downlink of satellite communication is
a) 9.5 to 2.5 𝐺𝐻𝑧 b) 896 to 901 𝑀𝐻𝑧
c) 3.7 to 4.2 𝐺𝐻𝑧 d) 840 to 935 𝑀𝐻𝑧
50. The maximum range, d-./ of radar is
a) Proportional to the cube root of the peak b) Proportional to the fourth root of the peak
transmitted power transmitted power

Page|4
c) Proportional to the square root of the peak d) Not related to the peak transmitted power at all
transmitted power

Page|5
 : ANSWER KEY :
1) c 2) a 3) a 4) c 29) b 30) b 31) c 32) d
5) d 6) b 7) d 8) b 33) d 34) b 35) c 36) b
9) c 10) b 11) c 12) d 37) a 38) b 39) b 40) a
13) b 14) d 15) a 16) d 41) c 42) c 43) a 44) c
17) b 18) d 19) b 20) d 45) b 46) d 47) d 48) c
21) d 22) a 23) d 24) c 49) c 50) b
25) d 26) d 27) b 28) c

Page|6
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (c) 11 (c)
0 A communication satellite receives the coming
From 𝑍) = e1 ,
modulated microwave signal, amplifies it and
𝐿 0.4 × 10!$ return it to earth at a different frequency
𝐶= =
𝑍)% 160 × 160 12 (d)
= 15.62 × 10!&( F = 15.62 nF All the three types of energy losses persist in
4 (c) transmission lines
Here, 𝑓2 = 10 𝑘𝐻𝑧 13 (b)
∴ 𝑓34 = 𝑓5 ± 𝑓2 = (712 ± 10) = kHz Core of acceptance angle 𝜃 = sin!& ˜𝑛&% − 𝑛%%
= 702 kHz and 722 kHz 14 (d)
5 (d) The space wave communication is utilized in all
Here, ℎ = 150 km, 𝑣 = 300 kHz, the three communication 𝑖𝑒, television, radar and
𝑣5 = 100 kHz microwave communication
15 (a)
𝑣 %
𝐷6789 = 2ℎ“ˆ ‰ − 1 Ozone layer extends from 30 km to nearly 50 km
𝑣5
above the earth’s surface in ozone sphere. This
300 × 10% layer absorbs the major part of ultraviolet
= 2 × 150 × 10$ “” •−1 radiations coming from the sun and does not
100 × 10$
allow them to reach the earth’s surface.
= 849 Hz
6 (b) The range of ultraviolet radiations is
The diameter of optical fiber is 10!# cm 100 Å to 4000 Å. Thus, it blocks the radiations of
7 (d) wavelength less than 3 × 10!+ m ›or 3000 Åœ.
The population inversion required for laser
action in solid state laser is optical pumping 16 (d)
8 (b) All the three modulation techniques are used for
We uses three geostationary satellites placed at transforming digital data into analog signals
the vertiex of an equilateral triangle, then the 17 (b)
entire earth, can be covered by the Characteristic impedance of a coaxial cable is
communication network each satellite covers 1/3 between 50 Ω to 70 Ω.
of the globe.
18 (d)
9 (c) Few advantages of optical fibres are that the
number of signals carried by optical fibres is
81.45𝑁
𝜇 = “1 − much more than that carried by the Cu wire or
𝑣%
radio waves. Optical fibres are practically free
81.45 × 400 × 10* from electromagnetic interference and problem
= “1 − = 0.43 of cross talks whereas ordinary cables and
(200 × 10$ )%
𝑐 microwave links suffer a lot from it.
𝜇= 19 (b)
𝑣
5 $×&)# The relativistic mass 𝑀 is 𝑀 = 𝛾𝑚
∴ Phase velocity, 𝑣 = : = ).#$
' !& &
= 6.98 × 10 ms Where, 𝑚 is rest mass and 𝛾 = "
is the
F&!$"
10 (b) %

Electric flux ϕ =
=>?@A =CDAE Lorentz factor
.EA.
10&%
= !# = 10&* Wcm!&
10

Page|7
 having 𝑢 the relative velocity between the vI
∴ Member of channels =
observer and object and 𝑐 is the speed of light. bond width
"×&)!"
𝑚 Or No of channels = "×&)&
= 10* = 1 million
∴𝑀=
G" 26 (d)
e1 −
5" The critical frequency of sky wave undergoing
reflection from a layer of ionosphere is
Given, 𝑀 = 2𝑚
fJ = 8 ˜𝑁2KL
% Where 𝑁 is electron density per m$ .
𝑚 𝑢% 1 % 𝑓5% (10 × 10* )%
∴ 2𝑚 = ⇒ “1 − ¡ = ˆ ‰ 𝑁2KL = = = 1.2 × 10&% m!$
G" 𝑐% 2 81 81
e1 −
5" 27 (b)
A laser device produces amplification in the
𝑢% 1 𝑢% 1 3
⇒1− % = ⇒ % =1− = ultraviolet or visible region.
𝑐 4 𝑐 4 4 28 (c)
𝑢% 3 𝑢 √3 Ultra high frequency waves are generally
⇒ = ⇒ = normally propagated
𝑐% 4 𝑐 2
30 (b)
√3 √3 Venus looks brighter than other stars because it
⇒𝑢= 𝑐= × 3 × 10' = 2.59 × 10' ms!&
2 2 is closer to earth than other stars.

20 (d) 31 (c)
All the four pulse systems are employed in pulse Taking refraction from air to core of optical fiber.
modulation Then,
21 (d) 𝜇& sin 10° 0.1736
= = = 1.424
Carrier frequency > audio frequency 𝜇) sin 7° 0.1219
22 (a) or 𝜇& = 1.424 (as 𝜇% = 1)
5
Optical source frequency 𝑓 = H 32 (d)
= 3 × 10' /(800 × 10!( ) = 3.8 × 10&# 𝐻𝑧 Hubble’s law is the statement in physical
Bandwidth of channel (1% of above) = 3.8 × cosmology that the red shift in light coming from
10&% 𝐻𝑧 distant galaxies is proportional to their distance
Number of channels = (Total bandwidth of 𝑉 = 𝐻) 𝐷
channel)/(Bandwidth needed per channel) Where 𝑉 is the recessional velocity due o red
= (3.8 × 10&% )(8 × 10$ ) ∼ 4.8 × 10' shift, 𝐻) is Hubble’s constant, 𝐷 is the proper
23 (d) distance that the light had travelled from the
The radio waves can be sent from one place to galaxy in the res frame of the observer. This
another through following propagation mode. (i) effect helps us in explaining the fact that galaxies
space wave propagation, sky wave propagation are receding from us.
and ground wave propagation 33 (d)
25 (d) The virtual height and critical frequency of 𝐸-
The frequency optical communication layer is 110 km and 4 MHz
𝑐 3 × 10' 34 (b)
v = or v = A laser beam is used for carrying out surgery
𝜆 1200 × 10!(
&$
v = 25 × 10 Hz because, it can be sharply focused due to a very
But only 2% of the source frequency is available high energy per unit area is involved at a
for TV transmission location.
𝑣 I = 2.5 × 10&# × 2%
%
35 (c)
Or 𝑣 I = 2.5 × 10&# × &)) An antenna is a metallic structure used to radiate
Or 𝑣 I = 5 × 10&% Hz or receive EM waves

Page|8
36 (b) of coherent beam is used I many military
Given 𝑑 = 12.8 km, 𝑅 = 6400 km applications to enhance the locating of distant
We have 𝑑 = √2ℎ𝑅 objects. Since, a laser beam typically has low
𝑑% (12.8)% divergence, the laser light appears as a small spot
ℎ= = = 12.8 m even at long distances, the user simply places the
2𝑅 2 × 6400
37 (a) spot on the desired target and barrel of the gun is
𝑑 = √2ℎ𝑅 ⇒ 𝑑 ∝ ℎ&/% aligned.
38 (b) 47 (d)
1 1 The relativistic kinetic energy of a particle of rest
𝑣. 𝑓. = = = 0.62 mass 𝑚) is given by
√𝑘 √2.6
39 (b)
%MK 𝐾 = (𝑚 − 𝑚) ) 𝑐 %
The normalised fiber frequency, 𝑣 = (𝜇&% −
H'
2'
𝜇%% )&/% 𝑚= , where 𝑚 is the mass of the
N&!(P " /5 " )
2𝜋𝑎 particle moving with velocity v.
𝑣= × 100 = 1%
𝜆)
40 (a) 𝑚)
∴𝐾=¨ − 𝑚) © 𝑐 % 𝑧
Characteristic impedance (𝑍) ) of a co-axial wire ˜1 − (𝑣 % /𝑐 % )
line is lower 𝑖𝑒, from 40 to 15Ω
42 (c) According to problem
The characteristic impedance of a coaxial cable is
kinetic energy = rest energy
of the order of 270 Ω.
43 (a) 𝑚)
Working of optical fiber is based on total internal ∴ ¨ − 𝑚) © = 𝑚) 𝑐 %
˜1 − (𝑣 % /𝑐 % )
reflection. Hence, µ& > µ%
44 (c) 2' 5 " & #P "
or = 2𝑚) 𝑐 % or = 4 or =3
The power of laser is 0.5 W, let 𝑛 photon/s are N&!(P " /5 " ) &!(P " /5 " ) 5"

incident by laser pulse on the broken ligament,

then √3𝑐
∴𝑣=
2
𝑛 × ℎ𝑣 = 0.5 W
48 (c)
𝑛ℎ𝑐 0.5 × 𝜆 Laser beam is almost perfectly parallel and have
⇒ = 0.5 ⇒ 𝑛 = low divergence.
𝜆 ℎ𝑐
50 (b)
)."×*$%×&)() &'
= *.*%*×&)(*+ ×$×&)# = 1.59 × 10 photon/s Maximum Range of the radar is given by
&/#
𝑃R 𝐴% 𝑆
So, number of photons contained in 5 pulses are, 𝑅-./ = ” •
4𝜋𝜆% 𝑃-ST
𝑛 × 5 × (20 × 10$ ) = 1.59 × 10%$ Where 𝑃R : peak value of transmitted power
𝐴: capture area of the receiving antenna
45 (b) 𝑆: radar cross-sectional area
A LASER (Light Amplification by Stimulated 𝜆: wavelength of RADAR wave
Emission of Radiation) is an optical source that 𝑃-ST : minimum receivable power of the receiver
emits photons in a coherent beam. The property

Page|9